Are you sure?
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
MorganFM MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 15:55
Bioinstrumentation
i
P1: IML/FFX P2: IML/FFX QC: IML/FFX T1: IML
MorganFM MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 15:55
Copyright ©2006 by Morgan & Claypool
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
any form or by any means—electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or any other except for brief quotations
in printed reviews, without the prior permission of the publisher.
Bioinstrumentation
John D. Enderle
www.morganclaypool.com
ISBN10: 1598291327 paperback
ISBN13: 9781598291322 paperback
ISBN10: 1598291335 ebook
ISBN13: 9781598291339 ebook
DOI 10.2200/S00043ED1V01Y200608BME006
Library of Congress CataloginginPublication Data
SYNTHESIS LECTURES ON BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING
Lecture #6
Series Editor and Afﬁliation: John D. Enderle, University of Connecticut
19300328 Print
19300336 Electronic
First Edition
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Portions of this manuscript were reprinted from the following book with the Permission of Elsevier, INTRODUC
TION TO BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING, ISBN 0122386626 2005, Chapter 8, pp403504, Enderle et al 2
nd
edition. This permission is granted for nonexclusive world English rights only in both print and on the world wide
web.
Additional Information regarding the bestselling book, Introduction to Biomedical Engineering, 2
nd
edition 2005, by
Enderle, Blanchard and Bronzino, from Elsevier can be found on the Elsevier Homepage http://www/elsevier.com.
ii
P1: IML/FFX P2: IML/FFX QC: IML/FFX T1: IML
MorganFM MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 15:55
Bioinstrumentation
John D. Enderle
Program Director & Professor for Biomedical Engineering
University of Connecticut
SYNTHESIS LECTURES ON BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING #6
M
&C
Morgan
&
Claypool Publishers
iii
P1: IML/FFX P2: IML/FFX QC: IML/FFX T1: IML
MorganFM MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 15:55
ABSTRACT
This short book provides basic information about bioinstrumentation and electric circuit theory.
Many biomedical instruments use a transducer or sensor to convert a signal created by the body
into an electric signal. Our goal here is to develop expertise in electric circuit theory applied
to bioinstrumentation. We begin with a description of variables used in circuit theory, charge,
current, voltage, power and energy. Next, Kirchhoff ’s current and voltage laws are introduced,
followed by resistance, simpliﬁcations of resistive circuits and voltage and current calculations.
Circuit analysis techniques are then presented, followed by inductance and capacitance, and
solutions of circuits using the differential equation method. Finally, the operational ampliﬁer
and time varying signals are introduced. This lecture is written for a student or researcher or
engineer who has completed the ﬁrst two years of an engineering program (i.e., 3 semesters of
calculus and differential equations). A considerable effort has been made to develop the theory
in a logical manner—developing special mathematical skills as needed. At the end of the short
book is a wide selection of problems, ranging from simple to complex.
KEYWORDS
Bioinstrumentation, Circuit Theory, Introductory Biomedical Engineering, Sensors,
Transducers, Circuits, Voltage, Current
iv
P1: IML/FFX P2: IML/FFX QC: IML/FFX T1: IML
MorganFM MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 15:55
v
Contents
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Basic Bioinstrumentation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. Charge, Current, Voltage, Power and Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1 Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2.1 Kirchhoff ’s Current Law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.3 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.3.1 Kirchhoff ’s Voltage Law. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.4 Power and Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.5 Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4. Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.1 Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.3 Equivalent Resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.4 Series and Parallel Combinations of Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.4.1 Resistors in Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.4.2 Resistors in Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.5 Voltage and Current Divider Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.5.1 Voltage Divider Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.5.2 Current Divider Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5. Linear Network Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.1 NodeVoltage Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.2 MeshCurrent Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.3 Linearity, Superposition and Source Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.3.1 Linearity and Superposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.3.2 Equivalent Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6. Th´ evenin’s and Norton’s Theorems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.1 Th´ evenin’s Theorem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6.2 Norton’s Theorem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
P1: IML/FFX P2: IML/FFX QC: IML/FFX T1: IML
MorganFM MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 15:55
vi CONTENTS
6.3 Dependent Sources and Th´ evenin and Norton Equivalent Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . 59
7. Inductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.1 Power and Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8. Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
8.1 Power and Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
9. Inductance and Capacitance Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
10. General Approach to Solving Circuits Involving Resistors,
Capacitors and Inductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
10.1 Discontinuities and Initial Conditions in a Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10.2 Circuits with Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
11. Operational Ampliﬁers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
11.1 Voltage Characteristics of the Op Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
12. TimeVarying Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
12.1 Phasors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
12.2 Passive Circuit Elements in the Phasor Domain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
12.3 Kirchhoff ’s Laws and Other Techniques in the Phasor Domain. . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
13. Active Analog Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
14. Bioinstrumentation Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
14.1 Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
14.2 Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
13. Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
P1: IML/FFX P2: IML/FFX QC: IML/FFX T1: IML
MorganFM MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 15:55
vii
Preface
This short book on bioinstrumentation is written for a reader who has completed the ﬁrst two
years of an engineering program (i.e., three semesters of calculus and differential equations).
A considerable effort has been made to develop the theory in a logical manner—developing
special mathematical skills as needed.
I have found it best to introduce this material using simple examples followed by more
difﬁcult ones.
At the end of the short book is a wide selection of problems, ranging from simple to
difﬁcult, presented in the same general order as covered in the textbook.
I acknowledge and thank William Pruehsner for the technical illustrations. Portions of
this short book are from Chapter 8 of Enderle, J. D., Blanchard, S. M., and Bronzino, J. D.,
Introduction to Biomedical Engineering (Second Edition), Elsevier, Amsterdam, 2005, 1118 pages,
with Sections 1, 2 and 13 contributed by Susan Blanchard, Amanda Marley, and H. Troy Nagle.
P1: IML/FFX P2: IML/FFX QC: IML/FFX T1: IML
MorganFM MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 15:55
viii
P1: KDD
MOBK03601 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:0
1
C H A P T E R 1
Introduction
This short book provides basic information about bioinstrumentation and electric circuit theory.
Many biomedical instruments use a transducer or sensor to convert a signal created by the body
into an electric signal. Our goal here is to develop expertise in electric circuit theory applied
to bioinstrumentation. We begin with a description of variables used in circuit theory, charge,
current, voltage, power, and energy. Next, Kirchhoff ’s current and voltage laws are introduced,
followed by resistance, simpliﬁcations of resistive circuits and voltage and current calculations.
Circuit analysis techniques are then presented, followed by inductance and capacitance, and
solutions of circuits using the differential equation method. Finally, the operational ampliﬁer
and timevarying signals are introduced.
Before 1900, medicine had little to offer the typical citizen because its resources were
mainly the education and little black bag of the physician. The origins of the changes that
occurred within medical science are found in several developments that took place in the applied
sciences. During the early 19th century, diagnosis was based on physical examination, and
treatment was designed to heal the structural abnormality. By the late 19th century, diagnosis
was based on laboratory tests, and treatment was designed to remove the cause of the disorder.
The trend towards the use of technology accelerated throughout the 20th century. During
this period, hospitals became institutions of research and technology. Professionals in the areas
of chemistry, physics, mechanical engineering, and electrical engineering began to work in
conjunction with the medical ﬁeld, and biomedical engineering became a recognized profession.
As a result, medical technology advanced more in the 20th century than it had in the rest of
history combined (Fig. 1.1).
During this period, the area of electronics had a signiﬁcant impact on the development
of new medical technology. Men such as Richard Caton and Augustus Desire proved that
the human brain and heart depended upon bioelectric events. In 1903, William Einthoven
expanded on these ideas after he created the ﬁrst string galvanometer. Einthoven placed two
skin sensors on a man and attached them to the ends of a silvered wire that was suspended
through holes drilled in both ends of a large permanent magnet. The suspended silvered wire
moved rhythmically as the subject’s heart beat. By projecting a tiny light beamacross the silvered
P1: KDD
MOBK03601 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:0
2 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
1750
1800
1850
1900
1950
2000
1752 – Ben Franklin flew his kite in the storm.
1774 – John Walsh proved electricity
passes through humans.
1791 – Galvani published his findings
on “animal electricity.“
1800 – Volta built the first battery.
1820 – Oersted discovered electromagnetism.
Ampere measured the magnetic effect
of an electric current.
1860 – Maxwell worked out the mathematical
equations for the laws of
Electricity and magnetism.
1886 – Hertz discovered the electromagnetic wave.
1897 – Thomson discovered electrons.
1903 – Einthoven discovered the galvanometer.
1909 – Millikan measured the charge of the
electron.
1920s – Television was invented.
1935 – Amplifiers were used to record EEGs.
1948 – Transistors become readily available.
1959 – First transistorbased computer was made.
1972 – First CAT machine was made.
First microprocessor was used.
1785 – Coulomb worked out the laws
of attraction and repulsion between
electrically charged bodies.
1826 – Ohm formulated law of
electrical resistance.
1831– Faraday and Henry found
that a moving magnet would induce
an electric current in a coil of wire.
1895 – Roentgen discovered Xrays.
1904 – Fleming invented the vacuum tube.
1929 – Hans Berger recorded the first EEG.
1948 – The first large scale
computer was built.
1960 – Chardock and Greatbatch
created the first implantable pacemaker
1981 – IBM introduced the
first personal computer
FIGURE 1.1: Timeline for major inventions and discoveries that led to modern medical instrumenta
tion.
P1: KDD
MOBK03601 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:0
INTRODUCTION 3
wire, Einthoven was able to record the movement of the wire as waves on a scroll of moving
photographic paper. Thus, the invention of the string galvanometer led to the creation of the
electrocardiogram (ECG), which is routinely used today to measure and record the electrical
activity of abnormal hearts and to compare those signals to normal ones.
In 1929, Hans Berger created the ﬁrst electroencephalogram (EEG), which is used to
measure and record electrical activity of the brain. In 1935, electrical ampliﬁers were used to
prove that the electrical activity of the cortex had a speciﬁc rhythm, and, in 1960, electrical
ampliﬁers were used in devices such as the ﬁrst implantable pacemaker that was created by
William Chardack and Wilson Greatbatch. These are just a small sample of the many examples
in which the ﬁeld of electronics has been used to signiﬁcantly advance medical technology.
Many other advancements that were made in medical technology originated from re
search in basic and applied physics. In 1895, the Xray machine, one of the most important
technological inventions in the medical ﬁeld, was created when W. K. Roentgen found that
Xrays could be used to give pictures of the internal structures of the body. Thus, the Xray
machine was the ﬁrst imaging device to be created.
Another important addition to medical technology was provided by the invention of
the computer, which allowed much faster and more complicated analyses and functions to be
performed. One of the ﬁrst computerbased instruments in the ﬁeld of medicine, the sequential
multiple analyzer plus computer, was used to store a vast amount of data pertaining to clinical
laboratory information. The invention of the computer made it possible for laboratory tests to
be performed and analyzed faster and more accurately.
The ﬁrst largescale computerbased medical instrument was created in 1972 when the
computerized axial tomography (CAT) machine was invented. The CAT machine created an
image that showed all of the internal structures that lie in a single plane of the body. This
new type of image made it possible to have more accurate and easier diagnosis of tumors,
hemorrhages, and other internal damage from information that was obtained noninvasively.
Telemedicine, which uses computer technology to transmit information fromone medical
site to another, is being explored to permit access to health care for patients in remote locations.
Telemedicine can be used to let a specialist in a major hospital receive information on a patient
in a rural area and send back a plan of treatment speciﬁc for that patient.
Today, there is a wide variety of medical devices and instrumentation systems. Some are
used to monitor patient conditions or acquire information for diagnostic purposes, e.g. ECG
and EEG machines, while others are used to control physiological functions, e.g. pacemakers
and ventilators. Some devices, like pacemakers, are implantable while many others are used
noninvasively. This chapter will focus on those features that are common to devices that are
used to acquire and process physiological data.
P1: KDD
MOBK03601 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:0
4
P1: KDD
MOBK03602 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:2
5
C H A P T E R 2
Basic Bioinstrumentation System
The quantity, property, or condition that is measured by an instrumentation system is called the
measurand (Fig. 2.1). This can be a bioelectric signal, such as those generated by muscles or the
brain, or a chemical or mechanical signal that is converted to an electrical signal. Sensors are
used to convert physical measurands into electric outputs. The outputs from these biosensors
are analog signals, i.e. continuous signals, which are sent to the analog processing and digital
conversion block. There, the signals are ampliﬁed, ﬁltered, conditioned, and converted to digital
form. Methods for modifying analog signals, such as amplifying and ﬁltering an ECG signal,
are discussed later in this chapter. Once the analog signals have been digitized and converted
to a form that can be stored and processed by digital computers, many more methods of signal
conditioning can be applied.
Basic instrumentation systems also include output display devices that enable human
operators to view the signal in a format that is easy to understand. These displays may be
numerical or graphical, discrete or continuous, and permanent or temporary. Most output
display devices are intended to be observed visually, but some also provide audible output, e.g.
a beeping sound with each heart beat.
Inadditionto displaying data, many instrumentationsystems have the capability of storing
data. In some devices, the signal is stored brieﬂy so that further processing can take place or so
that an operator can examine the data. In other cases, the signals are stored permanently so that
different signal processing schemes can be applied at a later time. Holter monitors, for example,
acquire 24 hrs of ECG data that is later processed to determine arrhythmic activity and other
important diagnostic characteristics.
With the invention of the telephone and now with the Internet, signals can be ac
quired with a device in one location, perhaps in a patient’s home, and transmitted to an
other device for processing and/or storage. This has made it possible, for example, to pro
vide quick diagnostic feedback if a patient has an unusual heart rhythm while at home. It
has also allowed medical facilities in rural areas to transmit diagnostic images to tertiary care
hospitals so that specialized physicians can help general practitioners arrive at more accurate
diagnoses.
P1: KDD
MOBK03602 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:2
6 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Sensor Calibration
A/D
Analog
Processing
Signal
Processing
Data
Storage
Control &
Feedback
Output
Display
Data
Transmission
FIGURE 2.1: Basic instrumentation systems using sensors to measure a signal with data acquisition,
storage and display capabilities, along with control and feedback.
Two other components play important roles in instrumentation systems. The ﬁrst is the
calibration signal. A signal with known amplitude and frequency content is applied to the
instrumentation system at the sensor’s input. The calibration signal allows the components of
the system to be adjusted so that the output and input have a known, measured relationship.
Without this information, it is impossible to convert the output of an instrument system into
a meaningful representation of the measurand.
Another important component, a feedback element, is not a part of all instrumentation
systems. These devices include pacemakers and ventilators that stimulate the heart or the lungs.
Some feedback devices collect physiological data and stimulate a response, e.g. a heart beat or
breath, when needed or are part of biofeedback systems in which the patient is made aware
of a physiological measurement, e.g. blood pressure, and uses conscious control to change the
physiological response.
P1: KDD
MOBK03603 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 21:38
7
C H A P T E R 3
Charge, Current, Voltage,
Power and Energy
3.1 CHARGE
Two kinds of charge, positive and negative, are carried by protons and electrons, respectively.
The negative charge carried by an electron, q
e
, is the smallest amount of charge that exists and
is measured in units called Coulombs (C).
q
e
= −1.602 ×10
−19
C
The symbol q(t) is used to represent charge that changes with time, and Q for constant charge.
The charge carried by a proton is the opposite of the electron.
Example 3.1. What is the charge of 3 ×10
−15
g of electrons?
Solution
Q = 3 ×10
−15
g ×
1 kg
10
3
g
×
1 electron
9.1095 ×10
−31
kg
×
−1.60219 ×10
−19
C
electron
= −5.27643 ×10
−7
C
3.2 CURRENT
Electric current, i (t), is deﬁned as the change in the amount of charge that passes through a
given point or area in a speciﬁed time period. Current is measured in amperes (A). By deﬁnition,
one ampere equals one coulomb/second (C/s).
i (t) =
dq
dt
(3.1)
and
q(t) =
t
t
0
i (λ) dλ +q(t
0
) (3.2)
P1: KDD
MOBK03603 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 21:38
8 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Circuit
element
Circuit
element
i
i
FIGURE3.1: A simple electric circuit illustrating current ﬂowing around a closed loop.
Current, deﬁned by Eq. (3.1), also depends on the direction of ﬂow as illustrated in the circuit
in Fig. 3.1.
Example 3.2. Suppose the following current is ﬂowing in Fig. 3.1.
i (t) =
0 t < 0
3e
−100t
A t ≥ 0
Find the total charge.
Solution
Q =
∞
−∞
idt =
∞
0
3e
−100t
dt = −
3
100
e
−100t
∞
t=0
= 0.03 C
Consider Fig. 3.1. Current is deﬁned as positive if
(a) A positive charge is moving in the direction of the arrow
(b) A negative charge is moving in the opposite direction of the arrow
Since these two possibilities produce the same outcome, there is no need to be concerned as to
which is responsible for the current. In electric circuits, current is carried by electrons in metallic
conductors.
Current is typically a function of time, as given by Eq. (3.1). Consider Fig. 3.2 with the
current entering terminal 1 in the circuit on the right. In the time interval 0–1.5 s, current is
positive and enters terminal 1. In the time interval 1.5–3 s, the current is negative and enters
terminal 2 with a positive value. We typically refer to a constant current as a DC current, and
P1: KDD
MOBK03603 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 21:38
CHARGE, CURRENT, VOLTAGE, POWERANDENERGY 9
1.5
1
0.5
0
0.5
1
1.5
1 0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
t
(s)
i
(A)
Circuit
element
i
1
2
i
FIGURE 3.2: (Left) A sample current waveform. (Right) A circuit element with current entering
terminal 1 and leaving terminal 2. Passive circuit elements have two terminals with a known voltage–
current relationship. Examples of passive circuit elements include resistors, capacitors and inductors.
denote it with a capital letter such as I indicating it does not change with time. We denote a
timevarying current with a lower case letter, such as i (t),or just i .
3.2.1 Kirchhoff ’s Current Law
Current can ﬂow only in a closed circuit, as shown in Fig. 3.1. No current is lost as it ﬂows
around the circuit because net charge cannot accumulate within a circuit element and charge
must be conserved. Whatever current enters one terminal must leave at the other terminal.
Since charge cannot be created and must be conserved, the sum of the currents at any node,
that is, a point at which two or more circuit elements have a common connection, must equal
zero so no net charge accumulates. This principle is known as Kirchhoff ’s current law (KCL),
given as
N
n=1
i
n
(t) = 0 (3.3)
where there are N currents leaving the node. Consider the circuit in Fig. 3.3. Using Eq. (3.3)
and applying KCL for the currents leaving the node gives
−i
1
−i
2
+i
4
+i
3
= 0
The previous equation is equivalently written for the currents entering the node, as
i
1
+i
2
−i
4
−i
3
= 0
P1: KDD
MOBK03603 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 21:38
10 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
i
1 i
2
i
3
i
4
FIGURE3.3: A node with 4 currents.
It should be clear that the application of KCL is for all currents, whether they are all leaving or
all entering the node.
In describing a circuit, we deﬁne its characteristics with the terms “node”, “branch”, “path”,
“closed path” and “mesh” as follows.
• Node: A point at which two or more circuit elements have a common connection.
• Branch: A circuit element or connected group of circuit elements. A connected group
of circuit elements usually connect nodes together.
• Path: A connected group of circuit elements in which none is repeated.
• Closed Path: A path that starts and ends at the same node.
• Mesh: A closed path that does not contain any other closed paths within it.
• Essential Node: A point at which three or more circuit elements have a common con
nection.
• Essential Branch: A branch that connects two essential nodes.
InFig. 3.4, there are ﬁve nodes, A, B, C, DandE, whichare all essential nodes. Kirchhoff ’s
current law is applied to each of the nodes as follows.
Node A: −i
1
+i
2
−i
3
= 0
Node B: i
3
+i
4
+i
5
−i
6
= 0
Node C: i
1
−i
4
−i
8
= 0
Node D: −i
7
−i
5
+i
8
= 0
Node E: −i
2
+i
6
+i
7
= 0
Kirchhoff ’s current law is also applicable to any closed surface surrounding a part of the circuit.
It is understood that the closed surface does not intersect any of the circuit elements. Consider
the closed surface drawn with dashed lines in Fig. 3.4. Kirchhoff ’s current law applied to the
closed surface gives
−i
1
+i
4
+i
5
+i
7
= 0
P1: KDD
MOBK03603 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 21:38
CHARGE, CURRENT, VOLTAGE, POWERANDENERGY 11
Circuit
element
Circuit
element
i
1
Circuit
element
Circuit
element
Circuit
element
Circuit
element
Circuit
element
A
B
C
D
E
i
2
i
3
i
4
i
5
i
6
i
7
i
8
Closed surface
FIGURE3.4: A circuit with a closed surface.
3.3 VOLTAGE
Voltage represents the work per unit charge associated with moving a charge between two points
(A and B in Fig. 3.5), and given as
v =
dw
dq
(3.4)
The unit of measurement for voltage is the volt (V). A constant (DC) voltage source is denoted
by V while a timevarying voltage is denoted by v(t), or just v. In Fig. 3.5, the voltage, v,
between two points (A and B), is the amount of energy required to move a charge from point
A to point B.
Circuit
element
i
1
2
B
A
+
v

FIGURE3.5: Voltage and current convention.
P1: KDD
MOBK03603 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 21:38
12 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Circuit
element
Circuit
element
Circuit
element
Circuit
element
Circuit
element
+
v
3


v
4
+
+
v
5

+ v
1
 + v
2

CP1 CP2
CP3
FIGURE 3.6: Circuit illustrating Kirchhoff ’s voltage law. Closed paths are identiﬁed as CP1, CP2
and CP3.
3.3.1 Kirchhoff ’s Voltage Law
Kirchhoff ’s voltage law (KVL) states the sum of all voltages in a closed path is zero, or
N
n=1
v
n
(t) = 0 (3.5)
where there are N voltage drops assigned around the closed path, with v
n
(t) denoting the
individual voltage drops. The sign for each voltage drop in Eq. (3.5) is the ﬁrst sign encountered
while moving around the closed path.
Consider the circuit in Fig. 3.6, with each circuit element assigned a voltage, v
n
, with a
given polarity, and three closed paths, CP1, CP2 and CP3. Kirchhoff ’s voltage law for each
closed path is given as
CP1: −v
3
+v
1
−v
4
= 0
CP2: v
4
+v
2
+v
5
= 0
CP3: −v
3
+v
1
+v
2
+v
5
= 0
Kirchhoff ’s laws are applied in electric circuit analysis to determine unknown voltages and
currents. Each unknown variable has its distinct equation. To solve for the unknowns using
MATLAB, we create a matrix representation of the set of equations and solve. This method is
demonstrated in many examples in this book.
P1: KDD
MOBK03603 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 21:38
CHARGE, CURRENT, VOLTAGE, POWERANDENERGY 13
Example 3.3. Find I
1
, I
2
and I
3
for the following circuit.
Circuit
Element
Circuit
Element
I1
Circuit
Element
Circuit
Element
Circuit
Element
Circuit
Element
A
B
C
I
2
I
3
2A
3A 4A
Solution. We apply KCL ﬁrst at node C, then B and ﬁnally A.
Node C: −2 + I
3
+4 = 0; I
3
= −2 A
Node B: I
2
+3 − I
3
= 0; I
2
= I
3
−3 = −5 A
Node A: −I
1
− I
2
+2 = 0; I
1
= 2 − I
2
= 7 A
3.4 POWERANDENERGY
Power is the rate of energy expenditure given as
p =
dw
dt
=
dw
dq
dq
dt
= vi (3.6)
where p is power measured in watts (W), and w is energy measured in joules ( J). Power is
usually determined by the product of voltage across a circuit element and the current through it.
By convention, we assume that a positive value for power indicates that power is being delivered
(or absorbed or consumed) by the circuit element. A negative value for power indicates that
power is being extracted or generated by the circuit element, i.e., a battery.
Figure 3.7 illustrates the four possible cases for a circuit element’s current and voltage
conﬁguration. According to convention, if both i and v are positive, with the arrow and polarity
shown in Fig. 3.7A, energy is absorbed (either lost by heat or stored). If either the current arrow
or voltage polarity is reversed as in B and C, energy is supplied to the circuit. Note that if both
the current direction and voltage polarity are reversed together, as in D, energy is absorbed.
P1: KDD
MOBK03603 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 21:38
14 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Circuit
element
i
1
2
+
v

p vi =
Circuit
element
i
1
2
+
v

p = −vi
Circuit
element
i
1
2

v
+
p = vi
Circuit
element
i
1
2

v
+
p = −vi
A B
C D
FIGURE3.7: Polarity references for four cases of current and voltage. Cases A and D result in positive
power being consumed by the circuit element. Cases B and C result in negative power being extracted
from the circuit element.
A passive circuit element is deﬁned as an element whose power is always positive or zero,
which may be dissipated as heat (resistance), stored in an electric ﬁeld (capacitor) or stored in
a magnetic ﬁeld (inductor). We deﬁne an active circuit element as one whose power is negative
and capable of generating energy.
Energy is given by
w(t) =
t
−∞
pdt (3.7)
3.5 SOURCES
Sources are two terminal devices that provide energy to a circuit. There is no direct voltage–
current relationship for a source; when one of the two variables is given, the other cannot be
determined without knowledge of the rest of the circuit. Independent sources are devices for
which the voltage or current is given and the device maintains its value regardless of the rest of
the circuit. A device that generates a prescribed voltage at its terminals, regardless of the current
ﬂow, is called an ideal voltage source. Figure 3.8A and B shows the general symbols for an ideal
voltage source. Figure 3.8C shows an ideal current source that delivers a prescribed current to
P1: KDD
MOBK03603 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 21:38
CHARGE, CURRENT, VOLTAGE, POWERANDENERGY 15
V
S
+

V
S
I
S
A B C
FIGURE3.8: Basic symbols used for independent sources. (A) Battery. (B) Ideal voltage source. V
s
can
be a constant DC source (Battery) or a timevarying source. (C) Ideal current source I
s
.
V
S
I
S
+

FIGURE3.9: Basic symbols used for dependent or controlled sources. (Left) Controlled voltage source.
The voltage V
s
is a known function of some other voltage or current in the circuit. (Right) Controlled
current source. The current I
s
is a known function of some other voltage or current in the circuit.
the attached circuit. The voltage generated by an ideal current source depends on the elements
in the rest of the circuit.
Shown in Fig. 3.9 are a dependent voltage and current source. A dependent source takes
on a value equaling a known function of some other voltage or current value in the circuit. We
use a diamondshaped symbol to represent a dependent source. Often, a dependent source is
called a controlled source. The current generated for a dependent voltage source and the voltage
for a dependent current source depend on circuit elements in the rest of the circuit. Dependent
sources are very important in electronics. Later in this chapter, we will see that the operational
ampliﬁer uses a controlled voltage source for its operation.
Example 3.4. Find the voltage V
3
for the circuit shown in the following ﬁgure.
10V
5A

+
I2
+

5V
3A
2I
2

+
+
V
3

P1: KDD
MOBK03603 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 21:38
16 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Solution. Current I
2
equals 5 A because it is in the same branch as the 5 A current source. The
voltage across the dependent voltage source on the right side of the circuit equals 2I
2
= 10 V.
Applying KVL around the outer closed path gives
−V
3
−5 −10 = 0
or
V
3
= −15 V
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
17
C H A P T E R 4
Resistance
4.1 RESISTORS
A resistor is a circuit element that limits the ﬂow of current through it and is denoted with
the symbol . Resistors are made of different materials and their ability to impede current
is given with a value of resistance, denoted R. Resistance is measured in Ohms (), where
1 = 1 V/A. A theoretical bare wire that connects circuit elements together has a resistance of
zero. A gap between circuit elements has a resistance of inﬁnity. An ideal resistor follows Ohm’s
law, which describes a linear relationship between voltage and current, as shown in Fig. 4.1,
with a slope equal to the resistance.
There are two ways to write Ohm’s law, depending on the current direction and voltage
polarity. Ohm’s law is written for Fig. 4.2A as
v = i R (4.1)
and for Fig. 4.2B as
v = −i R (4.2)
In this book, we will use the convention shown in Fig. 4.2A to write the voltage drop across a
resistor. As described, the voltage across a resistor is equal to the product of the current ﬂowing
through the element and its resistance, R. This linear relationship does not apply at very high
voltages and currents. Some electrically conducting materials have a very small range of currents
and voltages in which they exhibit linear behavior. This is true of many physiological models
as well: linearity is observed only within a range of values. Outside this range, the model is
nonlinear. We deﬁne a short circuit as shown in Fig. 4.3A with R = 0, and having a 0 V voltage
drop. We deﬁne an open circuit as shown in Fig. 4.3B with R = ∞, and having 0 A current
pass through it.
Each material has a property called resistivity (ρ) that indicates the resistance of the
material. Conductivity (σ) is the inverse of resistivity, and conductance (G) is the inverse of
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
18 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
I
(A)
V
(V)
Slope = R
FIGURE4.1: Voltage–current relationship for a resistor.
A
i(t)
R
+
v(t)
−
B
i(t)
R
+
v(t)
−
FIGURE4.2: An ideal resister with resistance R in Ohms ().
i
+
v = 0 V
−
0 R= Ω
A. Short Circuit
+
v
−
R= ∞
B. Open Circuit
i = 0 A
FIGURE4.3: Short and open circuits.
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
RESISTANCE 19
resistance. Conductance is measured in units called siemens (S) and has units of A/V. In terms
of conductance, Ohm’s law is written as
i = Gv (4.3)
Example 4.1. From the following circuit, ﬁnd I
2
, I
3
and V
1
.
R2
R1 5 Ω
5 Ω
5A
50 V
I3
I2
+
V1
−
8 A
10 A
Solution. First we ﬁnd I
2
by applying KCL at the node in the upper left of the circuit.
−5 + I
2
+8 = 0
and
I
2
= −3 A
Current I
3
is determined by applying KCL at the node on the right of the circuit.
10 + I
3
−8 = 0
and
I
3
= −2 A
Voltage V
1
is determined by applying KVL around the lower right closed path and using
Ohm’s law.
−V
1
−50 +5I
3
= 0
V
1
= −50 +5 ×(−2) = −60 V
4.2 POWER
The power consumed by a resistor is given by the combination of Eq. (3.6) and either Eq. (4.1)
or (4.2) as
p = vi =
v
2
R
= i
2
R (4.4)
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
20 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
and given off as heat. Equation (4.4) demonstrates that regardless of the voltage polarity and
current direction, power is consumed by a resistor. Power is always positive for a resistor, which
is true for any passive element.
Example 4.2. Calculate the power in each element.
18 V 5I
1 3 Ω
I
1
Solution. We ﬁrst note that the resistor on the right has 18 V across it, and therefore the
current through it, according to Ohm’s law, is
18
3
= 6 A. To ﬁnd the current I
1
we apply KCL
at the upper node, giving
−I
1
−5I
1
+6 = 0
or
I
1
= 1 A
The power for each of the circuit elements is
p
18V
= −I
1
×18 = −18 W
p
5i
1
= −18 ×5I
1
= −90 W
p
3
=
18
2
3
= 108 W
In any circuit, the power supplied by the active elements always equals the power consumed.
Here, the power generated is 108 W and the power consumed is 108 W, as required.
Example 4.3. Electric safety is of paramount importance in a hospital or clinical environment.
If sufﬁcient current is allowed to ﬂow through the body, signiﬁcant damage can occur, as
illustrated in the following ﬁgure.
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
RESISTANCE 21
0.0001 0.001 0.01 0.1 1.0 10.0 100.0
Current (A)
Threshold of
perception
Letgo
current
Respiratory paralysis, Fatigue, Pain
Ventricular fibrillation
Sustained myocardial
contraction
Burns, Injury
For instance, a current of magnitude 50 mA (dashed line) is enough to cause ventricular ﬁbril
lation, as well as other conditions. The ﬁgure on the left shows the current distribution from a
macroshock from one arm to another (Redrawn from Enderle et al., Introduction to Biomedical
Engineering, 2000). Acrude electric circuit model of the body consisting of two arms (each with
resistance R
A
), two legs (each with resistance R
L
), body trunk (with resistance R
T
), and head
(with resistance R
H
) is shown in the following ﬁgure on the right.
+

VS
RT
RH
RA
RA
RL RL
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
22 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Since the only elements that form a closed path that current can ﬂow is given by the source in
series with the two arms, we reduce the body electric circuits to
RA
RA VS
I
If R
A
= 400 and V
s
= 120 V, then ﬁnd I.
Solution. Using Ohm’s law, we have
I =
V
s
R
A
+ R
A
=
120
800
= 0.15 A
The current I is the current passing through the heart, and at this level it would cause ventricular
ﬁbrillation.
4.3 EQUIVALENTRESISTANCE
It is sometimes possible to reduce complex circuits into simpler and, as we will see, equivalent
circuits. We consider two circuits equivalent if they cannot be distinguished from each other by
voltage and current measurements, that is, the two circuits behave identically. Consider the two
circuits A and B in Fig. 4.4, consisting of combinations of resistors, each stimulated by a DC
voltage V
s
. These two circuits are equivalent if I
A
= I
B
. We represent the resistance of either
circuit using Ohm’s law as
R
EQ
=
V
s
I
A
=
V
s
I
B
(4.5)
Thus, it follows that any circuit consisting of resistances can be replaced by an equivalent circuit
as shown in Fig. 4.5. In another section on a Th´ evenin equivalent circuit, we will expand this
remark to include any combination of sources and resistances.
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
RESISTANCE 23
Circuit
A
VS
I
A
Circuit
B
VS
I
B
FIGURE4.4: Two circuits.
4.4 SERIES ANDPARALLEL COMBINATIONS OF RESISTANCE
4.4.1 Resistors in Series
If the same current ﬂows from one resistor to another, the two are said to be in series. If these
two resistors are connected to a third and the same current ﬂows through all of them, then the
three resistors are in series. In general, if the same current ﬂows through N resistors, then the
N resistors are in series. Consider Fig. 4.6 with three resistors in series. An equivalent circuit
can be derived through KVL as
−V
s
+IR
1
+IR
2
+IR
3
= 0
or rewritten in terms of an equivalent resistance R
EQ
as
R
EQ
=
V
s
I
= R
1
+ R
2
+ R
3
Circuit
A
VS
IA
VS
IA
REQ
FIGURE4.5: Equivalent circuits.
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
24 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
R1
R2
R3
VS
I
FIGURE4.6: A series circuit.
In general, if we have N resistors in series,
R
EQ
=
N
i =1
R
i
(4.6)
4.4.2 Resistors in Parallel
Two or more elements are said to be in parallel if the same voltage is across each of the resistors.
Consider the three parallel resistors as shown in Fig. 4.7. We use a shorthand notation to
represent resistors in parallel using the symbol. Thus in Fig. 4.7, R
EQ
= R
1
R
2
R
3
. An
equivalent circuit for Fig. 4.7 is derived through KCL as
−I +
V
s
R
1
+
V
s
R
2
+
V
s
R
3
= 0
V
S
R
3
R
2
R
1
I
FIGURE4.7: A parallel circuit.
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
RESISTANCE 25
or rewritten in terms of an equivalent resistance R
EQ
as
R
EQ
=
V
s
I
=
1
1
R
1
+
1
R
2
+
1
R
3
In general, if we have N resistors in parallel,
R
EQ
=
1
1
R
1
+
1
R
2
+· · · +
1
R
N
(4.7)
For just two resistors in parallel, Eq. (4.7) is written as
R
EQ
= R
1
R
2
=
R
1
R
2
R
1
+ R
2
(4.8)
Example 4.4. Find R
EQ
and the power supplied by the source for the following circuit.
2 Ω
5 V 12 Ω 12 Ω 12 Ω
3 Ω
2 Ω 2 Ω
I
Solution. To solve for R
EQ
, apply from right to left the parallel and series combinations. First,
we have two 2 resistors in parallel that are in series with the 3 resistor. Next, this group
is in parallel with the three 12 resistors. Finally, this group is in series with the 2 resistor.
These combinations are shown in the following ﬁgure and calculation:
2 Ω
5 V 12 Ω 12 Ω 12 Ω
3 Ω
2 Ω 2 Ω
I
22 =1 Ω
3+1=4 Ω 121212 =4 Ω
44=2 Ω
2+2 =4 Ω
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
26 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
R
EQ
= 2 +((12 12 12 ) (3 +(2 2 )))
= 2 +
1
1
12
+
1
12
+
1
12
3 +
1
1
2
+
1
2
= 2 +((4) (3 +1)) = 2 +2 = 4
Accordingly,
I =
5
R
EQ
=
5
4
= 1.25 A
and
p = 5 × I = 6.25 W
4.5 VOLTAGEANDCURRENTDIVIDERRULES
Let us nowextend the concept of equivalent resistance, R
EQ
=
V
I
, to allowus to quickly calculate
voltages in series resistor circuits and currents in parallel resistor circuits without digressing to
the fundamentals.
4.5.1 Voltage Divider Rule
The voltage divider rule allows us to easily calculate the voltage across a given resistor in a series
circuit. Consider ﬁnding V
2
in the series circuit shown in Fig. 4.8, where R
EQ
= R
1
+ R
2
.
Accordingly,
I =
V
s
R
EQ
=
V
s
R
1
+ R
2
R1
R2 VS
I
+
V2
−
FIGURE4.8: Voltage divider rule circuit.
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
RESISTANCE 27
V
S
R
2
R
1
I
I
1
I
2
FIGURE4.9: Current divider rule circuit.
and therefore
V
2
= IR
2
= V
s
R
2
R
1
+ R
2
This same analysis can be used to ﬁnd V
1
as
V
1
= V
s
R
1
R
1
+ R
2
In general, if a circuit contains N resistors in series, the voltage divider rule gives the voltage
across any one of the resistors, R
i
, as
V
i
= V
s
R
i
R
1
+ R
2
+· · · R
N
(4.9)
4.5.2 Current Divider Rule
The current divider rule allows us to easily calculate the current through any resistor in parallel
resistor circuits. Consider ﬁnding I
2
inthe parallel circuit showninFig. 4.9, where R
EQ
=
R
1
R
2
R
1
+R
2
.
Accordingly,
I
2
=
V
s
R
2
and
V
s
= I
R
1
R
2
R
1
+ R
2
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
28 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
yielding after substituting V
s
I
2
= I
1
R
2
1
R
1
+
1
R
2
In general, if a circuit contains N resistors in parallel, the current divider rule gives the current
through any one of the resistors, R
i
, as
I
i
= I
1
R
i
1
R
1
+
1
R
2
· · · +
1
R
N
(4.10)
Example 4.5. For the following circuit, ﬁnd I
1
.
5 A 10/3 Ω 2 Ω
1 Ω
12 Ω 12 Ω 12 Ω
I
1
Solution. We solve this circuit problem in two parts, as is evident from the redrawn circuit
that follows, by ﬁrst ﬁnding I
2
and then I
1
.
5 A 10/3 Ω 2 Ω
1 Ω
12 Ω
REQ
12 Ω 12 Ω
I1
I2
To begin, ﬁrst ﬁnd R
EQ
, which, when placed into the circuit, reduces to three parallel resistors
from which I
2
is calculated. The equivalent resistance is found as
R
EQ
= 1 +(12 12 12) = 1 +
1
1
12
+
1
12
+
1
12
= 5
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
RESISTANCE 29
Applying the current divider rule on the three parallel resistors,
10
3
2 R
EQ
, we have
I
2
= 5
1
5
3
10
+
1
2
+
1
5
= 1 A
I
2
ﬂows through the 1 resistor, and then divides into three equal currents of
1
3
A through each
12 resistor. The current I
1
can also be found by applying the current divider rule as
I
1
= I
2
1
12
1
12
+
1
12
+
1
12
=
1
12
1
12
+
1
12
+
1
12
=
1
3
A
P1: KDD
MOBK03604 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:19
30
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
31
C H A P T E R 5
Linear Network Analysis
Our methods for solving circuit problems up to this point have included applying Ohm’s law
and Kirchhoff ’s laws, resistive circuit simpliﬁcation, and the voltage and current divider rules.
This approach works for all circuit problems, but as the circuit complexity increases, it becomes
more difﬁcult to solve problems. In this section, we introduce the nodevoltage method and
the meshcurrent method to provide a systematic and easy solution of circuit problems. The
application of the nodevoltage method involves expressing the branch currents in terms of
one or more node voltages, and applying KCL at each of the nodes. The application of the
meshcurrent method involves expressing the branch voltages in terms of mesh currents, and
applying KVL around each mesh. These two methods are systematic approaches that lead to a
solution that is efﬁcient and robust, resulting in a minimum number of simultaneous equations
that saves time and effort.
In both cases, the resulting linear set of simultaneous equations is solved to determine the
unknown voltages or currents. The number of unknown voltages for the nodevoltage method
or currents for the meshcurrent method determines the number of equations. The number of
independent equations necessitates:
• N1 equations involving KCLat N1 nodes for the nodevoltage method. This number
may be fewer if there are voltage sources in the circuit.
• N1 equations involving KVL around each of the meshes in the circuit for the
meshcurrent method. This number may be fewer if there are current sources in the
circuit.
As we will see, MATLAB is ideal for solving problems that involves solution of simulta
neous equations, providing a straightforward tool that minimizes the amount of work.
5.1 NODEVOLTAGEMETHOD
The use of node equations provides a systematic method for solving circuit analysis problems by
the application of KCL at each essential node. The nodevoltage method involves the following
two steps:
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
32 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
R
+
V1
−
+
V2
−
+ V −
IA
(A)
R
+
V1
−
+
V2
−
− V +
(B)
IB
FIGURE5.1: Ohm’s law written in terms of node voltages.
1. Assign each node a voltage with respect to a reference node (ground). The reference
node is usually the one with the most branches connected to it, and is denoted with the
symbol . All voltages are written with respect to the reference node.
2. Except for the reference node, we write KCL at each of the N1 nodes.
The current through a resistor is written using Ohm’s law, with the voltage expressed as
the difference between the potential on either end of the resistor with respect to the reference
node as shown in Fig. 5.1. We express nodevoltage equations as the currents leaving the node.
Two adjacent nodes give rise to the current moving to the right (like Fig. 5.1A) for one node, and
the current moving to the left (like Fig. 5.1B) for the other node. The current is written for (A)
as I
A
=
V
R
=
V
1
−V
2
R
and for (B) as I
B
=
V
R
=
V
2
−V
1
R
. It is easy to verify in (A) that V = V
1
− V
2
by applying KVL.
If one of the branches located between an essential node and the reference node contains
an independent or dependent voltage source, we do not write a node equation for this node,
because the node voltage is known. This reduces the number of independent node equations
by one and the amount of work in solving for the node voltages. In writing the node equations
for the other nodes, we write the value of the independent voltage source in those equations.
Consider Fig. 5.1 (A) and assume the voltage V
2
results from an independent voltage source
of 5 V. Since the node voltage is known, we do not write a node voltage equation for node 2
in this case. When writing the nodevoltage equation for node 1, the current I
A
is written as
I
A
=
V
1
−5
R
. Ex. 5.1 further illustrates this case.
Example 5.1. Find V
1
using the nodevoltage method.
1/2 Ω 1/2 Ω
1/3 Ω 1/4 Ω 5 V 3 A
+
V
1
−
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
LINEARNETWORKANALYSIS 33
Solution. This circuit has two essential nodes, labeled 1 and 2 in the redrawn circuit that follows,
with the reference node and two node voltages, V
1
and V
2
, indicated. The node involving the 5 V
voltage source has a known node voltage and therefore we do not write a node equation for it.
1/2 Ω 1/2 Ω
1/3 Ω 1/4 Ω 5 V 3 A
+
V
1
−
+
V
2
−
1 2
Summing the currents leaving node 1 gives
2(V
1
−5) +3V
1
+2(V
1
− V
2
) = 0
which simpliﬁes to
7V
1
−2V
2
= 10
Summing the currents leaving node 2 gives
2(V
2
− V
1
) +4V
2
+3 = 0
which simpliﬁes to
−2V
1
+6V
2
= −3
The two node equations are written in matrix format as
7 −2
−2 6
V
1
V
2
=
10
−3
and solved with MATLAB as follows:
A = [7 −2; −2 6];
F = [10; −3];
V = A\F
V =
1.4211
−0.0263
Thus, V
1
= 1.4211 V.
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
34 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Generally, the coefﬁcient for the node voltage is the sumof the conductances connected to
the node. The coefﬁcients for the other node voltages are the negative of the sumof conductances
connected between the node voltage and other node voltages. If the input consists of a set of
current sources applied at each node, then the node equations have the following form.
G
1,1
V
1
− G
1,2
V
2
−· · · − G
1,N−1
V
N−1
= I
1
−G
2,1
V
1
+ G
2,2
V
2
−· · · − G
2,N−1
V
N−1
= I
2
.
.
.
−G
N−1,1
V
1
− G
N−1,2
V
2
−· · · − G
N−1,N−1
V
N−1
= I
N
(5.1)
Equation (5.1) is put in matrix form for solution by MATLAB as
⎡
⎢
⎢
⎢
⎢
⎣
G
1,1
−G
2,1
· · · −G
1,N−1
−G
2,1
G
2,2
· · · −G
2,N−1
.
.
.
−G
N−1,1
−G
N−1,2
· · · G
N−1,N−1
⎤
⎥
⎥
⎥
⎥
⎦
⎡
⎢
⎢
⎢
⎢
⎣
V
1
V
2
.
.
.
V
N−1
⎤
⎥
⎥
⎥
⎥
⎦
=
⎡
⎢
⎢
⎢
⎢
⎣
I
1
I
2
.
.
.
I
N−1
⎤
⎥
⎥
⎥
⎥
⎦
(5.2)
Note the symmetry about the main diagonal where the offdiagonal terms are equal to each
other and negative. This is true of all circuits without dependent sources. A dependent source
destroys this symmetry. In general, if a circuit has dependent sources, the nodevoltage approach
is the same as before except for an additional equation describing the relationship between the
dependent source and the node voltage. In cases involving more than one dependent source,
there is one equation for each dependent source in terms of the node voltages.
Example 5.2. For the following circuit, ﬁnd V
3
using the nodevoltage method.
1/2 Ω
5 A 1/3 Ω
1/4 Ω
3 A 1 Ω
1/4 Ω
2Id
I
d
+
V3
−
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
LINEARNETWORKANALYSIS 35
Solution. Notice that this circuit has three essential nodes and a dependent current source.
We label the essential nodes 1, 2 and 3 in the redrawn circuit, with the reference node at the
bottom of the circuit and three node voltages V
1
, V
2
and V
3
, as indicated.
1/2 Ω
5 A 1/3 Ω
1/4 Ω
3 A 1 Ω
1/4 Ω
2I
d
Id
+
V
3
−
+
V
2
−
+
V
1
−
1
2 3
Note that I
d
= V
3
according to Ohm’s law. Summing the currents leaving node 1 gives
5 +2 (V
1
− V
2
) +2I
d
+4 (V
1
− V
3
) = 0
which reduces to
6V
1
−2V
2
−2V
3
= −5
Summing the currents leaving node 2 gives
−2I
d
+2 (V
2
− V
1
) +3V
2
+4 (V
2
− V
3
) = 0
which simpliﬁes to
−2V
1
+9V
2
−6V
3
= 0
Summing the currents leaving node 3 gives
4 (V
3
− V
2
) −3 + V
3
+4 (V
3
− V
1
) = 0
reducing to
−4V
1
−4V
2
+9V
3
= 3
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
36 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
The three node equations are written in matrix format as
⎡
⎢
⎣
6 −2 −2
−2 9 −6
−4 −4 9
⎤
⎥
⎦
⎡
⎢
⎣
V
1
V
2
V
3
⎤
⎥
⎦
=
⎡
⎢
⎣
−5
0
3
⎤
⎥
⎦
Notice that the systemmatrix is no longer symmetrical because of the dependent current source,
and two of the three nodes have a current source giving rise to a nonzero termon the righthand
side of the matrix equation.
Solving with MATLAB gives
A = [6 −2 −2; −2 9 −6; −4 −4 9];
F = [−5; 0; 3];
V = A\F
V =
−1.1471
−0.5294
−0.4118
Thus V
3
= −0.4118 V.
If one of the branches has an independent or controlled voltage source located between
two essential nodes as shown in Fig. 5.2, the current through the source is not easily expressed
in terms of node voltages. In this situation, we form a supernode by combining the two nodes.
The supernode technique requires only one node equation in which the current, I
A
, is passed
through the source and written in terms of currents leaving node 2. Speciﬁcally, we replace
I
A
with I
B
+ I
C
+ I
D
in terms of node voltages. Because we have two unknowns and one
supernode equation, we write a second equation by applying KVL for the two node voltages 1
+
V1
−
V
Δ
+
−
+
V2
−
1
2
IA IC
ID
IB
FIGURE5.2: A dependent voltage source is located between nodes 1 and 2.
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
LINEARNETWORKANALYSIS 37
and 2 and the source as
−V
1
− V
+ V
2
= 0
or
V
= V
1
− V
2
Example 5.3. For the following circuit, ﬁnd V
3
.
2 A 1/2 Ω
1/4 Ω
1/3 Ω 1 A
1 V
1/2 Ω
1/5 Ω
+
V3
−
Solution. The circuit has three essential nodes, two of which are connected to an independent
voltage source and form a supernode. We label the essential nodes as 1, 2 and 3 in the redrawn
circuit, with the reference node at the bottom of the circuit and three node voltages, V
1
, V
2
and
V
3
as indicated.
2 A 1/2 Ω
1/4 Ω
1/3 Ω 1 A
1 V
1/2 Ω
1/5 Ω
+
V3
−
1 2 3
+
V2
−
+
V1
−
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
38 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Summing the currents leaving node 1 gives
−2 +2V
1
+5 (V
1
− V
3
) +4 (V
1
− V
2
) = 0
Simplifying gives
11V
1
−4V
2
−5V
3
= 2
Nodes 2 and 3 are connected by an independent voltage source, so we form a supernode 2 +3.
Summing the currents leaving the supernode 2 +3 gives
4 (V
2
− V
1
) +3V
2
−1 +2V
3
+5 (V
3
− V
1
) = 0
Simplifying yields
−9V
1
+7V
2
+7V
3
= 1
The second supernode equation is KVL through the node voltages and the independent source,
giving
−V
2
+1 + V
3
= 0
or
−V
2
+ V
3
= −1
The two node and KVL equations are written in matrix format as
⎡
⎢
⎣
11 −4 −5
−9 7 7
0 −1 1
⎤
⎥
⎦
⎡
⎢
⎣
V
1
V
2
V
3
⎤
⎥
⎦
=
⎡
⎢
⎣
2
1
−1
⎤
⎥
⎦
Solving with MATLAB gives
A = [11 −4 −5; −9 7 7; 0 −1 1];
F = [2; 1; −1];
V = A\F
V =
0.4110
0.8356
−0.1644
Thus V
3
= −0.1644.
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
LINEARNETWORKANALYSIS 39
5.2 MESHCURRENTMETHOD
Another method for analyzing planar circuits is called the meshcurrent method. A mesh is a
closed path without any other closed paths within it and a planar circuit is a circuit without any
overlapping branches. All of our problems in this book involve planar circuits. The meshcurrent
method provides a systematic process for solving circuit analysis problems with the application
of KVL around each mesh. The meshcurrent method involves the following two steps:
1. Deﬁne the mesh currents in the circuit. By convention, we draw the mesh currents with
a circle, arc or a surface on the inside perimeter of the mesh. Moreover, we deﬁne the
meshcurrent direction for all meshes to be clockwise.
2. Write a set of mesh equations using KVL. In general, we write one equation for each
mesh. Under special circumstances, the number of mesh equations may be fewer than
the total number of meshes.
In writing the mesh equation, we move through the mesh in a clockwise direction by
writing the voltage drops in terms of mesh currents. Whenever a circuit element is shared by
two meshes, as in Fig. 5.3, the voltage drop across the resistor is
V = RI = R(I
1
− I
2
)
when writing the equation for mesh 1. When writing the mesh equation for mesh 2, the
clockwise direction gives a voltage drop according to convention as R(I
2
− I
1
), just the opposite
as in mesh 1. Moreover, according to KCL
I = I
1
− I
2
Mesh currents, as in Fig. 5.3, are not measurable with an ammeter in that they do
not equal a branch current. The current through the branch is composed of the difference
between the two mesh currents, here I = I
1
− I
2
. Even though the mesh current is not real,
it is a powerful technique that simpliﬁes analysis of circuit problems as shown in the next
example.
R
I
+
V
−
I
1 I2
FIGURE5.3: Mesh currents.
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
40 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Example 5.4. Find I in the following circuit.
10 V 5 V
I
2 Ω
4 Ω
3 Ω
Solution. There are two meshes in this circuit. Mesh currents are always deﬁned in a clockwise
direction, one for each mesh, as illustrated in the redrawn circuit that follows.
10 V 5 V
I
2 Ω
4 Ω
3 Ω
I1 I2
Summing the voltage drops around mesh 1 gives
−10 +2I
1
+4 (I
1
− I
2
) = 0
which simpliﬁes to
6I
1
−4I
2
= 10
Summing the voltage drops around mesh 2 gives
4 (I
2
− I
1
) +3I
2
+5 = 0
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
LINEARNETWORKANALYSIS 41
which simpliﬁes to
−4I
1
+7I
2
= −5
The two mesh equations are written in matrix form as
6 −4
−4 7
I
1
I
2
=
10
−5
Comments made in Section 5.1 on the structure and symmetry of the system matrix with
the nodevoltage method also apply for the meshcurrent method. We solve this problem with
MATLAB, giving
A = [6 −4; −4 7];
F = [10; −5];
I = A\F
I =
1.9231
0.3846
The current I is found from I = I
1
− I
2
= 1.9231 −0.3846 = 1.5385 A.
When one of the branches has an independent or dependent current source in the circuit, a
modiﬁcation must be made to the meshcurrent method. Depending on whether the current
source is on the outer perimeter or inside the circuit, as shown in Fig. 5.4, we handle both cases
as follows:
1. The current source is located on the perimeter, as in the circuit on the left in Fig. 5.4,
where the mesh current equals the branch current. In this case, we do not write a mesh
equation because the current is known. The mesh current I
1
equals the source current,
5 V
I
2 Ω
4 Ω
3 Ω
3 A
I1 I2
5 V
I
2 Ω 3 Ω
I1 I2
3 A 10 V
FIGURE5.4: (Left) A current source on the perimeter of a circuit. (Right) A current source in a branch
between two meshes.
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
42 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
I
1
= 3 A. The equation for mesh 2 is found by applying KVL, giving
4 (I
2
− I
1
) +3I
2
+5 = 4 (I
2
−3) +3I
2
+5 = 0,
which gives I
2
= 1 A.
2. The current source is locatedwithinthe circuit where the meshcurrent does not equal the
branch current as shown in Fig. 5.4 (right). Since we cannot easily write the voltage drop
across the current source, we form a supermesh. A supermesh is formed by combing two
meshes together, with one equation describing both meshes. In this case, the equation
starts wit the ﬁrst mesh and continues on to the second mesh, circumventing the voltage
drop across the current source. Here the supermesh equation is
−10 +2I
1
+3I
2
+5 = 0
Because there are two unknown currents, we need two independent equations. The second
equation is written using KCL for the current source and the two mesh currents. Here the KCL
equation is I
2
− I
1
= 3.
Example 5.5. Find V
0
as shown in the following circuit.
3 V
2 Ω
3 Ω
4 Ω
I
S
= 2 V
0 5 Ω
2 A
+
V
0
−
Solution. This circuit has four meshes, as shown in the circuit diagram that follows. Mesh
4 has a current source on the perimeter, so we do not write a mesh equation for it, but write
simply I
4
= 2 A.
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
LINEARNETWORKANALYSIS 43
3 V
2 Ω
3 Ω I1
4 Ω
IS = 2 V0
I2 I3
5 Ω
2 A
I4
+
V
0
−
Summing the voltages around mesh 1 gives
−3 +2 (I
1
−2) +3(I
1
− I
2
) = 0
Simplifying gives
5I
1
−3I
2
= 7
Since there is a dependent current source inside the circuit, we form a supermesh for meshes 2
and 3. Summing the voltages around supermesh 2 +3 yields
3 (I
2
− I
1
) +4I
2
+5I
3
= 0
which reduces to
−3I
1
+7I
2
+5I
3
= 0
Applying KCL for the dependent current source gives
2V
0
= 2 ×3 (I
1
− I
2
) = I
3
− I
2
yielding
6I
1
−5I
2
− I
3
= 0
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
44 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
The three independent equations are written in matrix format as
⎡
⎢
⎣
5 −3 0
−3 7 5
6 −5 −1
⎤
⎥
⎦
⎡
⎢
⎣
I
1
I
2
I
3
⎤
⎥
⎦
=
⎡
⎢
⎣
7
0
0
⎤
⎥
⎦
Solution using MATLAB gives
A = [5 −3 0; −3 7 5; 6 −5 −1];
F = [7; 0; 0];
I = A\F
I =
14.0000
21.0000
−21.0000
Thus,
V
0
= 3(I
1
− I
2
) = 3(14 −21) = 21 V
5.3 LINEARITY, SUPERPOSITIONANDSOURCE
TRANSFORMATIONS
5.3.1 Linearity and Superposition
If a linear system is excited by two or more independent sources, then the total response is
the sum of the separate individual responses to each input. This property is called the prin
ciple of superposition. Speciﬁcally for circuits, the response to several independent sources is
the sum of responses to each independent source with the other independent sources dead,
where
• A dead voltage source is a short circuit
• A dead current source is an open circuit
In linear circuits with multiple independent sources, the total response is the sum of each
independent source taken one at a time. This analysis is carried out by removing all of the sources
except one, and assuming the other sources are dead. After the circuit is analyzed with the ﬁrst
source, it is set equal to a dead source and the next source is applied with the remaining sources
dead. When each of the sources have been analyzed, the total response is obtained by summing
the individual responses. Note carefully that this principle holds true solely for independent
sources. Dependent sources must remain in the circuit when applying this technique, and they
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
LINEARNETWORKANALYSIS 45
must be analyzed based on the current or voltage for which it is deﬁned. It should be apparent
that voltages and currents in one circuit differ among circuits, and that we cannot mix and
match voltages and currents from one circuit with another.
Generally, superposition provides a simpler solution than is obtained by evaluating the
total response with all of the applied sources. This property is especially valuable when dealing
with an input consisting of a pulse or delays. These are considered in future sections.
Example 5.6. Using superposition, ﬁnd V
0
as shown in the following ﬁgure.
2 Ω 3 Ω
2 A 3 A 5 Ω 10 V
+
V
0
−
Solution. We start by analyzing the circuit with just the 10 V source active and the two current
sources dead, as shown in the following ﬁgure.
2 Ω 3 Ω
5 Ω 10 V
+
V
0
−
10
The voltage divider rule easily gives the response, V
0
10
, due to the 10 V source
V
0
10
= 10
8
2 +8
= 8 V
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
46 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Next consider the 2 A source active, and the other two sources dead, as shown in the following
circuit.
2 Ω 3 Ω
2 A 5 Ω
+
V
0
−
2
Combining the resistors in an equivalent resistance, R
EQ
= 2 (3 +5) =
2×8
2+8
= 1.6 ,
and then applying Ohm’s law gives V
0
2
= 2 ×1.6 = 3.2 V.
Finally, consider the response, V
0
3
, to the 3 A source as shown in the following ﬁgure.
2 Ω 3 Ω
3 A 5 Ω
+
V
0
−
3
To ﬁnd V
0
3
, note that the 3 A current splits into 1.5 A through each branch (2 +3 and
5 ), and V
0
3
= −1.5 ×2 = −3 V.
The total response is given by the sum of the individual responses as
V
0
= V
0
10
+ V
0
2
+ V
0
3
= 8 +3.2 −3 = 8.2 V
This is the same result we would have found if we analyzed the original circuit directly using
the nodevoltage or meshcurrent method.
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
LINEARNETWORKANALYSIS 47
Example 5.7. Find the voltage across the 5 A current source, V
5
, in the following ﬁgure using
superposition.
3 Ω
5 Ω
2 Ω 10 V
+
V
0
−
5 A
+
V
5
−
3V
0
Solution. First consider ﬁnding the response, V
0
10
, due to the 10 V source only with the 5 A
source dead as shown in the following ﬁgure. As required during the analysis, the dependent
current source is kept in the modiﬁed circuit and should not be set dead.
3 Ω
5 Ω
2 Ω 10 V
+
V
0
−
+
V
5
−
3V
0
I = 0 A
10 10
3 V
0
10
10
A
Notice that no current ﬂows through the open circuit created by the dead current source,
and that the current ﬂowing through the 5 resistor is 3V
0
. Therefore, applying KCL
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
48 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
at node A gives
V
0
10
−10
3
+
V
0
10
2
+3V
0
10
−3V
0
10
= 0
which gives V
0
10
= 4 V. KVL gives −V
0
10
−5 ×3V
0
10
+ V
5
10
= 0, and therefore V
5
10
= 64 V.
Next consider ﬁnding the response, V
0
5
, due to the 5 Asource, with the 10 Vsource dead.
3 Ω
5 Ω
2 Ω
+
V
0
−
5 A
+
V
5
−
3V
0
B
5
5 5
I
5
First combine the two resistors in parallel (3 2 ), giving 1.2 . V
0
5
is easily calculated
by Ohm’s law as V
0
5
= 5 ×1.2 = 6 V. KCL is then applied at node B to ﬁnd I
5
, giving
−3V
0
5
+ I
5
−5 = 0
With V
0
5
= 6 V, I
5
= 3 ×6 +5 = 23 A. Finally, apply KVL around the closed path
−V
0
5
−5I
5
+ V
5
5
= 0
or V
5
5
= V
0
5
+5I
5
= 6 +5 ×23 = 121 V. The total response is given by the sum of the indi
vidual responses as
V
5
= V
5
10
+ V
5
5
= 64 +121 = 185 V
5.3.2 Equivalent Sources
We call two sources equivalent if they each produce the same voltage and current regardless of
the resistance. Consider the two circuits in Fig. 5.5. If I
s
=
V
s
R
s
as shown in the ﬁgure on the
right, then the same current and voltage are seen in resistor R
l
in either circuit as easily shown
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
LINEARNETWORKANALYSIS 49
V
S
R
S
R1
Il
+
Vl
−
R1
Il
+
Vl
−
R
S
S
S
S
V
I
R
=
FIGURE5.5: Two equivalent circuits.
using voltage and current divider rules. For the circuit on the left, the current and voltage for
R
l
are
V
l
= V
s
R
l
R
l
+ R
s
and I
l
=
V
s
R
l
+ R
s
R1
Rs
Il
+
Vl
−
VS R1
Rs
Rx VS
Il
+
Vl
−
Rs
Rx
Il
+
Vl
−
R1 Rs
Il
+
Vl
−
R1
s
s
s
V
I
R
=
s
s
s
V
I
R
=
FIGURE5.6: Equivalent circuits. In both circuits on the left, the resistor R
x
has no effect on the circuit
and can be removed.
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
50 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
For the circuit on the right with I
s
=
V
s
R
s
, the current and voltage for R
l
are
I
l
= I
s
R
s
R
l
+ R
s
=
V
s
R
l
+ R
s
and V
l
= I
l
R
l
= V
s
R
l
R
l
+ R
s
Therefore, we can replace the voltage source and R
s
in the box in Fig. 5.5 (left) with the current
source and R
s
in the box in Fig. 5.5 (right). We shall see that exchanging source plus resistor
according to Fig. 5.5 simpliﬁes the analysis of circuits.
Consider Fig. 5.6. In the two circuits on the left, the resistor R
x
has no impact on the
voltage and current on R
l
, and as indicated, these circuits can be replaced by the two circuits
on the right by completely removing R
x
.
Example 5.8. Use source transformations to ﬁnd V
0
in the following ﬁgure.
4 Ω
2 Ω
2 Ω
4 Ω
4 V
4 V
3 A
+
V
0
−
Solution. Our strategy in this solution involves combining resistors in series and parallel,
current sources in parallel and voltage sources in series. We ﬁrst remove the 4 resistor since it
is in series with the 3 A source and has no effect on the circuit, and transform the 2 resistor
and 4 V source into a
4
2
= 2 A source in parallel with a 2 resistor as shown in the following
ﬁgure. Notice that the current direction in the transformed source is in agreement with the
polarity of the 4 V source.
2 Ω 4 Ω
4 V
3 A
+
V
0
−
2 A 2 Ω
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
LINEARNETWORKANALYSIS 51
As shown in the next ﬁgure, combining the two parallel current sources results in a 1 A source,
and combining the two parallel resistors results in a 1 resistance.
4 Ω
4 V
+
V
0
−
1 Ω 1 A
Another source transformation is carried out on the current source and resistor in parallel as
shown in the next ﬁgure.
4 V
4 Ω
+
V
0
−
1 Ω
1 V
The two voltage sources are combined, resulting in a 5 V source. Using the voltage divider gives
V
0
= 5
4
4 +1
= 4 V
P1: KDD
MOBK03605 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
52
P1: KDD
MOBK03606 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
53
C H A P T E R 6
Th´ evenin’s and Norton’s Theorems
Any combination of resistances, controlled sources, and independent sources with two external
terminals (A and B, denoted A,B) can be replaced by a single resistance and an independent
source, as shown in Fig. 6.1. A Th´ evenin equivalent circuit reduces the original circuit into
a voltage source in series with a resistor (upper right of Fig. 6.1). A Norton equivalent cir
cuit reduces the original circuit into a current source in parallel with a resistor (lower right
of Fig. 6.1). These two theorems help reduce complex circuits into simpler circuits. We re
fer to the circuit elements connected across the terminals A,B (that are not shown) as the
load. The Th´ evenin equivalent circuit and Norton equivalent circuits are equivalent to the
original circuit in that the same voltage and current are observed across any load. Usually,
the load is not included in the simpliﬁcation because it is important for other analysis, such
as maximum power expended by the load. Although we focus here on sources and resistors,
these two theorems can be extended to any circuit composed of linear elements with two
terminals.
6.1 TH
´
EVENIN’S THEOREM
Th´ evenin’s Theorem states that an equivalent circuit consisting of an ideal voltage source, V
OC
,
in series with an equivalent resistance, R
EQ
, can be used to replace any circuit that consists
of independent and dependent voltage and current sources and resistors. V
OC
is equal to the
open circuit voltage across terminals A,B as shown in Fig. 6.2, and calculated using standard
techniques such as the nodevoltage or meshcurrent methods.
The resistor R
EQ
is the resistance seen across the terminals A,B when all sources are
dead. Recall that a dead voltage source is a short circuit and a dead current source is an open
circuit.
P1: KDD
MOBK03606 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
54 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
V
OC
REQ
B
A
REQ I
SC
B
A
Replaced by
Independent and
dependent
sources, and
resistances
A
B
FIGURE 6.1: A general circuit consisting of independent and dependent sources can be replaced by a
voltage source (V
OC
) in series with a resistor (R
EQ
) or a current source (I
SC
) in parallel with a resistor
(R
EQ
).
Independent and
dependent
sources, and
resistances
A
B
+
V
OC
−
FIGURE 6.2: The open circuit voltage, V
OC
, is calculated across the terminals A,B using standard
techniques such as nodevoltage or meshcurrent methods.
P1: KDD
MOBK03606 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
TH
´
EVENIN’ S ANDNORTON’ S THEOREMS 55
Example 6.1. Find the Th´ evenin equivalent circuit with respect to terminals A,B for the
following circuit.
10 V 4 A
2 Ω
2 Ω
B
A
Solution. The solution to ﬁnding the Th´ evenin equivalent circuit is done in two parts, ﬁrst
ﬁnding V
OC
and then solving for R
EQ
. The open circuit voltage, V
OC
, is easily found using the
nodevoltage method as shown in the following circuit.
10 V 4 A
2 Ω
2 Ω
B
A
+
V
OC
−
The sum of currents leaving the node is
V
OC
−10
2
+
V
OC
2
−4 = 0
and V
OC
= 9 V.
Next, R
EQ
is found by ﬁrst setting all sources dead (the current source is an open circuit
and the voltage source is a short circuit), and then ﬁnding the resistance seen from the terminals
A,B as shown in the following ﬁgure.
P1: KDD
MOBK03606 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
56 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
2 Ω
2 Ω
B
A
REQ
From the previous circuit, it is clear that R
EQ
is equal to 1 (that is, 2 2 ). Thus, the
Th´ evenin equivalent circuit is
9 V
1 Ω
B
A
It is important to note that the circuit used in ﬁnding V
OC
is not to be used in ﬁnding R
EQ
as not all voltages and currents are relevant in the other circuit and one cannot simply mix and
match.
6.2 NORTON’S THEOREM
Norton’s Theorem states that an equivalent circuit consisting of an ideal current source, I
SC
,
in parallel with an equivalent resistance, R
EQ
, can be used to replace any circuit that consists
of independent and dependent voltage and current sources and resistors. I
SC
is equal to the
current ﬂowing through a short between terminals A,B as shown in Fig. 6.3, and calculated
using standard techniques such as the nodevoltage or meshcurrent methods. The Th´ evenin
P1: KDD
MOBK03606 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
TH
´
EVENIN’ S ANDNORTON’ S THEOREMS 57
Independent and
dependent
sources, and
resistances
A
B
ISC
FIGURE 6.3: The short circuit current, I
SC
, is calculated by placing a short across the terminals A,B,
and ﬁnding the current through the short using standard techniques such as nodevoltage or meshcurrent
methods.
and Norton equivalent circuits are related to each other according to
R
EQ
=
V
OC
I
SC
(6.1)
This is easily seen by shorting the terminals A,B in Fig. 6.2. The current ﬂowing through the
short is
V
OC
I
SC
in agreement with Eq. (6.1). It should be clear that Figs. 6.2 and 6.3 are source
transformations of each other.
Example 6.2. Find the Norton equivalent circuit with respect to terminals A,Bfor the following
circuit.
10 V 4 A
2 Ω
2 Ω
B
A
P1: KDD
MOBK03606 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
58 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Solution. This circuit is the same as Ex. 6.1, so R
EQ
= 1 . To ﬁnd I
SC
we place a short
between the terminals A,B as shown in the following ﬁgure.
10 V 4 A
2 Ω
2 Ω
B
A
I
SC
Note that the 2 resistor is in parallel with the short across terminals A,B, therefore it is
removed since no current ﬂows through it, as shown in the next ﬁgure.
10 V 4 A
2 Ω
B
A
I
SC
I
2
+ 10 V −
Note also that current I
2
equals 5 A since the 10 V source is applied directly across the 2
resistor. Applying KCL at the node denoted A, gives
0 = −I
2
−4 + I
SC
= −5 −4 + I
SC
and I
SC
= 9 A. We could have found the current I
SC
directly from the solution of Ex. 6.1 since
I
SC
=
V
OC
R
EQ
=
9
1
= 9 A
P1: KDD
MOBK03606 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
TH
´
EVENIN’ S ANDNORTON’ S THEOREMS 59
The Norton equivalent circuit is shown in the following ﬁgure.
B
A
9 A 1 Ω
6.3 DEPENDENTSOURCES ANDTH
´
EVENINANDNORTON
EQUIVALENTCIRCUITS
If a circuit connected to terminals A,B contains dependent sources, the process for ﬁnding R
EQ
for either the Th´ evenin or Norton equivalent circuit must be modiﬁed, because the dependent
source has resistance, and this resistance cannot be calculated when setting all sources dead.
In this case we ﬁnd V
OC
and I
SC
, and then calculate R
EQ
=
V
OC
I
SC
.
Example 6.3 Find the Th´ evenin equivalent circuit with respect to terminals A,B for the fol
lowing circuit.
10 V
3 Ω
2 Ω
5 Ω
B
A
5 A
+
V
1
−
3V
1
P1: KDD
MOBK03606 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
60 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Solution. Since this circuit has a dependent source, R
EQ
is found by R
EQ
=
V
OC
I
SC
. Let’s ﬁrst
ﬁnd V
OC
using the meshcurrent method as labeled in the next ﬁgure.
10 V
3 Ω
2 Ω I
1
5 Ω
I
2
B
A
+
V
OC
−
5 A
I
3
+
V
1
−
3V1
Note that since there are two current sources on the perimeter of the circuit, I
2
= −5 A
and I
3
= 3V
1
= 3 ×2 (I
1
− I
2
) = 6I
1
+30.
Summing the voltage drops around mesh 1 gives
−10 +3I
1
+2 (I
1
− I
2
) = 0
Simplifying with I
2
= −5 A gives I
1
= 0 A. Applying KVL around mesh 2 to ﬁnd V
OC
gives
2 (I
2
− I
1
) +5 (I
2
− I
3
) + V
OC
= 0
With I
1
= 0 A, I
2
= −5 A and I
3
= 30 A, gives V
OC
= 185 V.
Next, we ﬁnd I
SC
using the nodevoltage method as labeled in the next ﬁgure.
Summing the currents leaving node gives
V
1
−10
3
+
V
1
2
+
V
1
5
+3V
1
= 0
and V
1
=
100
121
V.
P1: KDD
MOBK03606 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
TH
´
EVENIN’ S ANDNORTON’ S THEOREMS 61
Applying KCL at terminal A gives
10 V
3 Ω
2 Ω
5 Ω
B
A
5 A
+
V
1
−
3V
1
Δ
I
SC
−3V
1
−5 −
V
1
5
+ I
SC
= 0
With V
1
=
100
121
, gives I
SC
= 7.65 A. Therefore R
EQ
=
V
OC
I
SC
=
185
7.65
= 24.18 . The Th´ evenin
equivalent circuit is
B
A
24.18 Ω
185 V
P1: KDD
MOBK03606 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:4
62
P1: KDD
MOBK03607 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:5
63
C H A P T E R 7
Inductors
In the previous sections, we considered circuits involving sources and resistors that are de
scribed with algebraic equations. Any changes in the source are instantaneously observed in
the response. In this section, we examine the inductor, a passive element that relates the
voltage–current relationship with a differential equation. Circuits that contain inductors are
written in terms of derivatives and integrals. Any changes in the source with circuits that
contain inductors, i.e., a step input, have a response that is not instantaneous, but has nat
ural response that changes exponentially and a forced response that is the same form as the
source.
An inductor is a passive element that is able to store energy in a magnetic ﬁeld, and is
made by winding a coil of wire around a core that is an insulator or a ferromagnetic material. A
magnetic ﬁeld is established when current ﬂows through the coil. We use the symbol
to represent the inductor in a circuit; the unit of measure for inductance is the henry or henries
(H), where 1 H = 1 Vs/A. The relationship between voltage and current for an inductor is
given by
v = L
di
dt
(7.1)
The convention for writing the voltage drop across an inductor is similar to that of a resistor, as
shown in Fig. 7.1.
Physically, current cannot change instantaneously through an inductor since an inﬁnite
voltage is required according to Eq. (7.1) (i.e., the derivative of current at the time of the
instantaneous change is inﬁnity). Mathematically, a step change in current through an inductor
is possible by applying a voltage that is a Dirac delta function. For convenience, when a circuit
has just DC currents (or voltages), the inductors can be replaced by short circuits since the
voltage drop across the inductors are zero.
P1: KDD
MOBK03607 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:5
64 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
L
+ v −
i
FIGURE7.1: An inductor.
Example 7.1. Find v in the following circuit.
+
v
−
5 A 2 H
Solution. Accordingly,
v = L
di
dt
= 2 ×
d (5)
dt
= 0
This example shows that an inductor acts like a short circuit to DC current.
Example 7.2. Find I in the following circuit, given that the source has been applied for a very
long time.
6 Ω
5 H
3 H 4 Ω
4 Ω
1 H
2 Ω
3 H 5 V
I
P1: KDD
MOBK03607 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:5
INDUCTORS 65
Solution. Since the source has been applied for a very long time, only DC current ﬂows in the
circuit and the inductors can be replaced by short circuits as shown in the following ﬁgure.
2 Ω
4 Ω 2 Ω
4 Ω
6 Ω
6 V
I
To ﬁnd I, we ﬁnd the total resistance seen by the source and use Ohm’s law as follows:
R
EQ
= 6 ((4 4) +(2 2)) = 2
therefore,
I =
6
2
= 3
Example 7.3. Find v in the following circuit.
0 1 2 3
t (s)
1
i (A)
+
v
−
2 H i
Solution. The solution to this problem is best approached by breaking it up into time intervals
consistent with the changes in input current. Clearly for t < 0 and t > 2, the current is zero
and therefore v = 0. We use Eq. (7.1) to determine the voltage in the other two intervals as
follows.
P1: KDD
MOBK03607 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:5
66 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
For 0 < t < 1
In this interval, the input is i = t, and
v = L
di
dt
= 2
d(t)
dt
= 2 V
For 1 ≤ t ≤ 2
In this interval, the input is i = −(t −2) , and
v = L
di
dt
= 2
d (−(t −2))
dt
= −2 V
Equation (7.1) deﬁnes the voltage across an inductor for a given current. Suppose one is given a
voltage across an inductor and asked to ﬁnd the current. We start from Eq. (7.1) by multiplying
both sides by dt, giving
v (t) dt = Ldi
Integrating both sides yields
t
t
0
v (λ) dλ = L
i (t)
i (t
0
)
dα
or
i (t) =
1
L
t
t
0
v (λ) dλ +i (t
0
) (7.2)
For t
0
= 0, as is often the case in solving circuit problems, Eq. (7.2) reduces to
i (t) =
1
L
t
0
v (λ) dλ +i (0) (7.3)
and for t
0
= −∞, the initial current is by deﬁnition equal to zero, and therefore Eq. (7.2)
reduces to
i (t) =
1
L
t
−∞
v (λ) dλ (7.4)
The initial current in Eq. (7.2), i (t
0
), is usually deﬁned in the same direction as i , which means
i (t
0
) is a positive quantity. If the direction of i (t
0
) is in the opposite direction of i (as will happen
when we write node equations), then i (t
0
) is negative.
P1: KDD
MOBK03607 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:5
INDUCTORS 67
Example 7.4. Find i for t ≥ 0 if i (0 ) = 2 A and v(t) = 4e
−3t
u(t) in the following circuit.
2 H
i
v
Solution. From Eq. (7.2), we have
i (t) =
1
L
t
t
0
vdλ +i (t
0
) =
1
2
t
0
4e
−3λ
dλ +i (0) =
1
2
t
0
4e
−3λ
dλ +2
= 2
e
−3λ
−3
t
λ=0
+2
=
2
3
4 −e
−3t
u(t)V
7.1 POWERANDENERGY
Since the inductor is a passive element, it absorbs power according to the relationship
p = vi = Li
di
dt
(7.5)
Within the inductor, power is not consumed as heat, as happens in a resistor, but stored
as energy in the magnetic ﬁeld around the coil during any period of time [t
0
, t] as
w(t) −w(t
0
) =
t
t
0
p dt = L
t
t
0
i
di
dt
dt (7.6)
= L
i (t)
i (t
0
)
i di =
1
2
L
[i (t)]
2
−[i (t
0
)]
2
where the unit of energy is joules ( J). At time equal to negative inﬁnity, we assume that the
initial current is zero and thus the total energy is given by
w(t) =
1
2
Li
2
(7.7)
P1: KDD
MOBK03607 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:5
68 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Any energy stored in the magnetic ﬁeld is recoverable. If power is negative in Eq. (7.5),
energy is being extracted from the inductor. If power is positive, energy is being stored in the
inductor.
Example 7.5. Find the inductor power in the following circuit for t > 0 when i (0) = 0 A.
−2
+2
v (V)
0 1 2
t (s)
v 2 H
i
Solution. We ﬁrst solve for current so that Eq. (7.5) can be applied to ﬁnd the power. As
before, the solution is best approached by breaking it up into time intervals consistent with the
changes in input voltage.
For 0 < t < 1
In this interval, the input is v = 2t, and
i (t) =
1
L
t
0
v (λ) dλ +i (0) =
1
2
t
0
2λ dλ =
t
2
2
A
Power for this interval is
p = vi = 2t ×
t
2
2
= t
3
W
The current at t = 1 needed for the initial condition in the next part is
i (1) =
t
2
2
t=1
=
1
2
A
For 1 ≤ t ≤ 2
In this interval, the input is v = 2 (t −2), and
i (t) =
1
L
t
1
v (λ)dλ +i (1) =
1
2
t
1
2 (λ −2)dλ +
1
2
=
t
2
2
−2t +2 A
P1: KDD
MOBK03607 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:5
INDUCTORS 69
Accordingly, power is
p = vi = 2 (t −2) ×
t
2
2
−2t +2
= t
3
−6t
2
+12t −8 W
For t > 2
Power is zero in this interval since the voltage is zero.
P1: KDD
MOBK03607 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:5
70
P1: KDD
MOBK03608 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:6
71
C H A P T E R 8
Capacitors
Acapacitor is a device that stores energy in an electric ﬁeld by charge separation when appropri
ately polarized by a voltage. Simple capacitors consist of parallel plates of conducting material
that are separated by a gap ﬁlled with a dielectric material. Dielectric materials, that is, air, mica,
or Teﬂon, contain a large number of electric dipoles that become polarized in the presence of an
electric ﬁeld. The charge separation caused by the polarization of the dielectric is proportional
to the external voltage and given by
q(t) = C v (t) (8.1)
where C represents the capacitance of the element. The unit of measure for capacitance is
the farad or farads (F), where 1 F = 1 C/V. We use the symbol
C
to denote a capacitor;
most capacitors are measured in terms of microfarads (1 μF = 10
−6
F) or picofarads (1 pF =
10
−12
F). Figure 8.1 illustrates a capacitor in a circuit.
Using the relationship between current and charge, Eq. (8.1) is written in a more useful
form for circuit analysis problems as
i =
dq
dt
= C
dv
dt
(8.2)
The capacitance of a capacitor is determined by the permittivity of the dielectric (ε =
8.854 ×10
−12
F/M for air) that ﬁlls the gap between the parallel plates, the size of the gap
between the plates, d, and the crosssectional area of the plates, A, as
C =
εA
d
(8.3)
As described, the capacitor physically consists of two conducting surfaces that stores
charge, separated by a thin insulating material that has a very large resistance. In actuality,
current does not ﬂowthrough the capacitor plates. Rather, as James Clerk Maxwell hypothesized
when he described the uniﬁed electromagnetic theory, a displacement current ﬂows internally
between capacitor plates and this current equals the current ﬂowing into the capacitor and out
of the capacitor. Thus KCL is maintained. It should be clear from Eq. (8.2) that dielectric
P1: KDD
MOBK03608 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:6
72 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
v
C
i
FIGURE8.1: Circuit with a capacitor.
materials do not conduct DC currents; capacitors act as open circuits when DC currents are
present.
Example 8.1. Suppose v = 5 V and C = 2 F for the circuit shown in Fig. 8.1 Find i .
Solution.
i = C
dv
dt
= 2 ×
d
dt
(5) = 0
A capacitor is an open circuit to DC voltage.
Example 8.2. Find I in the following circuit given that the current source has been applied
for a very long time.
4 A 2 Ω 1 F
3 Ω
2 F
2 Ω
I
4 H
2 H
2 H
2 F
P1: KDD
MOBK03608 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:6
CAPACITORS 73
Solution. Since the source has been applied for a very long time, only DC current ﬂows in
the circuit. Furthermore the inductors can be replaced by short circuits and capacitors can be
replaced by open circuits, as shown in the following ﬁgure.
4 A 2 Ω
I
2 Ω
To ﬁnd I, we use the current divider law as
I = 4 ×
1
2
1
2
+
1
2
= 2 A
Example 8.3. Find i for the following circuit.
0 1 2
1
v (V)
2 F
v
i
t (s)
Solution. For t < 0 and t > 2, v = 0 V, and therefore i = 0 in this interval. For nonzero val
ues, the voltage waveform is described with two different functions, v = t V for 0 ≤ t ≤ 1, and
v = −(t −2) V for 1 < t ≤ 2. Equation (8.2) is used to determine the current for each interval
as follows.
For 0 < t < 1
i = C
dv
dt
= 2 ×
d
dt
(t) = 2 A
P1: KDD
MOBK03608 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:6
74 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
For 1 ≤ t ≤ 2
i = C
dv
dt
= 2 ×
d
dt
(−(t −2)) = −2 A
Voltage cannot change instantaneously across a capacitor. To have a step change in voltage
across a capacitor requires that an inﬁnite current ﬂow through the capacitor, which is not
physically possible. Of course, this is mathematically possible using a Dirac delta function.
Equation (8.2) deﬁnes the current through a capacitor for a given voltage. Suppose one is
given a current through a capacitor and asked to ﬁnd the voltage. To ﬁnd the voltage, we start
from Eq. (8.2) by multiplying both sides by dt, giving
i (t) dt = C dv
Integrating both sides yields
t
t
0
i (λ) dλ = C
v(t)
v(t
0
)
dv
or
v(t) =
1
C
t
t
0
i dt +v(t
0
) (8.4)
For t
0
= 0, Eq. (8.4) reduces to
v(t) =
1
C
t
0
i dt +v(0) (8.5)
and for t
0
= −∞, Eq. (8.4) reduces to
v(t) =
1
C
t
−∞
i (λ) dλ (8.6)
The initial voltage in Eq. (8.4), v(t
0
), is usually deﬁned with the same polarity as v, which
means v(t
0
) is a positive quantity. If the polarity of v(t
0
) is in the opposite direction of v (as will
happen when we write mesh equations), then v(t
0
)is negative.
P1: KDD
MOBK03608 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:6
CAPACITORS 75
Example 8.4. Find v for the circuit that follows.
2 F
0 2
2
i
s
(A)
t (s)
i
s
+
v
−
Solution. The current waveform is described with three different functions: for the interval
t ≤0, for the interval 0 < t ≤ 2, and for t >2. To ﬁnd the voltage, we apply Eq. (8.6) for each
interval as follows.
For t < 0
v(t) =
1
C
t
−∞
i dt =
1
2
0
−∞
0 dt = 0 V
For 0 ≤ t ≤ 2
v(t) =
1
C
t
0
i dt +v(0)
and with v(0) = 0,we have
v(t) =
1
2
t
0
λ dλ =
1
2
λ
2
2
t
0
=
t
2
4
V
The voltage at t = 2 needed for the initial condition in the next part is
v(2) =
t
2
4
t=2
= 1 V
For t > 2
v(t) =
1
C
t
2
i dt +v(2) =
1
2
t
2
0 dt +v(2) = 1 V
P1: KDD
MOBK03608 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:6
76 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
8.1 POWERANDENERGY
The capacitor is a passive element that absorbs power according to the relationship
p = vi = C v
dv
dt
(8.7)
Energy is stored in the electric ﬁeld during any period of time [t
0
, t] as
w(t) −w(t
0
) =
t
t
0
p dt = C
t
t
0
v
dv
dt
dt
= C
v(t)
v(t
0
)
v dv =
1
2
C([v(t)]
2
−[v (t
0
)]
2
) (8.8)
where the unit of energy is joules ( J). At time equal to negative inﬁnity, we assume that the
initial voltage is zero and thus the total energy is given by
w(t) =
1
2
C v
2
(8.9)
Any energy stored in the electric ﬁeld is recoverable. If power is negative in Eq. (8.7), energy is
being extracted from the capacitor. If power is positive, energy is being stored in the capacitor.
Example 8.5. Find the power and energy for the following circuit.
v
s
(t) =
⎧
⎪
⎨
⎪
⎩
0 V t < 0
t
2
V 0 ≤ t ≤ 1
e
−(t−1)
V t > 1
2 F v
s
i
Solution. To ﬁnd the power, we ﬁrst need to ﬁnd the current calculated from Eq. (8.2).
i (t) = C
dv
dt
=
⎧
⎪
⎨
⎪
⎩
0 A t < 0
4 t A 0 ≤ t ≤ 1
−2e
−(t−1)
A t > 1
P1: KDD
MOBK03608 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:6
CAPACITORS 77
Equation (8.7) is used to ﬁnd the power as follows.
p(t) = v · i =
⎧
⎪
⎨
⎪
⎩
0 t < 0
t
2
· 4t = 4t
3
W 0 ≤ t ≤ 1
e
−(t−1)
· (−2e
−(t−1)
) = −2e
−2(t−1)
W t > 1
The energy in each interval is calculated using Eq. (8.9) as follows.
w(t) =
1
2
C v
2
=
⎧
⎪
⎨
⎪
⎩
0 t < 0
1
2
×2[t
2
]
2
= t
4
J 0 ≤ t ≤ 1
1
2
×2[e
−(t−1)
]
2
= e
−2(t−1)
J t > 1
Note that energy is being stored in the interval 0 ≤ t ≤ 1 since power is positive, and energy is
being extracted from the electric ﬁeld by the source for t > 1 since power is negative.
From Eq. (8.8), we calculate the energy stored in the electric ﬁeld during time interval
[0, 1] as
w(1) −w(0) =
1
2
×2(v(1)
2
−v(0)
2
) = 1 J
and the energy delivered from the electric ﬁeld in the interval [1, ∞] as
w(∞) −w(1) =
1
2
×2(v (∞)
2
−v (1)
2
) = −1 J
P1: KDD
MOBK03608 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:6
78
P1: KDD
MOBK03609 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:7
79
C H A P T E R 9
Inductance and Capacitance
Combinations
As with resistors, it is possible to reduce complex inductor and capacitor circuits into simpler,
equivalent circuits by combining series and parallel collections of like elements. Consider the
following circuit consisting of N inductors in series. Since the same current ﬂows through each
inductor, the voltage drop across each inductor is v
i
= L
i
di
dt
. Applying KVLon this circuit gives
v
s
= v
1
+v
2
+· · · +v
N
= L
1
di
dt
+ L
2
di
dt
+· · · + L
N
di
dt
= (L
1
+ L
2
+· · · + L
N
)
di
dt
= L
EQ
di
dt
Thus, inductors connected in a series can be replaced by an equivalent inductance, whereby
L
EQ
= L
1
+ L
2
+· · · + L
N
(9.1)
Next, consider N inductors connected in parallel as shown in Fig. 9.1. Since the same
voltage is across each inductor, the current through each inductor is i
i
=
1
L
i
t
t
0
v
0
dt +i
i
(t
0
).
Applying KCL on the upper node of this circuit gives
i
s
=
N
¸
i =1
⎡
⎣
1
L
i
t
t
0
v
0
dt +i
i
(t
0
)
⎤
⎦
=
¸
1
L
1
+
1
L
2
+· · · +
1
L
N
¸
t
t
0
v
0
dt +
N
¸
i =1
i
i
(t
0
)
=
1
L
EQ
t
t
0
v
0
dt +i
s
(t
0
)
P1: KDD
MOBK03609 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:7
80 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
+ v
1
−
L
1
L
2
i
+ v
2
−
v
s
+
vN
−
L
N
v
s
L
EQ
i
FIGURE9.1: (Left) N inductors in series. (Right) An equivalent circuit for inductors in series.
Thus, inductors connected in parallel can be replaced by an equivalent inductance, where
by
L
EQ
=
1
1
L
1
+
1
L
2
+· · · +
1
L
N
(9.2)
For the case of two inductors in parallel, Eq. (9.2) reduces to
L
EQ
=
L
1
L
2
L
1
+ L
2
(9.3)
Equations (9.1) and (9.2) are similar to the results we found for resistors in series and parallel,
and the process used for simplifying resistor circuits is the same used for inductors in series and
parallel.
L1
is
+
v
0
−
L2 LN
+
v0
−
is
iN i2 i1
FIGURE9.2: (Left) N inductors in parallel. (Right) An equivalent circuit for inductors in parallel.
P1: KDD
MOBK03609 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:7
INDUCTANCEANDCAPACITANCECOMBINATIONS 81
Example 9.1. Find L
EQ
for the following circuit.
1 H 4 H 2 H
2 H 4 H 6 H 6 H
LEQ
Solution. The equivalent inductance is found by forming series and parallel combinations
from right to left until it reduces to a single inductance as shown in the following ﬁgure.
1 H 4 H 2 H
2 H 4 H 6 H 6 H
L
EQ
2 +2= 4 H
4 4 = 2 H
4 +2= 6 H
6 6 6 = 2 H
1 + 2 = 3 H
If follows that
L
EQ
= 1 +(6 6 (4 +(4 (2 +2))))
= 1 +
6 6
4 +
1
1
4
+
1
4
= 1 +
1
1
6
+
1
6
+
1
6
= 1 +2 = 3 H
P1: KDD
MOBK03609 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:7
82 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
C1
is
+
v
0
−
C2 CN CN
+
v0
−
FIGURE9.3: (Left) N capacitors in parallel. (Right) An equivalent circuit for capacitors in parallel.
Next, consider N capacitors connected in parallel, as shown in Fig. 9.3. Since the same voltage
is across each capacitor, the current through each inductor is i
i
= C
i
dv
0
dt
. Applying KCL on the
upper node of this circuit gives
i
s
= C
1
dv
0
dt
+C
2
dv
0
dt
+· · · +C
N
dv
0
dt
= C
EQ
dv
0
dt
Thus, capacitors connected in series can be replaced by an equivalent capacitance, whereby
C
EQ
= C
1
+C
2
+· · · +C
N
(9.4)
Next, consider N capacitors connected in series as shown in Fig. 9.4. Since the same
current ﬂows through each capacitor, the voltage across each inductor is v
i
=
1
C
i
t
t
0
i dt +v
i
(t
0
).
Applying KVL around this circuit gives
+ v
1
−
C
1
C
2
i
+ v
2
−
vs
+
v
N
−
vs
i
C
N
+
v
N
−
C
EQ
FIGURE9.4: (Left) N capacitors in series. (Right) An equivalent circuit for capacitors in series.
P1: KDD
MOBK03609 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:7
INDUCTANCEANDCAPACITANCECOMBINATIONS 83
v
s
=
N
¸
i =1
⎡
⎣
1
C
i
t
t
0
i dt +v
i
(t
0
)
⎤
⎦
=
¸
1
C
1
+
1
C
2
+· · · +
1
C
N
¸
t
t
0
i dt +
N
¸
i =1
v
i
(t
0
)
=
1
C
EQ
t
t
0
i dt +v
s
(t
0
)
Thus, capacitors connected in series can be replaced by an equivalent capacitance, whereby
C
EQ
=
1
1
C
1
+
1
C
2
+· · · +
1
C
N
(9.5)
For the case of two capacitors in series, Eq. (9.5) reduces to
C
EQ
=
C
1
C
2
C
1
+C
2
(9.6)
Equations (9.5) and (9.6) are similar to the results we found for resistors in parallel and
series, respectively. That is, we treat capacitors in parallel using the techniques for resistors in
series, and capacitors in series as resistors in parallel.
Example 9.2. Reduce the following circuit to a single capacitor and inductor.
6 F
6 F
0.5 H
3 F
3 F
3 H
2 H
2 H 2 H
Solution. The equivalent inductance is found by forming series and parallel combinations,
from right to left, of inductors and capacitors until the analysis reduces the circuit to a single
inductance and capacitance. Consider the inductors ﬁrst as shown in the following ﬁgure on
the right, which results in 1.5 H. Also note that the two parallel capacitors equal 6 F.
P1: KDD
MOBK03609 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:7
84 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
6 F
6 F
0.5 H
3 F
3 F
3 H
2 H
2 H 2 H
2 2 = 1 H
2 + 1 = 3 H
3 3 = 1.5 H 3 + 3 = 6 F
Next we slide the 1.5 H equivalent inductance to the left past the capacitors as shown
in the following ﬁgure. The two series inductors equal 2 H, and the three capacitors in series
(treated like resistors in parallel) equal
1
1
6
+
1
6
+
1
6
= 2 F.
6 F 6 F 6 F
1.5 H 0.5 H
6 6 6 = 2 F 0.5 + 1.5 = 2 H
The ﬁnal reduced circuit is shown in the following ﬁgure.
2 F
2 H
P1: KDD
MOBK03609 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:7
INDUCTANCEANDCAPACITANCECOMBINATIONS 85
The next example illustrates how to simplify a circuit and then apply the meshcurrent
method to solve for unknown currents.
Example 9.3. (a) Find i (t), i
1
(t), i
2
(t) and v(t) for the following circuit for t ≥ 0 given
i
1
(0
−
) = 5 A and i
2
(0
−
) = 15 A. (b) Find the initial energy stored in the inductors. (c) Find
the energy dissipated in the resistors between t = 0 and t = ∞. (d) Find the energy trapped in
the inductors at t = ∞.
3 H 6 H 300 Ω 600 Ω 200 Ω
400 Ω
i
i
1
i
2
+
v
−
Solution
(a) For ease in solution, ﬁrst simplify the circuit by combining the three resistors as
R
EQ
= 400 +
1
1
200
+
1
300
+
1
600
= 500
and two inductors as L
EQ
=
3×6
3+6
= 2 H as shown in the following circuit.
2 H
i
+
v
−
500 Ω
i
We use the meshcurrent method to ﬁnd v(t) as follows. Recall that the voltage drop
across an inductor is v
L
= L
di
dt
, so we have
500i +2
di
dt
= 0
P1: KDD
MOBK03609 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:7
86 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
or
di
dt
+250i = 0
The previous differential equation has the characteristic equation
s +250 = 0
with root s = −250 and solution
i (t) = K
1
e
−250t
A
Note that the forced response is zero since there is no input. Because the energy stored in an
inductor cannot change instantaneously,
i
1
(0
−
) = i
1
(0
+
) = 5 A, i
2
(0
−
) = i
2
(0
+
) = 15 A and
i (0
−
) = i (0
+
) = i
1
(0
+
) +i
2
(0
+
) = 20 A
To determine K
1
we use i (0) = 20 = K
1
. Thus, our solution is i (t) = 20e
−250t
u(t) A. To ﬁnd
i
1
(t) and i
2
(t) we ﬁnd v(t) = L
EQ
di
dt
and then use i
i
(t) =
1
L
i
t
0
v dt +i
i
(0). For t ≥ 0
v (t) = 2
di
dt
= −10000e
−250t
u(t) V
and
i
1
(t) =
1
3
t
0
(−10000e
−250λ
) dλ +5 =
40
3
e
−250λ
t
λ=0
+5 =
40
3
e
−250t
−
40
3
+5
=
40
3
e
−250t
−
25
3
A
i
2
(t) =
1
6
t
0
(−10000e
−250λ
) dλ +15 =
40
6
e
−250λ
t
λ=0
+15 =
20
3
e
−250t
−
20
3
+
45
3
=
20
3
e
−250t
+
25
3
A
Naturally i (t) = i
1
(t) +i
2
(t) = 20e
−250t
u(t) A.
(b) From Eq. 7.7, the total initial energy stored in the inductors equals
w
L
(0) =
1
2
L
1
i
2
1
+
1
2
L
2
i
2
2
=
1
2
×3 ×5
2
+
1
2
×6 ×15
2
= 712.5 J
P1: KDD
MOBK03609 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:7
INDUCTANCEANDCAPACITANCECOMBINATIONS 87
(c) The energy dissipated in the resistors equals
w
R
EQ
=
∞
0
R
EQ
i
2
(t) dt =
∞
0
500 ×(20e
−250t
)
2
dt
=
∞
0
500 ×400e
−500t
dt = − 400e
−500t
∞
0
= 400 J
(d) The energy trapped in the inductors at t = ∞equals
w
1
(∞) =
1
2
L
1
i
2
1
(∞) =
1
2
×3 ×
−
25
3
2
= 104.1667 J
w
2
(∞) =
1
2
L
2
i
2
2
(∞) =
1
2
×6 ×
25
3
2
= 208.333 J
Notice that energy trapped in the two inductors equals the total initial stored energy minus the
energy dissipated in the resistors. Also note that while energy is trapped in the two inductors at
t = ∞, the energy stored in the equivalent inductor, L
EQ
, is zero. Note that the initial energy
stored in the equivalent inductor is
1
2
×2 ×(20)
2
= 400 J, and that the energy dissipated in the
resistors equals the energy stored in the equivalent inductor at t = 0.
P1: KDD
MOBK03609 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:7
88
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
89
C H A P T E R 1 0
AGeneral Approach to Solving
Circuits Involving Resistors,
Capacitors and Inductors
Sometimes a circuit consisting of resistors, inductors and capacitors cannot be simpliﬁed by
bringing together like elements in series and parallel combinations. Consider the circuit shown
in Fig. 10.1. In this case, the absence of parallel or series combinations of resistors, inductors
or capacitors prevents us from simplifying the circuit for ease in solution, as in Ex. 10.1. In
this section, we apply the nodevoltage and meshcurrent methods to write equations involving
integrals and differentials using element relationships for resistors, inductors and capacitors.
From these equations, we can solve for unknown currents and voltages of interest.
Example 10.1. Write the node equations for the following circuit for t ≥ 0 if the initial
conditions are zero.
vs(t)
C1
C2
R2
R1
L1
Solution. With the reference node at the bottom of the circuit, we have two essential nodes,
as shown in the following redrawn circuit. Recall that the node involving the voltage source is a
known voltage and that we do not write a node equation for it. When writing the nodevoltage
equations, the current through a capacitor is i
c
= C ˙ v, where ˙ v is the derivative of the
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
90 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
1 F
3 F 4 F
5 H
2 H
3 Ω
2 Ω
FIGURE10.1: A circuit that cannot be simpliﬁed.
voltage across the capacitor, and the current through an inductor is i
L
=
1
L
t
0
vdλ +i
L
(0),
where v is the voltage across the inductor. Since the initial conditions are zero, the term
i
L
(0) = 0.
vs(t)
C1
C2
R2
R1
L1
+
v1
− −
+
v2
2
1
Summing the currents leaving node 1 gives
C
1
( ˙ v
1
− ˙ v
s
) +
v
1
R
1
+
v
1
−v
2
R
2
= 0
which simpliﬁes to
C
1
˙ v
1
+
1
R
1
+
1
R
2
v
1
−
1
R
2
v
2
= C
1
˙ v
s
Summing the currents leaving node 2 gives
v
2
−v
1
R
2
+C
2
˙ v
2
+
1
L
1
t
0
(v
2
−v
s
) dλ = 0
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 91
Typically, we eliminate integrals in the node equations by differentiating. When applied to the
previous expression, this gives
1
R
2
˙ v
2
−
1
R
2
˙ v
1
+C
2
¨ v
2
+
1
L
1
v
2
−
1
L
1
v
s
= 0
and after rearranging yields
¨ v
2
+
1
C
2
R
2
˙ v
2
+
1
C
2
L
1
v
2
−
1
C
2
R
2
˙ v
1
=
1
C
2
L
1
v
s
When applying the nodevoltage method, we generate one equation for each essential
node. To write a single differential equation involving just one node voltage and the inputs, we
use the other node equations and substitute into the node equation of the desired node voltage.
Sometimes this involves differentiation as well as substitution. The easiest case involves a node
equation containing an undesired node voltage without its derivatives. Another method for
creating a single differential equation is to use the D operator.
Consider the node equations for Ex. 10.1, and assume that we are interested in obtaining
a single differential equation involving node voltage v
1
and its derivatives, and the input. For
ease in analysis, let us assume that the values for the circuit elements are R
1
= R
2
= 1 , C
1
=
C
2
= 1 F, and L
1
= 1 H, giving us
˙ v
1
+2v
1
−v
2
= ˙ v
s
and
¨ v
2
+ ˙ v
2
+ v
2
− ˙ v
1
= v
s
Using the ﬁrst equation, we solve for v
2
, calculate ˙ v
2
and ¨ v
2
, and then substitute into the second
equation as follows.
v
2
= ˙ v
1
+2v
1
− ˙ v
s
˙ v
2
= ¨ v
1
+2 ˙ v
1
− ¨ v
s
¨ v
2
=
...
v
1
+2 ¨ v
1
−
...
v
s
After substituting into the second node equation, we have
...
v
1
+2 ¨ v
1
−
...
v
s
+ ¨ v
1
+2 ˙ v
1
− ¨ v
s
+ ˙ v
1
+2v
1
− ˙ v
s
− ˙ v
1
= v
s
and after simplifying
...
v
1
+3 ¨ v
1
+2 ˙ v
1
+2v
1
=
...
v
s
+ ¨ v
s
+ ˙ v
s
−v
s
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
92 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
The Doperator also provides us the means to write the two differential equations as a single dif
ferential equation involving only v
1
and v
s
. In terms of the D operator, the two node equations
are written as
(D+2)v
1
−v
2
= Dv
s
(D
2
+ D+1)v
2
− Dv
1
= v
s
Solving the ﬁrst equation for v
2
gives v
2
= (D+2) − Dv
s
, and after substituting v
2
into the
second equation yields
(D
2
+ D+1)(D+2)v
1
− D(D
2
+ D+1)v
s
− Dv
1
= v
s
Upon simpliﬁcation
(D
3
+3D
2
+2D+2)v
1
= (D
3
+ D
2
+ D+1)v
s
Returning to the differential notation, the result is
...
v
1
+3 ¨ v
1
+2 ˙ v
1
+2v
1
=
...
v
s
+ ¨ v
s
+ ˙ v
s
−v
s
which is the same expression we calculated before.
In general, the order of the differential equation relating a single output variable and
the inputs is equal to the number of energy storing elements in the circuit (capacitors and
inductors). In some circuits, the order of the differential equation is less than the number of
capacitors and inductors in the circuit. This occurs when capacitor voltages and inductor currents
are not independent, that is, there is an algebraic relationship between the capacitor, speciﬁcally
voltages and the inputs, or the inductor currents and the inputs. This occurs when capacitors
are connected directly to a voltage source or when inductors are connected directly to a current
source as shown in Fig. 10.2A and B. In Fig. 10.2A, two capacitors are connected directly to a
voltage source. KVL applied around the outer loop gives
−v(t) +v
1
(t) +v
2
(t) = 0
or
v(t) = v
1
(t) +v
2
(t)
where v
1
(t) and v
2
(t) are the voltages across the two capacitors. It should be clear that in the
previous equation, v
1
(t) and v
2
(t) are not independent, that is, there is an algebraic relationship
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 93
C1
C2
v(t)
+
v1(t)
−
+
v2(t)
−
R1
R2
i(t)
R1 R2
L1 L2
i2(t) i1(t)
C1
C2
v(t)
+
v1(t)
−
+
v2(t)
−
R1
R2
RS
i(t)
R1 R2
L1 L2
i2(t) i1(t) is(t)
Rs
A
B
C
D
FIGURE 10.2: (A), (B) Circuits described by ﬁrstorder differential equations and having algebraic
relationships between the voltages and currents. (C), (D) Circuits described by secondorder differential
equations, with no algebraic relationships between voltages and currents.
between the two; if v
1
(t) is known, then v
2
(t) = v(t) −v
1
(t). The same situation occurs with
two inductors connected directly to a current source as in Fig. 10.2B. KCL applied at the upper
node gives
i (t) = i
1
(t) +i
2
(t)
As before, currents i
1
(t) and i
2
(t) are not independent: there exists an algebraic relationship
between the currents. Circuits with the characteristics of Fig. 10.2A and B are rare in realistic
situations. For example, the two circuits in Fig. 10.2A and B are better described by those
in Fig. 10.2C and D since the voltage and current sources are more appropriately modeled
with a resistance within the ideal source, R
s
(called an internal resistance—a small resistance
for voltage source and a large resistance for a current source). By including an internal resis
tance R
s
in the circuit, we no longer have any algebraic relationships among the voltages and
currents.
Notice that the circuit given in Ex. 10.1 has three energy storing elements (two capacitors
and one inductor), and the resulting differential equation is of thirdorder, as expected.
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
94 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Example 10.2. Write the meshcurrent equations for the circuit in Ex. 10.1 for t ≥ 0 if the
initial conditions are zero.
Solution. There are three meshes in this circuit, as shown in the following ﬁgure. To write the
meshcurrent equations, recall that the voltage across a capacitor is v
C
=
1
C
t
0
i dλ +v
C
(0
+
),
where i is the resultant current (sum of mesh currents) through the capacitor, and the voltage
across a inductor v
L
= L
di
dt
where
di
dt
is the derivative of the resultant current through the
inductor. Since the initial conditions are zero, v
C
(0
+
) = 0.
v
s
(t)
C1
C2
R
2
R
1
L
1
i
1
i
2
i
3
Summing the voltage drops around mesh 1 gives
−v
s
+
1
C
1
t
0
(i
1
−i
3
)dλ + R
1
(i
1
−i
2
) = 0
Differentiating and rearranging the previous equation gives
R
1
di
1
dt
+
1
C
1
i
1
− R
1
di
2
dt
+
1
C
1
i
3
=
dv
s
dt
Summing the voltage drops around mesh 2 gives
R
1
(i
2
−i
1
) + R
2
(i
2
−i
3
) +
1
C
2
t
0
i
2
dλ = 0
Differentiating and rearranging the previous equation gives
(R
1
+ R
2
)
di
2
dt
+
1
C
2
i
2
− R
1
di
1
dt
− R
2
di
3
dt
= 0
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 95
Finally, summing the voltage drops around mesh 3 gives
L
1
di
3
dt
+ R
2
(i
3
−i
2
) +
1
C
1
t
0
(i
3
−i
1
)dλ = 0
Differentiating and rearranging the previous equation gives
L
1
d
2
i
3
dt
2
+ R
2
di
3
dt
+
1
C
1
i
3
− R
2
di
2
dt
−
1
C
1
i
1
= 0
The previous two examples involved a circuit with zero initial conditions. When circuits
involve nonzero initial conditions, our approach remains the same as before except that the
initial inductor currents are included when writing the nodevoltage and the initial capacitor
voltages are included when writing the meshcurrent equations.
Example10.3. Write the node equations for the following circuit for t ≥ 0 assuming the initial
conditions are i
L
1
(0) = 8 A and i
L
2
(0) = −4 A.
vs
10 Ω
1 H 2 H
1 F 2 F 3 F
1
L
i
2
L
i
Solution. With the reference node at the bottom of the circuit, we have three essential nodes
as shown in the redrawn circuit that follows.
vs
10 Ω
1 H 2 H
1 F 2 F 3 F
1
L
i
2
L
i
+
v1
−
+
v2
−
+
v3
−
1 2
3
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
96 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Summing the currents leaving node 1 gives
(v
1
−v
s
)
10
+ ˙ v
1
+
t
0
(v
1
−v
2
) dλ +8 = 0
where i
L
1
(0) = 8 A.
Summing the currents leaving node 2 gives
t
0
(v
2
−v
1
)dλ −8 +2 ˙ v
2
+
1
2
t
0
(v
2
−v
3
)dλ −4 = 0
where i
L
2
(0) = −4 A. Notice that the sign for the initial inductor current is negative because the
direction is from right to left and the current is deﬁned on the circuit diagram in the opposite
direction for the node 2 equation.
Summing the currents leaving node 3 gives
1
2
t
0
(v
3
−v
2
)dλ +4 +3 ˙ v
3
= 0
In this example, we have not simpliﬁed the node equations by differentiating to remove
the integral, which would have eliminated the initial inductor currents fromthe nodeequations.
If we were to write a single differential equation involving just one node voltage and the input,
a ﬁfthorder differential equation would result because there are ﬁve energy storing elements in
the circuit. To solve the differential equation, we would need ﬁve initial conditions, the initial
node voltage for the variable selected, as well as the ﬁrst through fourth derivatives at time
zero.
10.1 DISCONTINUITIES ANDINITIAL
CONDITIONS INACIRCUIT
Discontinuities in voltage and current occur when an input such as a unit step is applied or a
switch is thrown in a circuit. As we have seen, when solving an nth order differential equation
one must know n initial conditions, typically the output variable and its (n −1) derivatives at
the time the input is applied or switch thrown. As we will see, if the inputs to a circuit are known
for all time, we can solve for initial conditions directly based on energy considerations and not
depend on being provided with them in the problem statement. Almost all of our problems
involve the input applied at time zero, so our discussion here is focused on time zero, but may
be easily extended to any time an input is applied.
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 97
Energy cannot change instantaneously for elements that store energy. Thus, there are
no discontinuities allowed in current through an inductor or voltage across a capacitor at
any time—speciﬁcally, the value of the variable remains the same at t = 0
−
and t = 0
+
. In
the previous problem when we were given initial conditions for the inductors and capaci
tors, this implied, i
L
1
(0
−
) = i
L
1
(0
+
) and i
L
2
(0
−
) = i
L
2
(0
+
), and v
1
(0
−
) = v
1
(0
+
), v
2
(0
−
) =
v
2
(0
+
) and v
3
(0
−
) = v
3
(0
+
). With the exception of variables associated with current through
an inductor and voltage across a capacitor, other variables can have discontinuities, especially
at a time when a unit step is applied or when a switch is thrown; however, these variables must
obey KVL and KCL.
While it may not seem obvious at ﬁrst, a discontinuity is allowed for the derivative of the
current through an inductor and voltage across a capacitor at t = 0
−
and t = 0
+
since
di
L
(0+)
dt
=
v
L
(0+)
L
and
dv
C
(0+)
dt
=
i
C
(0+)
L
as discontinuities are allowed in v
L
(0+) and i
C
(0+). Keep in mind that the derivatives in the
previous expression are evaluated at zero after differentiation, that is
di
L
(0+)
dt
=
di
L
(t)
dt
t=0
+
and
dv
C
(0+)
dt
=
dv
C
(t)
dt
t=0
+
In calculations to determine the derivatives of variables not associated with current
through an inductor and voltage across a capacitor, the derivative of a unit step input may
be needed. Here, we assume the derivative of a unit step input is zero at t = 0
+
.
The initial conditions for variables not associated with current through an inductor and
voltage across a capacitor at times of a discontinuity are determined only from the initial
conditions from variables associated with current through an inductor and voltage across a
capacitor, and any applicable sources. The analysis is done in two steps involving KCL and
KVL or using the nodevoltage or meshcurrent methods.
1. First, we analyze the circuit at t = 0
−
. Recall that when a circuit is at steady state, an
inductor acts as a short circuit and a capacitor acts as an open circuit. Thus at steady
state at t = 0
−
, we replace all inductors by short circuits and capacitors by open circuits
in the circuit. We then solve for the appropriate currents and voltages in the circuit
to ﬁnd the currents through the inductors (actually the shorts connecting the sources
and resistors) and voltages across the capacitors (actually the open circuits among the
sources and resistors).
2. Second, we analyze the circuit at t = 0
+
. Since the inductor current cannot change in
going from t = 0
−
to t = 0
+
, we replace the inductors with current sources whose val
ues are the currents at t = 0
−
. Moreover, since the capacitor voltage cannot change in
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
98 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
going fromt = 0
−
to t = 0
+
, we replace the capacitors with voltage sources whose val
ues are the voltages at t = 0
−
. Fromthis circuit we solve for all desired initial conditions
necessary to solve the differential equation.
Example 10.4. Find v
C
(0
−
), v
L
(0
−
), i
L
(0
−
), i
R
1
(0
−
), i
R
2
(0
−
), i
R
3
(0
−
), v
C
(0
+
), v
L
(0
+
),
i
L
(0
+
), i
R
1
(0
+
), i
R
2
(0
+
), i
R
3
(0
+
), and the derivative of each passive element’s current and
voltage at t = 0
+
for the following circuit.
400 Ω 100 Ω
10 mH 500 Ω
10 V
5u(t) V
1
R
i
3
R
i
2
R
i
5 F μ
+
vC
−
+
vL
−
i
L
i
C
−
Solution. For t = 0
−
, the capacitor is replaced by an open circuit and the inductor by a short
circuit as shown in the following circuit.
400 Ω 100 Ω
+
vC(0 )
−
−
10 V
i
L
(0 )
1
R
i
2
R
i
3
R
i
iC
+
vL
−
Notice v
L
(0
−
) = 0 V because the inductor is a short circuit. Also note that the 500 resistor
is not shown in the circuit since it is shorted out by the inductor, and so i
R
3
(0
−
) = 0 A. Using
the voltage divider rule, we have
v
C
(0
−
) = 10 ×
100
400 +100
= 2 V
and by Ohm’s law
i
L
(0
−
) =
10
100 +400
= 0.02 A
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 99
It follows that i
R
1
(0
−
) = i
R
2
(0
−
) = i
L
(0
−
) = 0.02 A. Because voltage across a capacitor and
current through an inductor are not allowed to change fromt = 0
−
to t = 0
+
we have v
C
(0
+
) =
v
C
(0
−
) = 2 V and i
L
(0
−
) = i
L
(0
+
) = 0.02 A.
The circuit for t = 0
+
is drawn by replacing the inductors in the original circuit with
current sources whose values equal the inductor currents at t = 0
−
and the capacitors with
voltage sources whose values equal the capacitor voltages at t = 0
−
as shown in the following
ﬁgure with nodes C and L and reference. Note also that the input is now 10 +5u(t) = 15 V.
400 Ω 100 Ω
0.02 A 500 Ω
+
vL
−
15 V
C L
i
C
i
L
2V
2
R
i
1
R
i
+
vC
−
3 R
i
To ﬁnd v
L
(0
+
), we sum the currents leaving node L, yielding
v
L
−2
100
+0.02 +
v
L
500
= 0
which gives v
L
(0
+
) = 0 V. Now i
R
3
(0
+
) =
v
L
(0
+
)
500
= 0 A, i
R
2
(0
+
) = 0.02 +i
R
3
(0
+
) =
0.02 A, andi
R
1
(0
+
) =
15−2
400
= 0.0325 A.
To ﬁnd i
C
(0
+
), we write KCL at node C, giving
−i
R
1
(0
+
) +i
C
(0
+
) +i
R
2
(0
+
) = 0
or
i
C
(0
+
) = i
R
1
(0
+
) −i
R
2
(0
+
) = 0.0325 −0.02 = 0.125 A
To ﬁnd ˙ v
C
(0
+
), note that i
C
(0
+
) = C ˙ v
C
(0
+
) or
˙ v
C
(0
+
) =
i
C
(0
+
)
C
=
0.0125
5 ×10
−6
= 2.5 ×10
3
V/s.
Similarly,
di
L
(0
+
)
dt
=
v
L
(0
+
)
L
= 0 A/s
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
100 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Next we have i
R
1
=
15−v
C
400
, and
di
R
1
(0
+
)
dt
= −
1
400
dv
C
(0
+
)
dt
= −
2.5 ×10
3
400
= −6.25 A/s
To ﬁnd
di
R
3
dt
we start with KCL i
R
3
= i
R
2
−i
L
= i
R
1
−i
C
−i
L
, and
di
R
3
dt
=
di
R
1
dt
−
di
C
dt
−
di
L
dt
.
For the
di
c
dt
term we have
i
C
= i
R
1
−i
R
2
and
di
C
dt
=
di
R
1
dt
−
di
R
2
dt
Using Ohm’s law, the
di
R
2
dt
term is given by as
i
R
2
=
v
C
−v
L
100
and
di
R
2
dt
=
1
100
dv
C
dt
−
1
100
dv
L
dt
With v
L
= 500i
R
3
and
dv
L
dt
= 500
di
R
3
dt
, we have
di
R
2
dt
=
1
100
dv
C
dt
−
500
100
di
R
3
dt
Substituting
di
R
2
dt
into the
di
c
dt
equation gives
di
C
dt
=
di
R
1
dt
−
di
R
2
dt
=
di
R
1
dt
−
1
100
dv
C
dt
+
500
100
di
R
3
dt
Returning to the
di
R
3
dt
equation we have
di
R
3
dt
=
di
R
1
dt
−
di
C
dt
−
di
L
dt
=
di
R
1
dt
−
di
R
1
dt
+
1
100
dv
C
dt
−
500
100
di
R
3
dt
−
di
L
dt
Collecting the
di
R
3
dt
terms and canceling the
di
R
1
dt
terms, the previous equation reduces to
di
R
3
dt
=
1
6
1
100
dv
C
dt
−
di
L
dt
At t = 0
+
, we have
di
R
3
(0
+
)
dt
=
1
6
1
100
dv
C
(0
+
)
dt
−
di
L
(0
+
)
dt
=
1
6
2.5 ×10
3
100
−0
= 4.167 A/s
From before, we have for
di
R
2
dt
di
R
2
(0
+
)
dt
=
1
100
dv
C
(0
+
)
dt
−
500
100
di
R
3
(0
+
)
dt
=
2.5 ×10
3
100
−5 ×4.167 = 4.167 A/s
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 101
and for
di
c
dt
di
C
(0
+
)
dt
=
di
R
1
(0
+
)
dt
−
di
R
2
(0
+
)
dt
= −6.25 −4.1665 = −10.417 A/s
Finally, the derivatives of the voltages across the resistors are
dv
R
1
dt
= 400
di
R
1
dt
= 400 ×(−6.25) = −2500 V/s
dv
R
2
dt
= 100
di
R
2
dt
= 100 ×4.167 = 416.7 V/s
and
dv
R
3
dt
= 500
di
R
3
dt
= 500 ×4.167 = 2083.5 V/s
Example 10.5. Find v
C
for the circuit in Ex. 10.4 for t ≥ 0.
Solution. We use the node voltage method to solve this problemsince v
C
is one of the variables
used in the solution. Using the nodevoltage method also results in two equations rather than
three equations with the meshcurrent method. The initial conditions necessary to solve the
differential equation for this circuit were calculated in Ex. 10.4. Keep in mind that in Ex. 10.4,
we calculated many more initial conditions than are required in this example; here, we only need
v
C
(0
+
) and ˙ v
C
(0
+
).
For t ≥ 0, the circuit is redrawn for analysis in the following ﬁgure.
400 Ω 100 Ω
10 mH 500 Ω 5μF
+
vC
−
+
v
L
−
15 V
C L
i
C
i
L
Summing the currents leaving node C gives
v
C
−15
400
+5 ×10
−6
˙ v
C
+
v
C
−v
L
100
= 0
which simpliﬁes to
˙ v
C
+2500v
C
−2000v
L
= 7500
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
102 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Summing the currents leaving node L gives
v
L
−v
C
100
+
1
10 ×10
−3
t
0
v
L
dλ +i
L
(0
+
) +
v
L
500
= 0
which, after multiplying by 500 and differentiating, simpliﬁes to
6 ˙ v
L
+50 ×10
3
v
L
−5 ˙ v
C
= 0
Using the D operator method, our two differential equations are written as
Dv
C
+2500v
C
−2000v
L
= 7500 or (D+2500)v
C
−2000v
L
= 7500
6Dv
L
+50 ×10
3
v
L
−5Dv
C
= 0 or (6D+50 ×10
3
)v
L
−5Dv
C
= 0
We then solve for v
L
from the ﬁrst equation,
v
L
= (0.5 ×10
−3
D+1.25)v
C
−3.75
and then substitute v
L
into the second equation, giving
(6D+50 ×10
3
)v
L
−5Dv
C
= (6D+50 ×10
3
)((0.5 ×10
−3
D+1.25)v
C
−3.750) −5Dv
C
= 0
Reducing this expression yields
D
2
v
C
+10.417 ×10
3
Dv
C
+20.83 ×10
6
v
C
= 62.5 ×10
6
Returning to the time domain gives
¨ v
C
+10.417 ×10
3
˙ v
C
+20.83 ×10
6
v
C
= 62.5 ×10
6
The characteristic equation for the previous differential equation is
s
2
+10.417 ×10
3
s +20.833 ×10
6
= 0
with roots −7.718 ×10
3
and −2.7 ×10
3
and the natural solution
v
C
n
(t) = K
1
e
−7.718×10
3
t
+ K
2
e
−2.7×10
3
t
V
Next, we solve for the forced response, assuming that v
C
f
(t) = K
3
. After substituting into the
differential equation, this gives
20.833 ×10
6
K
3
= 62.5 ×10
6
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 103
or K
3
= 3. Thus, our solution is now
v
C
(t) = v
C
n
(t) +v
C
f
(t) = K
1
e
−7.718×10
3
t
+ K
2
e
−2.7×10
3
t
+3 V
We use the initial conditions to solve for K
1
and K
2
. First
v
C
(0) = 2 = K
1
+ K
2
+3
Next
˙ v
C
(t) = −7.718 ×10
3
K
1
e
−7.718×10
3
t
−2.7 ×10
3
K
2
e
−2.7×10
3
t
and at t = 0,
˙ v
C
(0) = 2.5 ×10
3
= −7.718 ×10
3
K
1
−2.7 ×10
3
K
2
Solving gives K
1
= 0.04 and K
2
= −1.04. Substituting these values into the solution gives
v
C
(t) = 0.04e
−7.718×10
3
t
−1.04e
−2.7×10
3
t
+3 V
for t ≥ 0.
Our approach remains the same for circuits with controlled sources. We analyze the circuit
for t = 0
−
and t = 0
+
to establish the initial conditions with the controlled source operational.
If the voltage or current used in the controlled source is zero, we replace it with an open circuit
if it is a current source and a short circuit if it is a voltage source. If a circuit has an independent
voltage or current source that is introduced at zero via a unit step function, for t = 0
−
we replace
the independent source by a short circuit if it is a voltage source and an open circuit if it is a
current source.
Example 10.6. Find i
L
1
for the following circuit for t ≥ 0 using the meshcurrent method.
10 Ω 10 Ω
1 H
10 V
5u(t) V
x
i
20 Ω
3ix
3 H
2 mF
1
L
i
−
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
104 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Solution. To solve this problem, we will use the meshcurrent method with currents deﬁned
in the following circuit. The steps involve:
1. Eliminate all currents except i
4
, which is i
L
1
, which gives a thirdorder differential
equation
2. Solve for the initial conditions
3. Solve the differential equation.
It should be clear that a thirdorder differential equation should describe this system, since there
are three energy storing elements.
Mesh Equations
To write the meshcurrent equations, recall that the voltage across a capacitor is
v
C
=
1
C
t
0
i dλ +v
C
(0
+
), where i is the resultant current (sum of mesh currents) through
the inductor, and the voltage across a inductor v
L
= L
di
dt
where
di
dt
is the derivative of the
resultant current through the inductor. Since there is a controlled current source in the circuit,
we form a supermesh for meshes 1 and 2. Notice that mesh current i
4
= i
L
1
.
Summing the voltages around supermesh 1 +2 yields
−15 +10(i
1
−i
4
) +10(i
2
−i
4
) +
d(i
2
−i
3
)
dt
= 0
10 Ω 10 Ω
1 H 15 V
x
i
20 Ω
3i
x
3 H
2 mF
i
2
i
4
i
1
i
3
Rearranging the previous equation gives
10i
1
+
di
2
dt
+10i
2
−
di
3
dt
−20i
4
= 15
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 105
Summing the voltage drops around mesh 3 yields
d(i
2
−i
3
)
dt
+20(i
3
−i
4
) +
1
2 ×10
−3
t
0
i
3
dλ +v
C
(0
+
) = 0
Differentiating and rearranging the previous equation reduces to
−
d
2
i
2
dt
2
+
d
2
i
3
dt
2
+20
di
3
dt
+500i
3
−20
di
4
dt
= 0
Summing the voltage drops around mesh 4 gives
3
di
4
dt
+20(i
4
−i
3
) +10(i
4
−i
2
) +10(i
4
−i
1
) = 0
and after rearranging, we ﬁnd
−10i
1
−10i
2
−20i
3
+3
di
4
dt
+40i
4
= 0
Applying KCL for the dependent current source gives
3i
x
= i
2
−i
1
Since i
x
= 3(i
1
−i
4
), we have
4i
1
−i
2
−3i
4
= 0
At this time, we have four equations and four unknowns. The dependent current source equa
tion, an algebraic equation, is used to eliminate i
1
from the three mesh equations, since i
1
=
1
4
(i
2
+3i
4
). Substituting i
1
into the supermesh 1 +2 equation and collecting like terms gives
di
2
dt
+
50
4
i
2
−
di
3
dt
−
50
4
i
4
= 15
The mesh 3 equation did not have an i
1
, but is written here for convenience.
−
d
2
i
2
dt
2
+
d
2
i
3
dt
2
+20
di
3
dt
+500i
3
−20
di
4
dt
= 0
After substituting i
1
and collecting like terms in the mesh 4 equation, we have
−
50
4
i
2
−20i
3
+3
di
4
dt
+
130
4
i
4
= 0
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
106 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
The mesh 4 equation is used to eliminate i
3
from the other two equations. Solving for i
3
and
taking its derivatives yields
i
3
=
1
20
−
50
4
i
2
+3
di
4
dt
+
130
4
i
4
di
3
dt
=
1
20
−
50
4
di
2
dt
+3
d
2
i
4
dt
2
+
130
4
di
4
dt
d
2
i
3
dt
2
=
1
20
−
50
4
d
2
i
2
dt
2
+3
d
3
i
4
dt
3
+
130
4
d
2
i
4
dt
2
Substituting the
di
3
dt
term into the supermesh 1 +2 equation and simplifying gives
13
8
di
2
dt
+
50
4
i
2
−
3
20
d
2
i
4
dt
2
−
13
8
di
4
dt
−
50
4
i
4
= 15
Substituting i
3
,
di
3
dt
and
d
2
i
3
dt
2
into the mesh 3 equation after collecting like terms gives
−
13
8
d
2
i
2
dt
2
−
50
4
di
2
dt
−312.5i
2
+
3
20
d
3
i
4
dt
3
+
37
8
d
2
i
4
dt
2
+
350
4
di
4
dt
+812.5i
4
= 0
To eliminate i
2
, we use the D operator method on our two differential equations giving
13
8
D+
50
4
i
2
+
−
3
20
D
2
−
13
8
D−
50
4
i
4
= 15
−
13
8
D
2
−
50
4
D−312.5
i
2
+
3
20
D
3
+
37
8
D
2
+
350
4
D+812.5
i
4
= 0
To solve for i
4
, we premultiply the ﬁrst equation by (−
13
8
D
2
−
50
4
D−312.5), premultiply the
second equation by (
13
8
D+
50
4
), and then subtract the ﬁrst equation from the second equation.
This yields
(4.875D
3
+112.5D
2
+1750D+6250)i
4
= −(−
13
8
D
2
−
50
4
D−312.5) ×15
Returning to the time domain gives
4.875
d
3
i
4
dt
3
+112.5
d
2
i
4
dt
2
+1750
di
4
dt
+6250i
4
= 4687.5
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 107
Note that the derivative terms on the righthand side of the D operator equation are zero since
the derivative of a constant is zero. Dividing the previous differential equation by 4.875 to put
it in a more convenient form results in
d
3
i
4
dt
3
+23.1
d
2
i
4
dt
2
+359
di
4
dt
+6250i
4
= 1282.1
Initial Conditions
The next step in the solution involves ﬁnding the initial conditions for the circuit necessary to
solve the differential equation, i
L
1
(0
+
),
di
L
1
(0
+
)
dt
and
d
2
i
L
1
(0
+
)
dt
2
. As before, this involves:
1. Analyzing the circuit at t = 0
−
with the inductors replaced as short circuits and the
capacitor as an open circuit
2. Analyzing the circuit at t = 0
+
with inductors replaced as current sources whose values
equal the inductor currents at t = 0
−
and the capacitor as a voltage source whose value
equal the capacitor voltage at t = 0
−
.
For t = 0
−
, for a nodevoltage solution the circuit is redrawn as shown in the following diagram.
10 Ω 10 Ω
10 V
20 Ω
3i
x
1
L
i
vC
−
+
2
L
i
x
i 4
x
i
+
v1
−
−
+
1
Summing the currents leaving node 1 gives
v
1
−10
10
−3
10 −v
1
10
+
v
1
10
= 0
where i
x
=
10−v
1
10
. Solving this equation yields v
1
(0
−
) = 8 V. Ohm’s law gives i
L
1
(0
−
) =
10
20
= 0.5 Aand i
x
(0
−
) =
10−v
1
(0
−
)
10
=
10−8
10
= 0.2 A. Since the capacitor is connected across the
battery, v
C
(0
−
) = 10 V. KCL gives the current through the other inductor as i
L
2
(0
−
) =
4i
x
(0
−
) +i
L
1
(0
−
) = 0.8 +0.5 = 1.3 A.
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
108 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
For t = 0
+
, for a nodevoltage solution the circuit is redrawn as shown in the following
diagram.
10 Ω 10 Ω
15 V
20 Ω
3i
x
1
0 0 5 ( ) .
L
i A
+
=
2
0
1 3 A
( )
.
L
i
+
=
x
i
+
v
1
−
1 2
+
v
2
−
0
10 V
( )
C
v
+
=
1
L
v
+ −
iC
To ﬁnd the initial conditions for the circuit at t = 0
+
, we ﬁrst solve for the nodevoltages
v
1
(0
+
) and v
2
(0
+
) and then solve for
di
L
1
(0
+
)
dt
and
d
2
i
L
1
(0
+
)
dt
2
. Summing the currents leaving node
1 yields
v
1
−15
10
−3
15 −v
1
10
+
v
1
−v
2
10
= 0
Simplifying the equation, yields
5v
1
−v
2
= 60
Summing the currents leaving node 2 yields
v
2
−v
1
10
+1.3 +
v
2
−10
20
= 0
Simplifying the equation, we have
−2v
1
+3v
2
= −16
Solving the two simultaneous node equations gives
v
1
(0
+
) = 12.6154 and v
2
0
+
) = 3.0769.
Recall that v
C
(0
+
) = v
C
(0
−
) = 10 V, i
L
1
(0
+
) = i
L
1
(0
−
) = 0.5 A, and i
L
2
(0
+
) = i
L
2
(0
−
) =
1.3 A from the analysis at t = 0
−
.
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 109
Our next tasks involve ﬁnding
di
L
1
(0
+
)
dt
and
d
2
i
L
1
(0
+
)
dt
2
using the relationships v
L
= L
1
di
L
1
dt
and i
C
= C
dv
C
dt
. Thus
di
L
1
(0
+
)
dt
=
1
3
v
L
1
(0
+
)
and using KVL to ﬁnd v
L
1
(0
+
) gives
−15 +v
L
1
(0
+
) +v
C
(0
+
) = 0
or
v
L
1
(0
+
) = 15 −v
C
(0
+
) = 15 −10 = 5 V
and
di
L
1
(0
+
)
dt
=
1
3
v
L
1
(0
+
) =
5
3
A
s
We also have
d
2
i
L
1
(0
+
)
dt
2
=
1
3
dv
L
1
(0
+
)
dt
, and from KVL before v
L
1
= 15 −v
C
and after differentiat
ing
dv
L
1
dt
= 0 −
dv
C
dt
= −
dv
C
dt
. Thus
d
2
i
L
1
(0
+
)
dt
2
=
1
3
dv
L
1
(0
+
)
dt
= −
1
3
dv
C
(0
+
)
dt
. Now
i
C
(0
+
) =
v
2
(0
+
) −10
20
+i
L
1
(0
+
) =
3.0796 −10
20
+0.5 = 0.154 A
and
dv
C
(0
+
)
dt
=
1
C
i
C
(0
+
) =
1000
2
×0.154 = 77 V/s
Therefore
d
2
i
L
1
(0
+
)
dt
2
= −
1
3
dv
C
(0
+
)
dt
= −25.6667 A
2
/s.
Solving the Differential Equation
The differential equation describing the circuit is
d
3
i
4
dt
3
+23.1
d
2
i
4
dt
2
+359
di
4
dt
+6250i
4
= 1282.1
As before, the natural solution is determined ﬁrst by ﬁnding the roots of characteristic equation,
s
3
+23.1s
2
+359s +6250
as s
1
= −20.4749, s
2,3
= −1.3125 ± j 17.4221. The roots give rise to the natural response
i
4
n
(t) = K
1
e
−20.4749t
+e
−1.3125t
(K
2
cos(17.4221t) + K
3
sin(17.4221t))
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
110 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Next we solve for the forced response to the input by assuming
i
4
f
(t) = K
4
which, when substituted into the original differential equation, yields
6250K
4
= 1281.1
giving K
4
= 0.2050. The total solution equals the natural and forced response, written as
i
4
(t) = i
4
n
(t) +i
4
f
(t)
= K
1
e
−20.4749t
+e
−1.3125t
(K
2
cos(17.4221t) + K
3
sin(17.4221t)) +0.2050
The initial conditions are used to determine the constants K
1
, K
2
and K
3
. From the solution
for i
4
(t), we have
i
4
(0) =
1
2
= K
1
+ K
2
+0.2050
To use the next initial condition, we ﬁnd the derivative of the solution, giving
di
4
dt
= −20.4749K
1
e
−20.4749t
−1.3125e
−1.3125t
(K
2
cos(17.4221t) + K
3
sin(17.4221t))
+e
−1.3125t
(−17.4221K
2
sin(17.4221t) +17.4221K
3
cos(17.4221t))
We evaluate this expression at t = 0, giving
di
4
(0)
dt
=
5
3
= −20.4749K
1
−1.3125K
2
+17.4221K
3
Finally, we take the second derivative of the solution giving
d
2
i
4
dt
2
= 419.2215K
1
e
−20.4749t
+1.7227e
−1.3125t
(K
2
cos(17.4221t) + K
3
sin(17.4221t))
−1.3125e
−1.3125t
(−17.4221K
2
sin(17.4221t) +17.4221K
3
cos(17.4221t))
−1.3125e
−1.3125t
(−17.4221K
2
sin(17.4221t) +17.4221K
3
cos(17.4221t))
+e
−1.3125t
(−303.5296K
2
cos(17.4221t) −303.5296K
3
sin(17.4221t))
We evaluate this expression at t = 0, giving
d
2
i
4
(0)
dt
2
= −25.6667 = 419.2215K
1
+1.7227K
2
−2.6250 ×17.4221K
3
−303.5296K
2
= 419.2215K
1
−301.807K
2
−45.733K
3
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 111
The three initial condition equations are put into matrix form for a straightforward solution as
AK = F or
⎡
⎢
⎢
⎣
1 1 0
−20.4749 −1.3125 17.4221
419.2215 −301.807 −45.733
⎤
⎥
⎥
⎦
⎡
⎢
⎢
⎣
K
1
K
2
K
3
⎤
⎥
⎥
⎦
=
⎡
⎢
⎢
⎢
⎣
0.295
5
3
−25.6667
⎤
⎥
⎥
⎥
⎦
Using MATLAB, we have
A = [1 1 0; −20.4749 −1.3125 17.4221; 419.2215 −301.807 −45.733];
F = [0.295; 5/3; −25.6667];
K = A\F
K =
0.1025
0.1925
0.2306
The complete solution is
i
L
1
(t) = i
4
(t) = 0.1025e
−20.4749t
+e
−1.3125t
(0.1925 cos(17.4221t)
+0.2306 sin(17.4221t)) +0.2050
for t ≥ 0.
10.2 CIRCUITS WITHSWITCHES
To ﬁnish this section, we consider circuits with multiple switches. In effect, each time a switch
is thrown, we solve the circuit using the techniques of this section. That is, at each switch time,
t
i
, we determine the necessary voltages and currents at t
−
i
and t
+
i
and solve the circuit problem,
move to the next switch time, determine the necessary voltages and currents at t
−
i +1
and t
+
i +1
and solve the circuit problem, and so on. For ease in solving the circuit after the ﬁrst switch
time at t = 0, we replace the variable t with t −t
1
where t
1
is the switch time and use the unit
step function, and repeat this substitution at each switch time. Each time interval is separately
analyzed, with the only carryover from one time interval to the next being the voltages across
the capacitor and currents through the inductors at the switch time. The next example illustrates
this approach.
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
112 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Example 10.7. Find v
C
for the following circuit for t ≥ 0.
10 Ω
0.03 F 50 Ω 2 A 40 Ω H
1
3
+
v
c
−
t = 1 s
t = 0
t = 4 s
Solution. There are two switches operating in this circuit, with switching times at t = 0, t =
1 and t = 4 s . We therefore break up the solution into three time intervals, 0 ≤ t < 1, 1 ≤ t <
4 and t ≥ 4 s, while realizing that we need to know the initial conditions just before and after
each switch time, and that we also need to solve for the steadystate solution for t < 0.
For t < 0
At steady state, the capacitor is replaced by an open circuit as shown in the following ﬁgure.
10 Ω
50 Ω 2 A 40 Ω
+
v
c
−
Using the current divider rule and Ohm’s law, we have v
C
(0
−
) = 40 V. Note that voltage cannot
instantaneously change across a capacitor, so v
C
(0
+
) = 40 V.
For 0 ≤ t < 1
During this interval, the switch on the left opens, leaving us with the following circuit to analyze.
40 Ω
+
v
c
−
0.03 F
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 113
Notice the 10 resistor is eliminated since no current ﬂows through it because it is an open
circuit. Using KCL we have
0.03 ˙ v
C
+
v
C
40
= 0
The differential equation has a root equal to −
1
1.2
and a solution in this time interval of
v
C
= v
C
(0
+
)e
−
t
1.2
u(t) = 40e
−
t
1.2
u(t) V
For 1 ≤ t < 4
When t = 1, the switch on the right closes, introducing an inductor as shown in the following
ﬁgure.
40 Ω
+
vc
−
0.03 F H
1
3
i
L
i
R
i
C
Applying KCL yields
0.03
dv
C
dt
+
v
C
40
+5
t
1
v
C
dλ +i
L
(1
+
) = 0
Dividing the previous equation by 0.03 and differentiating gives
¨ v
C
+
1
1.2
˙ v
C
+
5
0.03
v
C
= 0
with complex roots determined from MATLAB as −0.42 ±12.9 j . The solution consists of
the natural solution only, since the forced response is zero, and is given by
v
C
= e
−0.42(t−1)
(K
1
cos(12.9(t −1)) + K
2
sin(12.9(t −1))) (u(t −1) −u(t −4))
This solution requires two initial conditions. Recall that at t = 1, v
C
(1
+
) = v
C
(1
−
) and
i
L
(1
+
) = i
L
(1
−
). Moreover, all other voltages and currents and their derivatives change from
t = 1
−
to t = 1
+
s. Now using the solution for v
C
from the previous interval, we have
v
C
(1
+
) = v
C
(1
−
) = 40e
−
1
1.2
= 17.4 V
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
114 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
From our solution in this interval, we have
v
C
(1
+
) = K
1
= 17.4 V
Since no current was ﬂowing through the inductor during the interval 0 ≤ t < 1, i
L
(1
+
) =
i
L
(1
−
) = 0 A. Now i
R
(1
+
) =
v
C
(1
+
)
40
=
17.4
40
= 0.44 A, and accordingly
i
C
(1
+
) = −(i
L
(1
+
) +i
R
(1
+
)) = −(0 +0.44) = −0.44 A
˙ v
C
(1
+
) =
1
C
i
C
(1
+
) = −14.5 V
Now
˙ v
C
=
⎛
⎝
−0.42e
−0.42(t−1)
(K
1
cos(12.9(t −1)) + K
2
sin(12.9(t −1)))
+e
−0.42(t−1)
(−12.9K
1
sin(12.9(t −1)) +12.9K
2
cos(12.9(t −1)))
⎞
⎠
×(u (t −1) −u (t −4))
and
˙ v
C
(1
+
) = −14.5 = −0.42K
1
+12.9K
2
= −0.42 ×17.4 +12.9K
2
which gives K
2
= −0.557. Our complete solution is
v
C
= e
−0.42(t−1)
(17.4 cos(12.9(t −1)) −0.557 sin(12.9(t −1)))(u(t −1) −u(t −4)) V
For t > 4.
For the last interval, the switch on the left closes, giving us the following ﬁgure to analyze.
10 Ω
0.03 F 50 Ω 2 A 40 Ω
+
v
c
−
i
L
H
1
5
To ease the solution, the 2 A current source with 50 resistor is transformed into a 100 V
voltage source in series with a 50 resistor. The 50 and 10 resistors are summed together,
and the 100 V voltage source and 60 resistor are transformed into a
10
6
A current source in
parallel with a 60 resistor. The 60 and 40 resistors are combined to give a 24 resistor.
The reduced circuit is shown in the following circuit.
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 115
0.03 F 25 Ω
+
v
c
−
A
10
6
H
1
5
i
L
Applying KCL gives
−
10
6
+
v
C
24
+0.03 ˙ v
C
+5
t
1
v
C
dλ +i
L
(4
+
) = 0
Differentiating the previous equation and dividing by 0.03 yields
¨ v
C
+1.4 ˙ v
C
+166.7v
C
= 55.6
with roots determined from MatLab as −0.7 ±12.9 j . The roots are complex, which gives rise
to the natural response
v
C
= e
−0.7(t−4)
(K
1
cos(12.9(t −4)) + K
2
sin(12.9(t −4))) u(t −4)
Next, we solve for the forced response to the input by assuming y
f
(t) = K
3
. When substituted
into the differential equation describing this interval, this yields
166.7K
3
= 55.6
giving 11.1. The total solution in this interval equals the natural and forced response, written
as
v
C
= 11.1 +e
−0.7(t−4)
(K
1
cos(12.9(t −4)) + K
2
sin(12.9(t −4))) u(t −4)
Two initial conditions (v
C
(4
+
) and ˙ v
C
(4
+
)) are needed to determine the constants K
1
and K
2
.
As before, at t = 4, v
C
(4
+
) = v
C
(4
−
) and i
L
(4
+
) = i
L
(4
−
), and all other voltages and currents
andtheir derivatives change fromt = 4
−
to t = 4
+
s. Using the solutionfor v
C
fromthe previous
interval, we have
v
C
(4
+
) = v
C
(4
−
) = e
−0.42(t−1)
(17.4 cos(12.9(t −1)) −0.557 sin(12.9(t −1)))
×(u(t −1) −u(t −4))
t=4
−
= e
−0.42(4−1)
(17.4 cos (12.9 (4 −1)) −0.557 sin (12.9 (4 −1)))
= 2.5 V
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
116 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
From our solution in this interval, we have
v
C
(4
+
) = 11.1 + K
1
= 2.53 V
and K
1
= −8.6 V. The next initial condition, ˙ v
C
(4
+
) =
1
0.03
i
C
(4
+
), is determined from KCL
−
10
6
+
v
C
(4
+
)
24
+i
C
(4
+
) +i
L
(4
+
) = 0
where i
L
(4
+
) = i
L
(4
−
). To ﬁnd i
L
(4
−
) we use the solution for v
C
in the previous interval and
compute
i
L
(4
+
) = i
L
(4
−
) = 5
4
1
v
C
dt +i
L
(1
+
) = 5
4
1
v
C
dt +0
= 5
4
1
(e
−0.42(t−1)
(17.4 cos(12.9(t −1)) −0.557 sin(12.9(t −1)))) dt
= e
−0.42(t−1)
(−0.0037 cos(12.9(t −1)) +6.74 sin(12.9(t −1)))
4
1
= 1.614 A
Now i
R
(1
+
) =
v
C
(4
+
)
24
=
2.53
24
= 0.105 A, and
i
C
(4
+
) =
10
6
−
v
C
(4
+
)
24
−i
L
(4
+
) =
10
6
−
2.53
24
−1.614 = −0.05 A
˙ v
C
(4
+
) =
1
C
i
C
(4
+
) = −1.75 V
Now
˙ v
C
=
−0.7e
−0.7(t−4)
(K
1
cos(12.9(t −4)) + K
2
sin(12.9(t −4)))
+e
−0.7(t−4)
(−12.9K
1
sin(12.9 (t −4)) +12.9K
2
cos (12.9 (t −4)))
u (t −4)
and
˙ v
C
(4
+
) = −1.75 = −0.7K
1
+12.9K
2
with K
1
= −8.6, we have K
2
= −0.6. Our solution for this interval is
v
C
= 11.1 +e
−0.7(t−4)
(−8.6 cos(12.9(t −4)) −0.6 sin(12.9(t −4))) u(t −4) V
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
GENERAL APPROACHTOSOLVINGCIRCUITS 117
Summarizing, our complete solution is
v
C
=
⎧
⎪
⎨
⎪
⎩
40e
−
t
1.2
V 0 ≤ t < 1
e
−0.42(t−1)
(17.4 cos(12.9 (t −1)) −0.557 sin(12.9 (t −1))) V 1 ≤ t < 4
11.1 +e
−0.7(t−4)
(−8.6 cos(12.9(t −4)) −0.6 sin(12.9(t −4))) V t ≥ 4
P1: KDD
MOBK03610 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:9
118
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
119
C H A P T E R 1 1
Operational Ampliﬁers
In Section 3, we considered controlled voltage and current sources that are dependent on a
voltage or current elsewhere in a circuit. These devices were modeled as a two terminal device.
Here we consider the operational ampliﬁer, also known as an op amp, a multiterminal device.
An operational ampliﬁer is an electronic device that consists of large numbers of transistors,
resistors and capacitors—to fully understand its operation requires knowledge of diodes and
transistors, topics not covered in this book. However, to appreciate howan operational ampliﬁer
operates in a circuit involves a topic already covered, the controlled voltage source.
As the name implies, the operation ampliﬁer is an ampliﬁer, but when combined with
other circuit element, it integrates, differentiates, sums and subtracts. One of the ﬁrst opera
tional ampliﬁers approved as an eightlead dualinline package (DIP) is shown in Fig. 11.1.
Differing from previous circuit elements, this device has two inputs and one output terminals.
Rather than draw the operational ampliﬁer using Fig 11.1, the operational ampliﬁer is drawn
with the symbols in Fig. 11.2. The input terminals are labeled the noninverting input (+)
and the inverting input (−). The power supply terminals are labeled V+ and V−, which are
frequently omitted since they do not affect the circuit behavior except in saturation condi
tions as will be described. Most people shorten the name of the operational ampliﬁer to the
“op amp”.
Illustrated in Fig. 11.3 is a model of the op amp focusing on the internal behavior of the
input and output terminals. The input–output relationship is
v
o
= A(v
p
−v
n
) (11.1)
Since the internal resistance is very large, we will replace it with an open circuit to simplify
analysis leaving us with the op amp model show in Fig. 11.4.
With the replacement of the internal resistance with an open circuit, the currents i
n
=
i
p
= 0 A. In addition, current i
A
, the current ﬂowing out of the op amp, is not zero. Because i
A
is unknown, we seldom apply KCL at the output junction. In solving op amp problems, KCL
is applied at input terminals.
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
120 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
NC
V+
Output
Offset null
Offset null
Inverting
input
Noninverting
input
V−
Eight
terminal
operational
amplifier
FIGURE11.1: An eightterminal operational ampliﬁer. The terminal NCis not connected, and the two
terminal offset nulls are used to correct imperfections (typically not connected). V
+
and V
−
are terminal
power to provide to the circuit. Keep in mind that a ground exists for both V
+
and V
−
, a ground that is
shared by other elements in the circuit. Modern operational ampliﬁers have ten or more terminals.
V
+
Inverting
input
Noninverting
input
V
−
Output
FIGURE11.2: Circuit element symbol for the operational ampliﬁer.
R
i
p
i
n
i
A
v
n
vp
v
o
A (vp − vn)
FIGURE11.3: An internal model of the op amp. The internal resistance between the input terminals,
R, is very large exceeding 1 M. The gain of the ampliﬁer, A, is also large exceeding 10
4
. Power supply
terminals are omitted for simplicity.
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 121
i
p
i
n
i
A
v
n
v
p
v
o
= A (vp − vn)
FIGURE 11.4: Idealized model of the op amp with the internal resistance, R, replaced by an open
circuit.
Example 11.1. Find v
0
for the following circuit.
R1
R
2
i
2
V
S
i
1
v
0
v
n
v
p
− − −
Solution. Using the op amp model of Fig. 11.4, we apply KCL at the inverting terminal
giving
−i
1
−i
2
= 0
since no current ﬂows into the op amp’s input terminals. Replacing the current using Ohm’s
law gives
v
s
−v
1
R
1
+
v
o
−v
1
R
2
= 0
Multiplying by R
1
R
2
and collecting like terms, we have
R
2
v
s
= (R
1
+ R
2
) v
1
− R
1
v
o
Now v
o
= A
v
p
−v
n
and since the noninverting terminal is connected to ground, v
p
= 0 so
v
o
= −Av
n
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
122 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
or
v
n
= −
v
o
A
Substituting v
n
into the KCL inverting input equation gives,
R
s
v
s
= (R
1
+ R
2
)
−
v
o
A
− R
1
v
o
=
R
1
+ R
2
A
+ R
1
v
o
or
v
o
=
−R
2
v
s
R
1
+
R
1
+ R
2
A
As A goes to inﬁnity, the previous equation goes to
v
o
= −
R
2
R
1
v
s
Interestingly, with A going to inﬁnity, v
0
remains ﬁnite due to the resistor R
2
. This happens
because a negative feedback path exists between the output and the inverting input terminal
through R
2
. This circuit is called an inverting ampliﬁer with an overall gain of −
R
2
R
1
.
An operational ampliﬁer with a gain of inﬁnity is known as an ideal op amp. Because of
the inﬁnite gain, there must be a feedback path between the output and input and we cannot
connect a voltage source directly between the inverting and noninverting input terminals. When
analyzing an ideal op amp circuit, we simplify the analysis by letting
v
n
= v
p
Consider the previous example. With v
p
= 0 means v
n
= 0. Applying KCL at the inverting
input gives
−
v
s
R
1
+
−v
o
R
2
= 0
or
v
o
= −
R
2
R
1
v
s
Notice how simple the analysis becomes when we assume v
n
= v
p
. Keep in mind that this
approximation is valid as long as A is very large (inﬁnity) and a feedback is included.
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 123
Example 11.2. Find the overall gain for the following circuit.
R
1
R2
i
1
i
2
V
S
v
p
v
0
v
n
Solution. Assuming the op amp is ideal, we start with v
n
= v
p
. Then since the op amp’s
noninverting terminal is connected to the source, v
n
= v
p
= v
s
. Because no current ﬂows into
the op amp, by KCL we have
i
1
+i
2
= 0
and
v
s
R
1
+
v
s
−v
o
R
2
= 0
or
v
o
=
R
1
+ R
2
R
1
v
s
The overall gain is
v
o
v
s
=
R
1
+ R
2
R
1
This circuit is a noninverting op amp circuit used to amplify the source input. Ampliﬁers are
used in most all clinical instrumentation from ECK, EEG, EOG, etc.
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
124 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
The next example describes a summing op amp circuit.
Example 11.3. Find the overall gain for the following circuit.
R
a
R
2
R
b
V
a
V
b
vn
vp
v
0
−
− −
Solution. As before we start the solution with v
n
= v
p
and note that the noninverting input is
connected to ground, yielding v
n
= v
p
= 0 V. Applying KCL at the inverting input node gives
−
V
a
R
a
−
V
b
R
b
−
v
o
R
2
= 0
or
v
o
= −
R
2
R
a
V
a
+
R
2
R
b
V
b
We can add additional source resistor inputs, so that in general
v
o
= −
R
2
R
a
V
a
+
R
2
R
b
V
b
+· · · +
R
2
R
m
V
m
Our next op amp circuit provides an output proportional to the difference of two input
voltages. This op amp is often referred to as a differential ampliﬁer.
Example 11.4. Find the overall gain for the following circuit.
Solution. Assuming an ideal op amp, we note no current ﬂows into the input terminals and
that v
n
= v
p
. Apply KCL at the inverting input terminal gives
v
n
− V
a
R
1
+
v
n
−v
o
R
2
= 0
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 125
R2
R1
R1
i2
R2
ia
ib
V
b
V
a
v
p
vn
v0
and
(R
1
+ R
2
)v
n
− R
2
V
a
= R
1
v
o
The previous equation involves two unknowns, thus we need another equation easily found by
applying voltage divider at the noninverting input.
v
p
=
R
2
R
1
+ R
2
v
b
= v
n
Substituting this result for v
n
into the KCL equation at the inverting terminal gives
R
2
V
b
− R
2
V
a
= R
1
v
o
or
v
o
=
R
2
R
1
(V
b
− V
a
)
As shown, this op amp circuit, also known as the differential ampliﬁer, subtracts the weighted
input signals. This ampliﬁer is used for bipolar measurements involving ECG and EEG as the
typical recording is obtained between two bipolar input terminals. Ideally, the measurement
contains only the signal of interest uncontaminated by noise from the environment. The noise
is typically called commonmode signal. Commonmode signal comes from lighting, 60Hz
power line signals, inadequate grounding and power supply leakage. A differential ampliﬁer
with appropriate ﬁltering can reduce the impact of the commonmode signal.
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
126 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
The response of a differential ampliﬁer can be decomposed into differentialmode and
commonmode components,
v
dm
= v
b
−v
a
and
v
c m
=
(v
a
+v
b
)
2
As described, the commonmode signal is the average of the input voltages. Using the two
previous equations, one can solve v
a
and v
b
in terms of v
dm
and v
c m
as
v
a
= v
c m
−
v
dm
2
and
v
b
= v
c m
+
v
dm
2
When substituted into the response in Exercise 44 gives
v
0
=
R
1
R
2
− R
1
R
2
R
1
(R
1
+ R
2
)
v
c m
+
R
2
(R
1
+ R
2
) + R
2
(R
1
+ R
2
)
2R
1
(R
1
+ R
2
)
v
dm
= A
c m
v
c m
+ A
dm
v
dm
Notice the term multiplying, v
c m
, A
c m
, is zero, characteristic of the ideal op amp that ampliﬁes
only the differentialmode of the signal. Since real ampliﬁers are not ideal and resistors are not
truly exact, the commonmode gain is not zero. So when one designs a differential ampliﬁer,
the goal is to keep A
c m
as small as possible and A
dm
as large as possible.
The rejection of the commonmode signal is called commonmode rejection, and the mea
sure of how ideal the differential ampliﬁer is called the commonmode rejection ratio, given as
CMRR = 20 log
10
A
dm
A
c m
where the larger the value of CMRR the better. Values of CMRR for a differential ampliﬁer for
EEG, ECG, and EMG is 100–120 db.
The general approach to solving op amp circuits is to ﬁrst assume that the op amp is
ideal and v
p
= v
n
. Next, we apply KCL or KVL at the two input terminals. In more complex
circuits, we continue to apply our circuit analysis tools to solve the problem as the next example
illustrates.
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 127
Example 11.5. Find v
0
for the following circuit.
R
2
R
2
R
2
R
1
1
v
0
v
1
V
S
v
p
v
n
Solution. With v
n
= v
p
, we apply KCL at the inverting input
v
n
−v
1
R
2
+
v
n
−v
o
R
2
= 0
and
2v
n
−v
1
−v
o
= 0
Next, we apply KVL from ground to node 1 to the noninverting input and back to ground
giving
−v
1
− V
s
+v
p
= 0
and with v
n
= v
p
we have v
n
−v
1
= V
s
.
Now, we apply KCL at node 1, noting no current ﬂows into the noninverting input
terminal
v
1
R
1
+
v
1
−v
o
R
2
+
v
1
−v
n
R
2
= 0
Combining like terms in the previous equation gives
−R
1
v
n
+(2R
1
+ R
2
)v
1
− R
1
v
o
= 0
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
128 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
With three equations and three unknowns, we ﬁrst eliminate v
1
by subtracting the inverting
input KCL equation by the KVL equation giving
v
1
= v
o
−2V
s
Next, we eliminate v
n
by substituting v
1
into the inverting input KCL equation as follows
v
n
=
1
2
(v
1
+v
o
)
=
1
2
(v
o
−2V
s
+v
o
)
= v
o
− V
s
Finally, we substitute the solutions for v
1
and v
n
into the node 1 KCL equation giving
−R
1
v
n
+(2R
1
+ R
2
)v
1
− R
1
v
o
= 0
−R
1
(v
o
− V
s
) +(2R
1
+ R
2
)(v
o
−2V
s
) − R
1
v
o
= 0
After simpliﬁcation, we have
v
o
=
(3R
1
+2R
2
)
R
2
V
s
The next two examples illustrate an op amp circuit that differentiates and integrates by using a
capacitor.
Example 11.6. Find v
0
for the following circuit.
V
S
C
R
i
R
+ v
C
−
i
C
v
0
v
p
v
n
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 129
Solution. With the noninverting input connected to ground, we have v
p
= 0 = v
n
. From
KVL
v
C
= V
s
and it follows that
i
C
= C
dv
C
dt
= C
dV
s
dt
Since no current ﬂows into the op amp, i
C
= i
R
. With
i
R
=
v
n
−v
o
R
= −
v
o
R
and
i
C
= C
dV
s
dt
= i
R
= −
v
o
R
we have
v
o
= −RC
dV
s
dt
If R =
1
C
, the circuit in this example differentiates the input, v
o
= −
dV
s
dt
.
Example 11.7. Find v
0
for the following circuit.
V
S
C
i
R
+ v
C
−
i
C
v0
v
p
v
n
R
Solution. It follows that
v
n
= v
p
= 0
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
130 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
and
i
C
= i
R
=
V
s
R
Therefore
v
C
=
1
C
t
−∞
i
C
dλ =
1
C
t
−∞
V
s
R
dλ
From KVL, we have
v
C
+v
o
= 0
and
v
o
= −
1
RC
t
−∞
V
s
dλ
With R =
1
C
, the circuit operates as an integrator
v
o
= −
t
−∞
V
s
dλ
11.1 VOLTAGECHARACTERISTICS OF THEOP AMP
In the past examples involving the op amp, we have neglected to consider the supply voltage
(shown in Fig. 11.2) and that the output voltage of an ideal op amp is constrained to operate
between the supply voltages V
+
and V
−
. If analysis determines v
0
is greater than V
+
, v
0
saturates at V
+
. If analysis determines v
0
is less than V
−
, v
0
saturates at V
−
. The output
voltage characteristics are shown in Fig. 11.5.
V+
V+
V−
V−
v
0
A(vp − vn)
FIGURE11.5: Voltage characteristics of an op amp.
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 131
Example 11.8. For the circuit shown in Ex. 11.5, let V
+
= +10 V and V
−
= −10 V. Graph
the output voltage characteristics of the circuit.
Solution. The solution for Ex. 11.5 is
v
o
=
3R
1
+2R
2
R
2
V
s
which saturates whenever v
0
is less than V
−
and greater than V
+
as shown in the following
graph.
V+
V−
v0
V
S
2
3R
1
+ 2R
2
slope is
R
P1: KDD
MOBK03611 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:10
132
P1: KDD
MOBK03612 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
133
C H A P T E R 1 2
TimeVarying Signals
An alternating current (AC) or sinusoidal source of 50 or 60 Hz is common throughout the
world as a power source supplying energy for most equipment and other devices. While most
of this chapter has focused on the transient response; when dealing with sinusoidal sources,
attention is now focused on the steadystate or forced response. In bioinstrumentation, analysis
in the steady state simpliﬁes the design by focusing only on the steadystate response, which is
where the device actually operates. A sinusoidal voltage source is a timevarying signal given by
v
s
= V
m
cos(ωt +φ) (12.1)
where the voltage is deﬁned by angular frequency (ω in radians/s), phase angle (φ in radians
or degrees), and peak magnitude (V
m
). The period of the sinusoid T is related to frequency
f (Hz or cycles/s) and angular frequency by
ω = 2f =
2
T
(12.2)
An important metric of a sinusoid is its rms value (square root of the mean value of the squared
function), given by
V
r ms
=
1
T
T
0
V
2
m
cos
2
(ωt +φ)dt (12.3)
which reduces to V
r ms
=
V
m
√
2
.
To appreciate the response to a timevarying input, v
s
= V
m
cos(ωt +φ), consider the
circuit shown in Fig. 12.1 in which the switch is closed at t = 0 and there is no initial energy
stored in the inductor.
Applying KVL to the circuit gives
L
di
dt
+iR = V
m
cos(ωt +φ)
P1: KDD
MOBK03612 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
134 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
t = 0
v
s
R
L
i
FIGURE12.1: A RL circuit with sinusoidal input.
and after some work, the solution is
i = i
n
+i
f
=
−V
m
√
R
2
+ω
2
L
2
cos
φ −
ωL
R
e
−
R
L
t
+
V
m
√
R
2
+ω
2
L
2
cos
ωt +φ −
ωL
R
The ﬁrst term is the natural response that goes to zero as t goes to inﬁnity. The second term is
the forced response that has the same form as the input (i.e., a sinusoid with the same frequency
ω, but a different phase angle and maximum amplitude). If all you are interested in is the
steadystate response as in most bioinstrumentation applications, then the only unknowns are
the response amplitude and phase angle. The remainder of this section deals with techniques
involving the phasor to efﬁciently ﬁnd these unknowns.
12.1 PHASORS
The phasor is a complex number that contains amplitude and phase angle information of a
sinusoid, and for the signal in Eq. (12.1) is expressed as
V = V
m
e
j φ
= V
m
φ (12.4)
In Eq. (12.1), by practice, the angle in the exponential is written in radians, and in the
φ
notation, in degrees. Work in the phasor domain involves the use of complex algebra in moving
between the time and phasor domain, therefore, the rectangular form of the phasor is also used,
given as
V = V
m
(cos φ + j sin φ) (12.5)
P1: KDD
MOBK03612 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
TIMEVARYINGSIGNALS 135
12.2 PASSIVECIRCUITELEMENTS INTHEPHASORDOMAIN
To use phasors with passive circuit elements for steadystate solutions, the relationship between
voltage and current is needed for the resistor, inductor and capacitor. Assume that
i = I
m
cos(ωt +θ)
I = I
m
θ = I
m
e
j θ
For a resistor,
v = I R = RI
m
cos(ωt +θ)
and the phasor of v is
V = RI
m
θ = RI (12.6)
Note that there is no phase shift for the relationship between the phasor current and voltage
for a resistor.
For an inductor,
v = L
di
dt
= −ωLI
m
sin(ωt +θ) = −ωLI
m
cos(ωt +θ −90
◦
)
and the phasor of v is
V = −ωLI
m
θ −90
◦
= −ωLI
m
e
j (θ−90
◦
)
= −ωLI
m
e
j θ
e
−j 90
◦
= −ωLI
m
e
j θ
(−j )
= j ωLI
m
e
j θ
(12.7)
= j ωLI
Note that inductor current and voltage are out of phase by 90
◦
, that is current lags behind
voltage by 90
◦
.
For a capacitor, deﬁne v = V
m
cos(ωt +θ) and V = V
m
θ . Now
i = C
dv
dt
= C
d
dt
(V
m
cos(ωt +θ))
= −CV
m
ωsin(ωt +θ) = −CV
m
ωcos(ωt +θ −90
◦
)
And the phasor for i is
I = −ωCV
m
θ −90
◦
= −ωCV
m
e
j θ
e
−j 90
◦
= −ωCV
m
e
j θ
(cos(90
◦
) − j sin(90
◦
))
= j ωCV
m
e
j θ
= j ωC V
P1: KDD
MOBK03612 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
136 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
200 mH
i
100 sin 500 t mV
s
v =
0.5 μF
1000 Ω
FIGURE12.2: A circuit diagram.
or
V =
1
j ωC
I =
−j
ωC
I (12.8)
Note that capacitor current and voltage are out of phase by 90
◦
, that is voltage lags behind
current by 90
◦
.
Equations (12.6)–(12.8) all have the form of V = ZI, where Z represents the impedance
of the circuit element and is, in general, a complex number, with units of Ohms. The impedance
for the resistor is R, the inductor, j ωL, and the capacitor,
−j
ωC
. The impedance is a complex
number andnot a phasor eventhoughit may looklike one. The imaginary part of the impendence
is called reactance.
The ﬁnal part to working in the phasor domain is to transform a circuit diagram from
the time to phasor domain. For example, the circuit shown in Fig. 12.2 is transformed into
the phasor domain, shown in Fig. 12.3, by replacing each circuit element with their impedance
equivalent and sources by their phasor. For the voltage source, we have
v
s
= 100 sin 500t = 100 cos(500t −90
◦
) mV ↔500 −90
◦
mV
For the capacitor, we have
0.5μF ↔
−j
ωC
= −j 4000
I
1000 Ω
500 90 mV −
4000 j −
100 j Ω
Ω
°
FIGURE12.3: Phasor and impedance equivalent circuit for Fig. 12.2.
P1: KDD
MOBK03612 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
TIMEVARYINGSIGNALS 137
For the resistor, we have
1000 ↔1000
For the inductor, we have
200 mH ↔ j ωL = j 100
Each of the elements are replaced by their phasor and impedance equivalents as shown in
Fig. 12.3.
12.3 KIRCHHOFF’S LAWS ANDOTHERTECHNIQUES
INTHEPHASORDOMAIN
It is fortunate that all of the material presented before in this chapter involving Kirchhoff ’s
current and voltage laws, and all the other techniques apply to phasors. That is, for KVL, the
sum of phasor voltages around any closed path is zero
V
i
= 0 (12.9)
and for KCL, the sum of phasor currents leaving any node is zero
I = 0 (12.10)
Impedances in series are given by
Z = Z
1
+· · · + Z
n
(12.11)
Impedances in parallel are given by
Z =
1
1
Z
1
+· · · +
1
Z
n
(12.12)
The nodevoltage method, as well as superposition, Th´ evenin equivalent circuits is applicable
in the phasor domain. The following two examples illustrate the process, with the most difﬁcult
aspect involving complex algebra.
Example Problem12.1. For the circuit shown in Fig. 12.3, ﬁnd the steadystate response i.
Solution. The impedance for the circuit is
Z = −j 4000 +1000 + j 100 = 1000 − j 3900
Using Ohm’s law,
I =
V
Z
=
0.5 −90
◦
1000 − j 3900
=
0.5 −90
◦
4026−76
◦
= 124−14
◦
μA
P1: KDD
MOBK03612 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
138 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Returning to the time domain, the steadystate current is
i = 124 cos (500t −14
◦
) μA
Example Problem12.2. . Find the steadystate response v using the nodevoltage method for
the following circuit.
50sin10 V
s
v ω = ( ) 20 cos 10 20° A
s
i ωt = +
1
F
10
1
H
5
1 Ω
1
2
Ω
+
v
−
t
Solution. The ﬁrst step is to transform the circuit elements into their impedances, which for
the capacitor and inductor are
1
10
F ↔
−j
ωC
= −j
1
5
H ↔ j ωL = j 2
The phasors for the two sources are:
v
s
= 50 sin ωt V ↔V
s
= 50−90
◦
V
i
s
= 20 cos (ωt +20
◦
) A ↔I
s
= 20 20
◦
Since the two resistors retain their values, the phasor drawing of the circuit is shown in the
following ﬁgure with the ground at the lower node.
1 Ω
1
2
Ω
+
V
−
=50 90° V −
s
V
=20 20°
s
I
j − Ω 2 j Ω
1
P1: KDD
MOBK03612 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
TIMEVARYINGSIGNALS 139
Writing the nodevoltage equation for node 1 gives
V −50−90
◦
+
V
−j
+
V
j 2
+2V −20 20
◦
= 0
Collecting like terms, converting to rectangular form and converting to polar form gives
V
3 +
j
2
= 50−90
◦
+20 20
◦
V
3 +
j
2
= −50 j +18.8 + j 6.8 = 18.8 − j 43.2
V ×3.04 9.5
◦
= 47.1−66.5
◦
V =
47.1−66.5
◦
3.049.5
◦
= 15.5−76
◦
The steadystate solution is
v = 15.6 cos (10t −76
◦
) V
P1: KDD
MOBK03612 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
140
P1: KDD
MOBK03613 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
141
C H A P T E R 1 3
Active Analog Filters
This section presents several active analog ﬁlters involving the op amp. Passive analog ﬁlters
use passive circuit elements: resistors, capacitors and inductors. To improve performance in a
passive analog ﬁlter, the resistive load at the output of the ﬁlter is usually increased. By using the
op amp, ﬁne control of the performance is achieved without increasing the load at the output of
the ﬁlter. Filters are used to modify the measured signal by removing noise. A ﬁlter is designed
in the frequency domain so that the measured signal to be retained is passed through and noise
is rejected.
Shown in Fig. 13.1 are the frequency characteristics of four ﬁlters: lowpass, highpass,
bandpass and notch ﬁlters. The signal that is passed through the ﬁlter is indicated by the
frequency interval called the passband. The signal that is removed by the ﬁlter is indicated
by the frequency interval called the stopband. The magnitude of the ﬁlter, H( j ω), is one
in the passband and zero in the stopband. The lowpass ﬁlter allows slowly changing signals
with frequency less than ω
1
pass through the ﬁlter, and eliminates any signal or noise above
ω
1
. The highpass ﬁlter allows quickly changing signals with frequency greater than ω
2
to pass
through the ﬁlter, and eliminates any signal or noise with frequency less than ω
2
. The bandpass
ﬁlter allows signals in the frequency band greater than ω
1
and less than ω
2
to pass through the
ﬁlter, and eliminates any signal or noise outside this interval. The notch ﬁlter allows signals in
the frequency band less than ω
1
and greater than ω
2
to pass through the ﬁlter, and eliminates
any signal or noise outside this interval. The frequencies ω
1
and ω
2
are typically called cutoff
frequencies for the lowpass and highpass ﬁlters.
In reality, any real ﬁlter cannot possibly have these ideal characteristics, but instead has
a smooth transition from the passband to the stopband, as shown, for example in Fig. 13.2;
the reason for this behavior is described in a later chapter. Further, it is sometimes conve
nient to include both ampliﬁcation and ﬁltering in the same circuit, so the maximum of the
magnitude does not need to be one, but can be a value of M speciﬁed by the needs of the
application.
P1: KDD
MOBK03613 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
ω
ω
1
ω
2
ω
( jω) H
( jω) H
( jω) H
( jω) H
ω
1
ω
2
ω
ω
2
ω
1
ω
Passband
Passband
Passband
Passband Passband
Stopband
Stopband
Stopband Stopband
S
t
o
p
b
a
n
d
FIGURE 13.1: Ideal magnitude–frequency response for four ﬁlters, from top to bottom: lowpass,
highpass, bandpass and notch.
Stopband
2
M
M
Passband Stopband
(jω) H
FIGURE13.2: Arealistic magnitude–frequency response for a bandpass ﬁlter. Note that the magnitude
M does not necessarily need to be one. The passband is deﬁned as the frequency interval when the
magnitude is greater than
M
√
2
.
142
P1: KDD
MOBK03613 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
ACTIVE ANALOG FILTERS 143
To determine the ﬁlter’s performance, the ﬁlter is driven by a sinusoidal input. One varies
the input over the entire spectrum of interest (at discrete frequencies) and records the output
magnitude. The critical frequencies are when H( j ω) =
M
√
2
.
Example 13.1. Using the lowpass ﬁlter in the following circuit, design the ﬁlter to have a gain
of 5 and a cutoff frequency of 500 rad/s.
Ra
Rb
C
+
v0
−
VS
Solution. By treating the op amp as ideal, note that the noninverting input is connected to
ground, andtherefore, the inverting input is also connectedto ground. The operationof this ﬁlter
is readily apparent for at lowfrequencies, the capacitor acts like an open circuit, reducing the cir
cuit to an inverting ampliﬁer that passes lowfrequency signals. At high frequencies, the capacitor
acts like a short circuit, which connects the output terminal to the inverting input and ground.
The phasor method will be used to solve this problem by ﬁrst transforming the circuit
into the phasor domain as shown in the following ﬁgure.
Ra
Rb
+
V0
−
VS
1
j C ω
P1: KDD
MOBK03613 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
144 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Summing the currents leaving the inverting input gives
−
V
s
R
a
−
V
0
1
j ωC
−
V
0
R
b
= 0
Collecting like terms and rearranging yields
−V
0
1
1
j ωC
+
1
R
b
=
V
s
R
a
After further manipulation,
V
0
V
s
= −
1
R
a
⎛
⎝
1
1
1
j ωC
+
1
R
b
⎞
⎠
= −
1
R
a
1
j ωC +
1
R
b
V
0
V
s
= −
1
R
a
C
1
j ω +
1
R
b
C
Similar to the reasoning for the characteristic equation for a differential equation, the cutoff
frequency is deﬁned as ω
c
=
1
R
b
C
(i.e., the denominator term, j ω +
1
R
b
C
set equal to zero).
Thus, with the cutoff frequency set at ω
c
= 500 rad/s, then
1
R
b
C
= 500. The cutoff frequency
is also deﬁned as when H( j ω) =
M
√
2
, where M= 5. The magnitude of
V
0
V
s
is given by
V
0
V
s
=
1
R
a
C
ω
2
+
1
R
b
C
2
and at the cutoff frequency, ω
c
= 500 rad/s,
5
√
2
=
1
R
a
C
ω
2
c
+
1
R
b
C
2
With
1
R
b
C
= 500, the magnitude is
5
√
2
=
1
R
a
C
ω
2
c
+
1
R
b
C
2
=
1
R
a
C
√
500
2
+500
2
=
1
R
a
C
500
√
2
which gives
R
a
C =
1
2500
P1: KDD
MOBK03613 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
ACTIVE ANALOG FILTERS 145
Since we have three unknowns and two equations (R
a
C =
1
2500
and
1
R
b
C
= 500), there are an
inﬁnite number of solutions. Therefore, one canselect a convenient value for one of the elements,
say R
a
= 20 k, and the other two elements are determined as
C =
1
2500 × R
a
=
1
2500 ×20000
= 20 nF
and
R
b
=
1
500 ×C
=
1
500 ×20 ×10
−9
= 100 k
A plot of the magnitude versus frequency is shown in the following ﬁgure. As can be seen, the
cutoff frequency gives a value of magnitude equal to 3.53 at 100 Hz, which is the design goal.
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Frequency (rad/s)
M
a
g
n
i
t
u
d
e
Example 13.2. Using the highpass ﬁlter in the following circuit, design the ﬁlter to have a
gain of 5 and a cutoff frequency of 100 rad/s.
Ra
Rb
C
+
v0
−
V
S
P1: KDD
MOBK03613 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
146 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Solution. Since the op amp is assumed ideal, and the noninverting input is connected to
ground, therefore the inverting input is also connected to ground. The operation of this ﬁlter
is readily apparent for at low frequencies, the capacitor acts like an open circuit and so no input
voltage is seen at the noninverting input. Since there is no input, then the output is zero. At
high frequencies, the capacitor acts like a short circuit, which reduces the circuit to an inverting
ampliﬁer that passes through high frequency signals.
As before, the phasor method will be used to solve this problem by ﬁrst transforming the
circuit into the phasor domain as shown in the following ﬁgure.
R
a
R
b
+
V
0
−
V
S
1
jωC
Summing the currents leaving the inverting input gives
−
V
s
R
a
+
1
j ωC
−
V
0
R
b
= 0
Rearranging yields
V
0
V
s
= −
R
b
R
a
+
1
j ωC
= −
R
b
R
a
j ω
j ω +
1
R
a
C
At cutoff frequency ω
c
= 100 rad/s =
1
R
a
C
. The magnitude of
V
0
V
s
is given by
V
0
V
s
=
R
b
R
a
ω
ω
2
+
1
R
a
C
2
and at the cutoff frequency,
5
√
2
=
R
b
R
a
ω
c
ω
2
c
+
1
R
a
C
2
P1: KDD
MOBK03613 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
ACTIVE ANALOG FILTERS 147
With
1
R
a
C
= 100 and ω
c
= 100 rad/s, gives
5
√
2
=
R
b
R
a
ω
c
ω
2
c
+
1
R
a
C
2
=
R
b
R
a
1
R
a
C
√
100
2
+100
2
=
R
b
R
a
100
100
=
R
b
√
2R
a
Thus
R
b
R
a
= 5. Since we have three unknowns and two equations, one can select a convenient
value for one of the elements, say R
b
= 20 k, and the other two elements are determined as
R
a
=
R
b
5
=
20000
5
= 4 k
and
C =
1
100R
a
=
1
100 ×4000
= 2.5 μF
A plot of the magnitude versus frequency is shown in the following ﬁgure. As can be seen, the
cutoff frequency gives a value of magnitude equal to 3.53 at 500 Hz, which is the design goal.
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Frequency (rad/s)
M
a
g
n
i
t
u
d
e
The next example demonstrates the technique to create a bandpass ﬁlters (which require
two cutoff frequencies).
Example 13.3. Using the bandpass ﬁlter in the following circuit, design the ﬁlter to have a
gain of 5 and pass through frequencies from 100 to 500 rad/s.
P1: KDD
MOBK03613 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
148 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
CH
+
v0
−
CL
+
vL
−
VS
L
a
R
L
b
R
H
b
R
H
a
R
Solution. As usual, the design of the ﬁlter is done in the phasor domain, and makes use of
work done in the previous two examples. Note the elements around the op amp on the left are
the lowpass ﬁlter circuit elements, and those on the right, the highpass ﬁlter. In fact, when
working with op amps, ﬁlters can be cascaded together to form other ﬁlters; thus a lowpass
and highpass ﬁlter cascaded together form a bandpass. The phasor domain circuit is given in
the next ﬁgure.
+
V0
−
+
VL
−
VS
L
a
R
L
b
R
H
b
R
H
a
R
1
L
j C ω
1
H
j C ω
As before, the noninverting input to the op amps are connected to ground, which means
that the inverting input is also connected to ground. Summing the currents leaving the inverting
input for each op amp gives
−
V
s
R
a
L
−
V
L
1
j ωC
L
−
V
L
R
b
L
= 0
−
V
L
R
a
H
+
1
j ωC
H
−
V
0
R
b
H
= 0
P1: KDD
MOBK03613 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
ACTIVE ANALOG FILTERS 149
Solving the ﬁrst equation for V
L
gives
V
L
= −
1
R
a
L
C
L
1
j ω +
1
R
b
L
C
L
V
s
Solving the second equation for V
0
gives
V
0
= −
R
b
H
R
a
H
j ω
j ω +
1
R
a
H
C
H
V
L
Substituting V
L
into the previous equation yields
V
0
=
R
b
H
R
a
H
j ω
j ω +
1
R
a
H
C
H
×
1
R
a
L
C
L
1
j ω +
1
R
b
L
C
L
V
s
The form of the solution is simply the product of each ﬁlter. The magnitude of the ﬁlter is
V
0
V
s
=
R
b
H
R
a
H
ω
ω
2
+
1
R
a
H
C
H
2
1
R
a
L
C
L
ω
2
+
1
R
b
L
C
L
2
Since there are two cutoff frequencies, two equations evolve,
ω
c
H
=
1
R
a
H
C
H
= 100 rad/s
and
ω
c
L
=
1
R
b
L
C
L
= 500 rad/s
At the either cutoff frequency, the magnitude is
5
√
2
, such that at ω
c
H
= 100 rad/s
5
√
2
=
R
b
H
R
a
H
ω
c
H
ω
2
c
H
+
1
R
a
H
C
H
2
1
R
a
L
C
L
ω
2
C
H
+
1
R
b
L
C
L
2
=
R
b
H
R
a
H
100
√
100
2
+100
2
1
R
a
L
C
L
√
100
2
+500
2
P1: KDD
MOBK03613 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
150 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Therefore,
500
√
26 =
R
b
H
R
a
H
R
a
L
C
L
The other cutoff frequency gives the same result as the previous equation. There are now
three equations (
1
R
a
H
C
H
= 100,
1
R
b
L
C
L
= 500 and 500
√
26 =
R
b
H
R
a
H
R
a
L
C
L
), and six unknowns.
For convenience, set R
b
L
= 100 k and R
a
H
= 100 k, which gives C
L
=
1
500R
b
L
= 20nF and
C
H
=
1
100R
a
H
= 0.1 μF. Now from 500
√
26 =
R
b
H
R
a
H
1
R
a
L
C
L
,
R
b
H
R
a
L
= 500
√
26C
L
R
a
H
= 5.099
Once again, one can specify one of the resistors, say R
a
L
= 10 k, giving R
b
H
= 50.099 k.
Aplot of the magnitude versus frequency is shown in the following ﬁgure. As can be seen,
the cutoff frequency gives a value of magnitude equal to 3.53 at 500 Hz, which is the design
goal.
3.5
4
4.5
3
1
1.5
0.5
0
2.5
2
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Frequency (rad/s)
M
a
g
n
i
t
u
d
e
None of the ﬁlters in Examples 13.1–13.3 have the ideal characteristics of Fig. 13.1. To improve
the performance from the passband to stopband in a lowpass ﬁlter with a sharper transition,
one can cascade identical ﬁlters together, i.e., connect the output of the ﬁrst ﬁlter to the input of
the next ﬁlter and so on. The more cascaded ﬁlters, the better the performance. The magnitude
of the overall ﬁlter is the product of the individual ﬁlter magnitudes.
P1: KDD
MOBK03613 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
ACTIVE ANALOG FILTERS 151
v
0
V
S
R2
C
2
R1
C1
V
S
R2
R
1
C
2
C
1
v
0
C
3
R3
FIGURE 13.3: (Top) Secondorder Butterworth lowpass ﬁlter. (Bottom) Thirdorder Butterworth
lowpass ﬁlter.
While this approach is appealing for improving the performance of the ﬁlter, the overall
magnitude of the ﬁlter does not remain a constant in the passband. Better ﬁlters are available
with superior performance such as a Butterworth ﬁlter. Two Butterworth ﬁlters are shown in
Fig. 13.3. Analysis of these ﬁlters is carried out in Exercises 183 and 184.
P1: KDD
MOBK03613 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:11
152
P1: KDD
MOBK03614 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
153
C H A P T E R 1 4
Bioinstrumentation Design
Figure 14.1 described the various elements needed in a biomedical instrumentation system. The
purpose of this type of instrument is to monitor the output of a sensor or sensors and to extract
information from the signals that are produced by the sensors.
Acquiring a discretetime signal and storing this signal in computer memory from a
continuoustime signal is accomplished with an analogtodigital (A/D) converter. The A/D
converter uniformly samples the continuoustime waveform and transforms it into a sequence
of numbers, one every t
k
seconds. The A/D converter also transforms the continuoustime wave
forminto a digital signal (i.e., the amplitude takes one of 2
n
discrete values) which are converted
into computer words and stored in computer memory. To adequately capture the continuous
time signal, the sampling instants t
k
must be selected carefully so that information is not lost.
The minimum sampling rate is twice the highest frequency content of the signal (based on the
sampling theorem from communication theory). Realistically, we often sample at ﬁve to ten
times the highest frequency content of the signal so as to achieve better accuracy by reducing
aliasing error.
14.1 NOISE
Measurement signals are always corrupted by noise in a biomedical instrumentation system.
Interference noise occurs when unwanted signals are introduced into the system by outside
sources, e.g. power lines and transmitted radio and television electromagnetic waves. This
kind of noise is effectively reduced by careful attention to the circuit’s wiring conﬁguration to
minimize coupling effects.
Interference noise is introduced by power lines (50 or 60 Hz), ﬂuorescent lights, AM/FM
radio broadcasts, computer clock oscillators, laboratory equipment, cellular phones, etc. Elec
tromagnetic energy radiating from noise sources is injected into the ampliﬁer circuit or into
the patient by capacitive and/or inductive coupling. Even the action potentials from nerve
conduction in the patient generate noise at the sensor/ampliﬁer interface. Filters are used to
reduce the noise and to maximize the signaltonoise (S/N) ratio at the input of the A/D
converter.
P1: KDD
MOBK03614 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
154 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Sensor Calibration
A/D
Analog
processing
Signal
processing
Data
storage
Control &
feedback
Output
display
Data
transmission
FIGURE 14.1: Basic instrumentation systems using sensors to measure a signal with data acquisition,
storage and display capabilities, along with control and feedback.
Low frequency noise (ampliﬁer DC offsets, sensor drift, temperature ﬂuctuations, etc.)
is eliminated by a highpass ﬁlter with the cutoff frequency set above the noise frequencies
and below the biological signal frequencies. High frequency noise (nerve conduction, radio
broadcasts, computers, cellular phones, etc.) is reduced by a lowpass ﬁlter with the cutoff set
below the noise frequencies and above the frequencies of the biological signal that is being
monitored. Powerline noise is a very difﬁcult problem in biological monitoring since the
50 or 60 Hz frequency is usually within the frequency range of the biological signal that is
being measured. Bandstop ﬁlters are commonly used to reduce powerline noise. The notch
frequency in these bandstop ﬁlters is set to the powerline frequency of 50 or 60 Hz with the
cutoff frequencies located a few Hertz to either side.
The second type of corrupting signal is called inherent noise. Inherent noise arises from
random processes that are fundamental to the operation of the circuit’s elements and, hence, is
reduced by good circuit design practice. While inherent noise can be reduced, it can never be
eliminated. Lowpass ﬁlters can be used to reduce high frequency components. However, noise
signals within the frequency range of the biosignal being ampliﬁed cannot be eliminated by this
ﬁltering approach.
14.2 COMPUTERS
Computers consist of three basic units: the central processing unit (CPU), the arithmetic and
logic unit (ALU), and memory. The CPU directs the functioning of all other units and controls
P1: KDD
MOBK03614 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
BIOINSTRUMENTATION DESIGN 155
the ﬂow of information among the units during processing procedures. It is controlled by
program instructions. The ALU performs all arithmetic calculations (add, subtract, multiply,
and divide) as well as logical operations (AND, OR, NOT) that compare one set of information
to another.
Computer memory consists of read only memory (ROM) and random access memory
(RAM). ROM is permanently programmed into the integrated circuit that forms the basis of
the CPU and cannot be changed by the user. RAM stores information temporarily and can be
changed by the user. RAM is where usergenerated programs, input data, and processed data
are stored.
Computers are binary devices that use the presence of an electrical signal to represent 1
and the absence of an electrical pulse to represent 0. The signals are combined in groups of
8 bits , a byte, to code information. A word is made up of 2 bytes. Most desktop computers
that are available today are 32bit systems, which means that they can address 4.29 × 109
locations in memory. The ﬁrst microcomputers were 8bit devices that could interact with only
256 memory locations.
Programming languages relate instructions and data to a ﬁxed array of binary bits so that
the speciﬁc arrangement has only one meaning. Letters of the alphabet and other symbols, e.g.
punctuation marks, are represented by special codes. ASCII stands for the American Standard
Code for Information Exchange. ASCII provides a common standard that allows different
types of computers to exchange information. When word processing ﬁles are saved as text ﬁles,
they are saved in ASCII format. Ordinarily, word processing ﬁles are saved in special program
speciﬁc binary formats, but almost all data analysis programs can import and export data in
ASCII ﬁles.
The lowest level of computer languages is machine language and consists of the 0s and
1s that the computer interprets. Machine language represents the natural language of a partic
ular computer. At the next level, assembly languages use Englishlike abbreviations for binary
equivalents. Programs written in assembly language can manipulate memory locations directly.
These programs run very quickly and are often used in data acquisition systems that must rapidly
acquire a large number of samples, perhaps froman array of sensors, at a very high sampling rate.
Higher level languages, e.g. FORTRAN, PERL, and C++, contain statements that
accomplish tasks that require many machine or assembly language statements. Instructions in
these languages often resemble English and contain commonly used mathematical notations.
Higher level languages are easier to learn than machine and assembly languages. Program
instructions are designed to tell computers when and how to use various hardware components
to solve speciﬁc problems. These instructions must be delivered to the CPU of a computer in
the correct sequence in order to give the desired result.
When computers are used to acquire physiological data, programming instructions tell
the computer when data acquisition should begin, howoften samples should be taken fromhow
P1: KDD
MOBK03614 MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
156 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
many sensors, how long data acquisition should continue, and where the digitized data should
be stored. The rate at which a system can acquire samples is dependent upon the speed of the
computer’s clock, e.g. 233 MHz, and the number of computer instructions that must completed
in order to take a sample. Some computers can also control the gain on the input ampliﬁers
so that signals can be adjusted during data acquisition. In other systems, the gain of the input
ampliﬁers must be manually adjusted.
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
157
Exercises
1. Suppose the current ﬂowing through the circuit element in Fig. 3.5 is
i (t) =
0 t < 0
5e
−2t
A t ≥ 0
Find q(t).
2. The charge entering the upper terminal in the circuit element in Fig. 3.5 is
3 sin(2000t) μC. (a) How much charge enters the terminal from t = 0 to t = 0.5 ms?
(b) Find i (t).
3. Let i (t) shown in the following diagram ﬂow through the circuit element in Fig. 3.5.
With i (t) = 0 for t < 0, ﬁnd the total charge at: (a) 1 s, (b) 2 s, (c) 3 s and (d) 4 s.
i(t)
(A)
2
1
−1
1 2 3 4
t
(s)
4. Let the charge entering the upper terminal in the circuit element in Fig. 3.5 be q(t) =
e
−1000t
sin(2000πt) C for t ≥ 0. Determine the current for t ≥ 0.
5. Find the power absorbed for the circuit element in Fig. 3.5 if (a) v = 10 V
and i = −2 A, (b) v = −10 V and i = −2 A, (c) v = −5 V and i = 2 A, (d) v = 10 V
and i = 3 A.
6. Findthe power absorbedfor the circuit element inFig. 3.5if (a) v = 5 V and i = −2 A,
(b) v = 5 V and i = 12 A, (c) v = −5 V and i = −5 A, (d) v = −5 V and i = 2 A.
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
158 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
7. Find the power absorbed for the circuit element in Fig. 3.5 if
a.
t
2 0
t
2 0
i
(A)
v
(V)
1
2
1
1 1
(s) (s)
b.
v
(V)
i
(A)
2
1
1 2 3
t
1
1 2 3
t
0 0
(s) (s)
c.
v
(V)
1
1 2 3
t
i
(A)
2
1
1 2
t
0 0
(s)
(s)
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 159
d.
i
(A)
t
v
(V)
2 0
t
2 0
(s)
(s)
1 1
e.
t
2
1
1 2
i
(A)
0
v
(V)
1
1 2
t
0
(s) (s)
8. Find the total energy delivered to the circuit element in Fig. 3.5 if
v = 3e
−1000t
u(t) V
i = 5e
−1000t
u(t) A
9. The voltage and current at the terminals in Fig. 3.5 are
v = e
−500t
u(t) V
i = 2te
−500t
u(t) A
(a) Find the time when the power is at its maximum.
(b) Find the energy delivered to the circuit element at t = 0.004 s.
(c) Find the total energy delivered to the circuit element.
10. The voltage and current at the terminals in Fig. 3.5 are
v = te
−10,000t
u(t) V
i = (t +10)e
−10,000t
u(t) A
(a) Find the time when the power is at its maximum.
(b) Find the maximum power.
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
160 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
(c) Find the energy delivered to the circuit at t = 1 ×10
−4
s.
(d) Find the total energy delivered to the circuit element.
11. The voltage at the terminals in Fig. 3.5 is
v =
⎧
⎪
⎪
⎪
⎨
⎪
⎪
⎪
⎩
0V
t V
2 −t V
0 V
t < 0
0 ≤ t ≤ 1
1 < t ≤ 2
t > 2
If
p =
⎧
⎪
⎪
⎪
⎨
⎪
⎪
⎪
⎩
0 W t < 0
t
2
W 0 ≤ t ≤ 1
t
2
−4t +4 W 1 < t ≤ 2
0 W t > 2
how much charge enters the terminal between t = 0 and t = 2 s?
12. For the following circuit, ﬁnd: (a) I
1
, V
2
and V
3
, (b) the power absorbed and delivered.
3V
4 V
2 A
V2
2V
2V
+
−
+ V3 −
I1
3 A
13. For the following circuit ﬁnd (a) V
1
, (b) I
2
, (c) the power absorbed and delivered.
2V1 5A 2V
4V 4V
+
V1
−
I2
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 161
14. For the following circuit ﬁnd (a) V
1
, (b) the power absorbed and delivered.
3 V
3A
2A
2 V1
2 V
+ V1 −
I1 5 V
+
−
6 V
15. For the following circuit, ﬁnd the power in each circuit element.
2 A 4 A
3 A
5 V 3 V
4 V
10 V
16. For the following circuit, ﬁnd (a) I
1
and I
2
, (b) power dissipated in each resistor, (c)
show that the power dissipated equals the power generated.
2 Ω 2 Ω
6 Ω 2 Ω
2 Ω 2 Ω
I2
I1
14 V
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
162 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
17. (a) Find the power dissipated in each resistor. (b) Showthat the power dissipated equals
the power generated.
5 V
2 V
5 V
1 Ω
4 Ω
3 Ω
18. Find V
R
in the following circuit.
10 V
2 VR
2 Ω
5 Ω
3 Ω
3 V
+
VR
−
19. Find I in the following circuit.
12 V
8 V
4 Ω
5 Ω
2 Ω
3I
I
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 163
20. Find I
R
in the following circuit.
4 A 2 A 3 IR 2 Ω 1 Ω
IR
21. Find I
2
in the following circuit.
3 A 3 I1
I1
I2
1
3
Ω
1
8
Ω
1
4
Ω
22. Find i
b
for the following circuit.
5 A 2Va
ib
3 Ω 6 Ω 8 Ω 2 Ω
+
Va
−
23. Find the equivalent resistance R
ab
for the following circuit.
4 Ω
4 Ω
2 Ω
3 Ω 4 Ω
a
b
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
164 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
24. Find the equivalent resistance R
ab
for the following circuit.
a
b
7 Ω
4 Ω 2 Ω
8 Ω
4 Ω
3 Ω
3 Ω
1 Ω
2 Ω
3 Ω
25. Find the equivalent resistance R
ab
for the following circuit.
8 Ω
8 Ω
a
b
2 Ω
6 Ω 4 Ω
6 Ω
3 Ω
2 Ω
26. Find the equivalent resistance R
ab
for the following circuit.
9 Ω
a b
2 Ω 4 Ω
4 Ω 2 Ω
6 Ω
6 Ω
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 165
27. Find the equivalent resistance R
ab
for the following circuit.
1 Ω
3 Ω 6 Ω
4 Ω
12 Ω
12 Ω
5 Ω
4 Ω 1 Ω
a
b
28. Find the equivalent resistance R
ab
for the following circuit.
17 Ω
20 Ω
7 Ω
8 Ω
15 Ω
5 Ω
20 Ω
10 Ω
b a
29. Find I
1
for the following circuit.
2 Ω
3 Ω
4 Ω
2 Ω 5 A
I1
30. Find I
1
and V
1
for the following circuit.
2 Ω
16 Ω 80 Ω
5 Ω
3 Ω
12 Ω
20 A
+
V1
−
I1
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
166 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
31. Find I
1
and V
1
for the following circuit.
5 Ω
15 Ω
20 Ω
60 Ω
10 A
I
1
+ V1 −
32. Find I
1
, V
1
and V
2
for the following circuit.
18 V
3 Ω
6 Ω 9 Ω
6 Ω
4.5 Ω 9 Ω
+
V1
−
+
V2
−
I1
33. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v
1
and v
2
.
5 Ω 2 Ω
3 Ω 3 Ω 35 V 50 V
10 Ω
+
v2
−
+
v1
−
34. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v
1
and v
2
.
2 A 5 A 16 Ω 10 Ω
2Ω
+
v2
−
+
v1
−
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 167
35. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v
1
and v
2
.
15 V 5 A
2 Ω 3 Ω
4 Ω 5 Ω
1 Ω
+
v1
−
− v2 +
36. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v
1
and v
2
.
2 A 2 i1 16 Ω 10 Ω
2 Ω
+
v2
−
+
v1
−
i1
37. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v
1
and v
2
.
3 Ω
2 Ω 5 Ω 1 Ω 3 A
2 A
2Va
+
v1
−
+
v2
−
+ Va −
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
168 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
38. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v
1
and v
2
.
+
v1
−
+
v2
−
+ Vb −
3 Ω 2 Ω
10 Ω
10 V
2 Vb
2 A
5 Ω
3 Ω
6 Ω 5 Ω 3ia
ia
39. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v
1
and v
2
.
10 Ω 4 A
4 V
6 Ω 3 Ω
8 Ω
8 Ω
5 Ω
4 Ω
5 V
+
v2
−
+
v1
−
40. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v
1
and v
2
.
5 V
2 Ω
4 Ω
5 Ω
3 Ω
10 V
+
v2
−
+
v1
−
3v1 4 V
2 Ω
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 169
41. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v
1
and v
2
.
3 Ω 5 Ω
3ia
5 A 2 Ω 2 A 20 Ω
40 Ω
10 V
+
v1
−
+
v2
−
ia
42. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v
1
and v
2
.
3 V
3 Ω
+
v1
−
+
v2
−
6 Ω
2v1
5 Ω
5 Ω
4 Ω
4ia
5 Ω
8 Ω 2 A
ia
43. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v
1
and v
2
.
15 V 5 A
3ia
3 Ω
5 Ω
2 Ω 5 Ω
2 Ω 1 Ω
+
v1
−
+
v2
−
ia
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
170 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
44. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i
1
and i
2
.
10 Ω
15 Ω
10 Ω 5 Ω
5 V 2 V
20 Ω
i 2 i1
45. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i
1
and i
2
.
5 Ω 4 Ω
20 Ω 10 Ω
3 Ω
10 V
i2
i1
46. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i
1
and i
2
.
5 V 3i2
10 Ω 5 Ω
2 Ω
3 Ω 5 Ω
i1 i2
47. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i
1
and i
2
.
2 Ω
2 V
5 Ω 3 Ω 6 Ω
4 Ω 20 Ω
3 V 2 i2 5 V
i1
i2
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 171
48. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i
1
and i
2
.
5 Ω
3 Ω 5 Ω
2 Ω
3i1
20 V
10 Ω
10 V
4 Ω 15 Ω
i2 i1
49. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i
1
and i
2
.
10Ω
4 Ω
20 V
10 V 2va
10 Ω
6 Ω
2 Ω 5 Ω 3 Ω
4 Ω
+
va
−
i1
i2
50. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i
1
and i
2
.
2 V
3 A
4 V
8 Ω 4 Ω
3 Ω
2 Ω 5 Ω
i1
i2
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
172 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
51. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i
1
and i
2
.
+ va −
5 Ω 3 Ω
5 V 5 A
3 Ω
3va
3 Ω 2 Ω
2 Ω
i1 i2
52. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i
1
and i
2
.
6 V
2 A
10 V
4 Ω
2 Ω
3 Ω 2 Ω
3 Ω 4 Ω
5 Ω 3i1 6 Ω
5 Ω
i1
i2
53. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i
1
and i
2
.
2i1
2 A
5 V
5 Ω 6 Ω
10 Ω
3 Ω 4 Ω
5 Ω 1 Ω
4 Ω
2 V
2 Ω
2va
+
va
−
i2
i1
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 173
54. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i
1
and i
2
.
2 Ω 3 Ω 5 Ω
5 Ω
3 Ω
6 Ω
5 Ω
2 Ω
6 Ω 4 Ω
8 Ω
2 V
3 va
5 V
5 V
10 V 3 A
−
va
+
i1 i2
55. Use a series of source transformations and resistor combinations to ﬁnd v
o
.
+
vo
−
2 A 5 Ω 4 A
3 Ω
3 Ω 5 Ω
6 Ω
2 V
56. Use a series of source transformations and resistor combinations to ﬁnd v
o
.
15 Ω
5 Ω
10 Ω 10 Ω 5 A 2 Ω
2 Ω 4 Ω
4 Ω
10 V
+
vo
−
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
174 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
57. Use a series of source transformations and resistor combinations to ﬁnd v
o
.
+
vo
−
5 Ω
3 A
10 Ω
3 Ω
2 V
10 Ω 2 Ω 2 A 6 Ω
4 Ω 2 Ω
5 V
58. Use the superposition method to ﬁnd v
o
.
5 V
4 Ω 3 Ω
2 Ω 2 Ω
+
v0
−
10 V
59. Use the superposition method to ﬁnd v
o
.
3 Ω
3 Ω 4 V
0.5 Ω
2 V
3 Ω 10 A 2 Ω
+
vo
−
60. Use the superposition method to ﬁnd v
o
.
3 A 2 Ω
3 Ω
5 Ω
4 V
0.5 Ω
2ia 3 V
2 Ω
4 Ω
+
vo
−
ia
3 Ω
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 175
61. Use the superposition method to ﬁnd v
o
.
5 V
2 Ω
5 Ω 3 Ω
3 Ω
5 A
2 Ω
3va
+va −
+
vo
−
62. Find the Th´ evenin equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
5 A
a
b
5 Ω 2 Ω
3 Ω
63. Find the Th´ evenin equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
5 Ω 2 Ω 10 Ω
3 Ω 35 V
a
b
50 V
64. Find the Th´ evenin equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
2 Ω 3 Ω
4 Ω 15 V
a b
5 A
1 Ω
5 Ω
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
176 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
65. Find the Th´ evenin equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
2 A 16 Ω
2 Ω
10 Ω 2i1
a
b
i1
66. Find the Th´ evenin equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
a
b
3 A 2 Ω
5 A
3 Ω
5 Ω 2va
+va −
67. Find the Th´ evenin equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
a
b
3ia
3 Ω 5 Ω 40 Ω
10 V 2 A 2 Ω 5 A
ia
68. Find the Norton equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
5 V 8 Ω 10 Ω
a
b
8 Ω 6 Ω
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 177
69. Find the Norton equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
8 Ω 2 Ω
2 Ω
a
b
3 Ω 5 A 5 A
70. Find the Norton equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
a b
3 Ω 8 Ω
6 Ω
2 Ω 4 Ω
2 V 2 A
71. Find the Norton equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
5 V
3ia
3 Ω
a
b
2 Ω 2 Ω
6 Ω
ia
72. Find the Norton equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
2 V
5 Ω
5ia
3 Ω
a
b
3 Ω
5 Ω
6 Ω 4 Ω
8 Ω
2va
+ va −
ia
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
178 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
73. Find the Norton equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
10 V 6 Ω
a
b
3 Ω 5 Ω
3 V
2 Ω
5i1
i
1
74. A current pulse given by i (t) = (2 +10e
−2t
)u(t) is applied through a 10 mH inductor.
(a) Find the voltage across the inductor. (b) Sketch the current and voltage. (c) Find
the power as a function of time.
75. A current pulse given by i (t) = (5 +3 sin(2t))u(t) is applied through a 2 mH inductor.
Determine the voltage across the inductor.
76. The current pulse shown in the following ﬁgure is applied through a 5 mH inductor.
Find the voltage, power and energy.
i(t)
(A)
1
1 2 3
t
0
−1
4
(s)
77. The voltage across an L = 2.5 mH inductor is v(t) = 10 cos(1000t) mV, with i (0) =
1 mA. (a) Find i (t) for t ≥ 0. (b) Find the power and energy.
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 179
78. The voltage across an inductor is given by the following ﬁgure. If L = 30 mH and
i (0) = 0 A, ﬁnd i (t) for t ≥ 0.
v
(mv)
4
1 2 3
t
0
(s)
79. The voltage across an inductor is given by the following ﬁgure. If L = 50 mH and
i (0) = 0 A, ﬁnd i (t) for t ≥ 0.
v
(mv)
1
t
(s)
1 2 0
80. The voltage across a 4 μF capacitor is v(t) = (200,000t −50,000)e
−2000t
u(t) V. Find
(a) current through the capacitor, (b) power as a function of time, (c) energy.
81. The voltage across a 0.5 μF capacitor is v(t) = (3 +5e
−2t
)u(t) V. Find the current and
power.
82. The voltage across a 1 μFcapacitor is v(t) = (5t +3 sin(2t))e
−3t
u(t) V. Findthe current
and power.
83. The current through a 5 μF capacitor is
i (t) =
⎧
⎪
⎪
⎪
⎨
⎪
⎪
⎪
⎩
0 mA t < 0 ms
5t
2
mA 0 ≤ t < 1 ms
5
2 −t
2
mA 1 <t ≤
√
2 ms
0 mA t >
√
2 ms
Find the voltage across the capacitor.
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
180 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
84. The current through a 10 μF capacitor is given by the following ﬁgure. If v(1) = 0 V,
ﬁnd v(t) for t > 1 s.
i
(mA)
1
1 2 0
t
(ms)
3
85. The current through a 100 μF capacitor is given by the following ﬁgure. If v(0) is 0 V,
ﬁnd v(t) for t ≥ 0 s.
2
t
(ms)
1 2 0
i(t)
(mA)
86. Find equivalent inductance between terminals a and b for the circuit in the following
ﬁgure.
a
b
3 H
3 H
2 H
4 H 2 H
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 181
87. Find equivalent inductance between terminals a and b for the circuit in the following
ﬁgure.
a
b
4 H
8 H
7 H 4 H 1 H
3 H
2 H 3 H 2 H
3 H
88. Find equivalent inductance between terminals a and b for the circuit in the following
ﬁgure.
a
b
8 H
8 H
2 H 2 H
6 H
6 H
4 H
89. Find the equivalent capacitance between terminals a and b for the following circuit.
4 F 6 F
6 F
3 F 4 F
1
2
F
a
b
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
182 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
90. Find the equivalent capacitance between terminals a and b for the following circuit.
a b
3 F
8 F
6 F 4 F
5 F
6 F
4 F 4 F
91. Find the equivalent capacitance between terminals a and b for the following circuit.
a b
7 F
9 F
8 F
5 F
5 F 4 F
16 F
92. Reduce the following circuit to a single capacitor and inductor.
a
b
6 H
3 H
6 H
1 H
4 H
4 H
8 F
2 F
10 F
1
2
H
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 183
93. Reduce the following circuit to a single capacitor and inductor.
a
b
6 F
4 F
5 F
18 F
6 H
3 H
1 H
4 H
1 H
94. For the following circuit, I
S
= 2(1 −e
−5t
)u(t) Aand i (0) = 2 A. (a) Find v(t) for t ≥ 0.
(b) Find i (t) for t ≥ 0.
20 H 5 H
i
+
v
−
( )
5
2 1 ( ) A
t
e u t
−
−
95. For the following circuit, I
S
= 5 sin 2t A and i (0) =
1
2
A. (a) Find v(t) for t ≥ 0. (b)
Find i (t) for t ≥ 0.
20 H 5 H
+
v
−
4 H
i
I
S
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
184 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
96. For the following circuit, I
S
= 5(1 −e
−3t
) u(t) A, i
1
(0) = 1 A, and i
2
(0) = 2 A. Find
the following for t ≥ 0: (a)v
o
(t), (b)v
1
(t), (c) i
o
(t), (d) i
1
(t), (e) i
2
(t).
1 H
20 H 5 H
+
v
1
−
i
2
+v
0
−
i
1
i
0
IS
97. For the following circuit, V
S
= 3(1 −e
−5t
) u(t) V and v(0) = 2 V. Find the following
fort ≥ 0: (a)i (t), (b) v(t).
+
v
−
6 F
3 F
i
V
S
98. For the following circuit, V
S
= 5 cos 3t Vand v(0) = 1 V. Find the following for t ≥ 0:
(a) i (t), (b) v(t).
+
v
−
20 F
5 F
i
V
S
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 185
99. For the following circuit, V
S
= 2(1 −e
−3t
) u(t) V, v
1
(0) = 3 V and v
2
(0) = 2 V. Find
the following for t ≥ 0: (a) i
1
(t), (b) v
1
(t), (c) v
2
(t), (d) i
2
(t).
5 F
18 F 2 F
+
v
2
−
+v
1
−
i
1
i
2
V
S
100. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
and v
1
for t > 0.
+
v
1
−
i
L
2 H
b
a
t = 0
10 Ω
3 Ω
6 V
101. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
and v
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
5 Ω
4 Ω 6 Ω
10 Ω
8 A
+
v
1
−
4 H
i
L
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
186 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
102. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
and v
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
5 V
2 Ω
12 Ω 4 Ω
6 Ω
5 H
+
v
1
−
i
L
103. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
and v
1
for t > 0.
3 Ω
6 Ω
5 H
i
L
b
a
t = 0
8 Ω
6 Ω 10 V
+
v
1
−
104. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
and v
1
for t > 0.
2 H
b
a
t = 0
2 Ω
4 5 A
i
L
5 Ω 20 Ω 2 Ω
+
v
1
−
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 187
105. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
and v
1
for t > 0.
10 V
2 Ω
3 Ω
b
a
t = 0
4 Ω 4 H
i
L
16 Ω
+
v
1
−
106. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
and v
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
10 V
8 Ω
8 Ω
12 Ω
5 Ω 2 H
i
L
+
v
1
−
107. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
and v
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
20 H 5 H 16 Ω
2 Ω
3 Ω 20 V
i
L
+
v
1
−
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
188 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
108. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
, i
1
and v
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
3 H
2 Ω
10 V 4 Ω 5i
1
12 Ω
+
v
1
−
i
1
i
L
109. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
, i
1
and v
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
6 H 6 A
2i
1
5 Ω
20 Ω
4 Ω 40 Ω 10 Ω
+
v1
−
i
L
i
1
110. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find v
c
and i
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
2 F 10 V
5 Ω
10 Ω
+
v
C
−
i
1
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 189
111. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find v
c
and i
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
10 F
2 Ω 10 Ω
10 Ω 40 Ω 10 V 8 A
+
v
C
−
i
1
112. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find v
c
and i
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
3 F
4 Ω
3 Ω 6 Ω
8 Ω
+
v
C
−
5 V
i
1
113. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find v
c
and i
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
10 F
+
v
C
−
40 Ω 40 Ω
12 Ω
10 Ω 8 A
i
1
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
190 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
114. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find v
c
and i
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
5 F
2 Ω
12 Ω 12 Ω 4 Ω 10 V
i1
+
vC
−
115. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find v
c
and i
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
4 F 5 Ω
i1
+
vC
−
153
8
Ω 8 Ω
12 Ω
5 A
116. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find v
c
and i
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
4 F
8 Ω
40 Ω 20 V
i1
+
vC
−
4 F 10 Ω
117. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find v
c
and i
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0 5 Ω
20 V 4 Ω 2i1 12 Ω
+
vC
−
3 F
i1
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 191
118. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find v
c
and i
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
5i
1
5 Ω
20 Ω
8 Ω 12 Ω
+
v
C
−
3 Ω 3 F
6 Ω
15 V
i
1
119. The switch has been in position a for a very long time. At t = 0, the switch moves to
position b. Find i
L
and v
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
10 V 3 A 3 H
5 Ω 20 Ω
+v
1
−
i
L
120. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
and v
1
for t > 0.
3 H
i
L
+
v
1
−
b
a
t = 0
12 Ω
5 V
10 V
4 Ω
8 Ω
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
192 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
121. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
and v
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
10 H 5 V 10 A 5 A 40 Ω
10 Ω 2 Ω
+
v
1
−
i
L
122. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
and v
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
10 V
+
v
1
−
12 Ω
2 Ω
5 V
6 Ω
5 H
4 Ω
L
i
123. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
1
and v
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
10 V
5 V
4 Ω
2 Ω
+
v
1
−
12 Ω 3 H 3i1
i1
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 193
124. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find i
L
, i
1
and v
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
6 A
4 V
4 Ω
20 Ω
5 Ω 40 Ω 10 Ω 3 H
2i
1
+
v
1
−
i
L
i
1
125. The switch has been position a for a very long time. At t = 0, the switch closes. Find
v
C
and i
1
for t > 0.
t = 0
5 V 3 A 2 F
5 Ω 20 Ω
5 Ω
+
vC
−
i1
126. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find v
c
and i
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
10 V
6 Ω
+
vC
−
3 Ω 3 F
2 Ω
20 Ω 3 A
i1
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
194 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
127. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find v
c
and i
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
+
vC
−
120 V 5 A
40 Ω
10 Ω
10 F
12 Ω
i1
128. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find v
c
and i
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
2 F 8 F
10 V 5 V
5 Ω 10 Ω
+
v
C
−
i
1
129. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch instantaneously
moves to position b. Find v
c
and i
1
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 0
3 F
10 V
+
v
C
−
6 Ω
4 Ω
6 F
5 Ω
6 V
i
1
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 195
130. The switches have been in positions a and c for a long time. At t = 0, switch ab
instantaneously moves to position b. At t = 0.06, switch cd instantaneously moves to
position d. Find i
1
and v
c
for t > 0.
5 A 2 Ω
b
a
t = 0
5 F
+
v
C
−
3 A 5 Ω
d c
t = 0.06s
5 V
4 Ω
20 F
2 Ω
i
1
131. The switches have been in positions a and c for a long time. At t = 0, switch ab
instantaneously moves to position b. At t = 0.15, switch cd instantaneously moves to
position d. Find i
1
and v
c
for t > 0.
c
d
t = 0.15
b
a
t = 0
3 A
6 Ω
4 Ω
3 F
+
v
C
−
10 Ω
4 V 6 V
i
1
132. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) i
s
= 3u(t) A; (b) i
s
=
1 +3u(t) A.
4 H 3 F is 5 Ω
+
vC
−
iL
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
196 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
133. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) v
s
= 5u(t) V; (b) v
s
=
2 +5u(t) V.
3 H 6 F vs
+
vC
−
iL
5 Ω
20 Ω
134. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) i
s
= 10u(t) A; (b) i
s
=
−1 +10u(t) A.
2 H 15 F is 10 Ω
+
vC
−
iL
135. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) v
s
= 20u(t) V; (b) v
s
=
4 +20u(t) V.
16 H 1 F vs 4 Ω
+
vC
−
iL
4 Ω
136. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) i
s
= 3u(t) A; (b) i
s
=
−1 +3u(t) A.
200 H 2 F is 5 Ω
+
vC
−
i
L
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 197
137. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) v
s
= 5u(t) V; (b) v
s
=
12 +5u(t) V.
360 H 10 F vs 6 Ω
+
vC
−
iL 6 Ω
138. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) i
s
= 5u(t) A; (b) i
s
=
5 +5u(t) A.
350 H 3 F is 5 Ω
+
vC
−
iL
139. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) v
s
= 3u(t) V; (b) v
s
=
2 +3u(t) V.
20 H 1 F vs 4 Ω
+
vC
−
iL
4 Ω
140. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) i
s
= 10u(t) A; (b) i
s
= −1 +
10u(t) A.
25 H 5 F is 1 Ω
+
vC
−
iL
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
198 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
141. Find i
L
and v
c
for t >0 for the following circuit if: (a) v
s
= 5u(t) V; (b) v
s
=
5u(t) +3 V.
4 H
1.5 F
2 Ω
iL
+vC −
vs
142. Findi
L
andv
c
for t >0for the following circuit if: (a) i
s
= 3u(t) A; (b) i
s
= 3u(t) −1 A.
10 H
1 F
4 Ω
iL
+ vC −
is
143. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) i
s
=10u(t) A; (b) i
s
= 10u(t) +
5 A.
20 H
4 F
1 Ω
iL
+vC −
2 Ω is
144. Find i
L
, i
1
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) v
s
= 5u(t) V; (b) v
s
=
5u(t) +2 V.
12 H
12 F
iL
+vC −
8
12
4 Ω
5i1 vs
i1
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 199
145. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) i
s
= 6u(t) A; (b) i
s
=
3u(t) +1 A.
64 H
16 F
4 Ω
i
L
+ v
C
−
i
s
146. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) v
s
= 4u(t) V; (b) v
s
=
4u(t) −2 V.
25 H
4 F
5 Ω
i
L
+ v
C
−
v
s
147. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) v
s
= 2u(t) V; (b) v
c
=
2u(t) +2 V.
5 H
3 F
6 Ω
i
L
+ v
C
−
v
s
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
200 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
148. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) i
s
= 2u(t) A; (b) i
s
=
2u(t) −1 A.
20 H
2 F
9 Ω
i
L
+v
C
−
i
s
149. Find i
L
and v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) v
s
= 5u(t) V; (b) v
s
=
5u(t) −2 V.
2 H
10 F
1 Ω
i
L
+v
C
−
v
s
150. For the following circuit we are given that i
L
1
(0) = 2 A, i
L
2
(0) = 5 A, v
c
1
(0) = 2 V,
v
c
2
(0) = −3 V and i
s
= 2e
−2t
u(t) A. (a) Write the nodevoltage equations necessary to
solve this circuit. (b) Write the meshcurrent equations necessary to solve this circuit.
(c) Use the nodevoltage method to ﬁnd v
b
for t > 0. (d) Use the meshcurrent method
to ﬁnd v
b
for t > 0.
+ v
C1 −
i
s
2 F
2 F
3 Ω
1 Ω
1
L
i
3 H
1 Ω
2 H
+
−
2
C
v
2
L
i
+
−
b
v
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 201
151. Find v
c
1
for t > 0 for the following circuit: (a) using the nodevoltage method if v
s
=
2e
−3t
u(t) V; (b) using the meshcurrent method if v
s
= 2e
−3t
u(t) V; (c) using the node
voltage method if v
s
= 3 cos(2t) u(t) V; (d) using the meshcurrent method if v
s
=
3 cos(2t) u(t) V; (e) using the nodevoltage method if v
s
= 3u(t) −1 V; (f ) using the
meshcurrent method if v
s
= 3u(t) −1 V.
v
s
4 F
3 F
3 H
6 Ω 3 Ω
2 Ω
+
−
1
C
v
152. Find i
L
1
for t > 0 for the following circuit: (a) using the nodevoltage method if i
s
=
2e
−3t
u(t) A; (b) using the meshcurrent method if i
s
= 2e
−3t
u(t) A; (c) using the node
voltage method if i
s
= 3 cos(2t) u(t) A; (d) using the meshcurrent method if i
s
=
3 cos(2t) u(t) A; (e) using the nodevoltage method if i
s
= 2u(t) +2 A; (f ) using the
meshcurrent method if i
s
= 2u(t) +2 A.
i
s
2 Ω 4 Ω
2 H
1
2
H 3 F
1
L
i
153. Find v
c
for t > 0 for the following circuit: (a) using the nodevoltage method if
v
s
= 3e
−5t
u(t) V; (b) using the meshcurrent method if v
s
= 3e
−5t
u(t) V; (c) using
the nodevoltage method if v
s
= 3 sin(5t) u(t) V; (d) using the meshcurrent method if
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
202 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
v
s
= 3 sin(5t) u(t) V; (e) using the nodevoltage method if v
s
= 5u(t) −2 V; (f ) using
the meshcurrent method if v
s
= 5u(t) −2 V.
+
−
1
C
v
3 H 2 H
4 F 2 F
5 Ω
1
2
F v
s
154. Find i
L
for t > 0 for the following circuit: (a) using the nodevoltage method if i
s
=
5e
−3t
u(t) A; (b) using the meshcurrent method if i
s
= 5e
−3t
u(t) A; (c) using the node
voltage method if i
s
= 2 sin(3t) u(t) A; (d) using the meshcurrent method if i
s
=
2 sin(3t) u(t) A; (e) using the nodevoltage method if i
s
= 2u(t) +3 A; (f ) using the
meshcurrent method if i
s
= 2u(t) +3 A.
i
s 5 Ω
3 H 5 H
2 F 4 F 2 Ω
i
L
155. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch moves to position
b, then at t = 4, the switch moves back to position a. Find v
c
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 4 s
12 Ω 10 Ω
10 V
5 V
4 Ω
2 F
3 H
3Ω
+
v
C
−
t = 0 s
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 203
156. The switches operate as indicated in the following circuit. Find v
c
for t > 0.
t = 0
3 Ω
10 V 3 A
4 Ω
5 Ω
3 F
+v
C
−
2 H
t = 1 s
10 Ω
157. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0, the switch moves to position
b, and then back to position a at t = 2 s. Find v
c
for t > 0.
b
a
t = 2 s
2 Ω
5 V
10 V
4 Ω
t = 0 s
3 H 5i
1 12 Ω
2 Ω
3 F
+
v
C
−
i
1
158. The switches operate as indicated in the following circuit. Find i
L
for t > 0.
t = 2 s
3 H
iL
5 F
b
a
t = 0
6 A
20 Ω
5 Ω
4 Ω
4 V
40 Ω
2i
1
i1
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
204 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
159. The operational ampliﬁer shown in the following ﬁgure is ideal. Find v
o
and i
o
.
20 kΩ v0
100 kΩ
+12 V
−12 V
i0
25 kΩ
5 kΩ
2 V
3 V
−
+
160. The operational ampliﬁer shown in the following ﬁgure is ideal. Find v
o
and i
o
.
5 kΩ
v0
120 kΩ
+10 V
−
−
10 V
i0
30 kΩ
2 V
161. The operational ampliﬁer shown in the following ﬁgure is ideal. Find v
o
and i
o
.
25 kΩ
v0
200 kΩ
+12 V
−
−
12 V
i0
50 kΩ
5 V
6 V
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 205
162. The operational ampliﬁer shown in the following ﬁgure is ideal. Find v
o
.
20 kΩ
5 kΩ
20 kΩ
10 V
5 V
100 kΩ
+12 V
−
−
12 V
v0
80 kΩ
90 kΩ
163. Find the overall gain for the following circuit if the operational ampliﬁer is ideal. Draw
a graph of v
o
versus V
s
if V
s
varies between 0 and 10 V.
v0
+12 V
−12 V
10 kΩ
20 kΩ
5 kΩ
VS
164. Find v
o
in the following circuit if the operational ampliﬁer is ideal.
6 kΩ
3 kΩ
4 V
9 V
v0
2 kΩ
+9 V
−9 V
5 V
5 kΩ
10
3
Ω k
+
−
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
206 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
165. Find v
o
in the following circuit if the operational ampliﬁer is ideal.
v0
3 kΩ
+12 V
−12 V
3 V
10 V
1 kΩ
5 V
6 kΩ
+
−
166. Find i
o
in the following circuit if the operational ampliﬁers are ideal.
i0
10 kΩ
+12 V
− − 12 V
3 kΩ
4 kΩ
5 V
3 V
20 kΩ
+12 V
12 V
5 kΩ
4 V
2 kΩ
5 V
167. Find v
o
in the following circuit if the operational ampliﬁers are ideal.
v0
20 kΩ
+12 V
−12 V
5 kΩ
3 kΩ
8 V
5 V
1 V
3 kΩ
+12 V
−12 V
1 kΩ
3 kΩ
+
−
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 207
168. Suppose the input V
s
is given as a triangular waveformas shown in the following ﬁgure.
If there is no stored energy in the following circuit with an ideal operational ampliﬁer,
ﬁnd v
o
.
VS
2 F
1
2
Ω
+12 V
−12 V
v0
V
s
(V)
1
1 2 3
t
0
−1
4
(s)
+
−
169. Suppose the input V
s
is given in the following ﬁgure. If there is no stored energy in the
following circuit with an ideal operational ampliﬁer, ﬁnd v
o
.
10
1 2 3
t
0
−10
4
(s)
Vs
(V)
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
208 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
VS
0 6μ . F
+12 V
−12 V
v0
1 MΩ
+
−
170. Suppose the input V
s
is given in the following ﬁgure. If there is no stored energy in the
following circuit with an ideal operational ampliﬁer, ﬁnd v
o
.
2
Vs
(V)
2
t
(s)
1 2 0
VS
1μF
+12 V
−12 V
v0
250 kΩ
+
−
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 209
171. Suppose the input V
s
is given in the following ﬁgure. If there is no stored energy in the
following circuit with an ideal operational ampliﬁer, ﬁnd v
o
.
V
s
(V)
0.2
t
(s)
−0.2
0.25
0.5
0.75
1
V
S
0 25μ . F
+12 V
−12 V
v
0
50 kΩ
+
−
172. The following circuit is operating in the sinusoidal steady state. Find the steadystate
expression for i
L
if i
s
= 30 cos 20t A.
4 H 3 F i
s 5 Ω
+
v
C
−
i
L
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
210 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
173. The following circuit is operating in the sinusoidal steady state. Find the steadystate
expression for v
c
if v
s
= 10 sin 1000t V.
3 H 6 F v
s
+
v
C
−
i
L
5Ω
20 Ω
174. The following circuit is operating in the sinusoidal steady state. Find the steadystate
expression for i
L
if i
s
= 5 cos 500t A.
2 H 15 F i
s 10 Ω
+
v
C
−
i
L
175. The following circuit is operating in the sinusoidal steady state. Find the steadystate
expression for v
c
if i
s
= 25 cos 4000t V.
16 H 1 F v
s 4 Ω
+
v
C
−
i
L
4 Ω
176. Design a lowpass ﬁlter with a magnitude of 10 and a cutoff frequency of 250 rad/s.
177. Design a highpass ﬁlter with a magnitude of 20 and a cutoff frequency of 300 rad/s.
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
EXERCISES 211
178. Design a bandpass ﬁlter a gain of 15 and pass through frequencies from 50 to 200
rad/s.
179. Design a lowpass ﬁlter with a magnitude of 5 and a cutoff frequency of 200 rad/s.
180. Design a highpass ﬁlter with a magnitude of 10 and a cutoff frequency of 500 rad/s.
181. Design a bandpass ﬁlter a gain of 10 and pass through frequencies from 20 to 100
rad/s.
182. Suppose the operational ampliﬁer in the following circuit is ideal. (The circuit is a low
pass ﬁrstorder Butterworth ﬁlter.) Find the magnitude of the output v
o
as a function
of frequency.
v
0
V
S
R
C
−
+
183. With an ideal operational ampliﬁer, the following circuit is a secondorder Butterworth
lowpass ﬁlter. Find the magnitude of the output v
o
as a function of frequency.
v
0
VS
R
2
C2
R
1
C1
+
−
P1: KDD
MOBK036exe MOBK036Enderle.cls November 1, 2006 16:12
212 BIOINSTRUMENTATION
184. Athirdorder Butterworth lowpass ﬁlter is shown in the following circuit with an ideal
operational ampliﬁer. Find the magnitude of the output v
o
as a function of frequency.
VS
R2
R1
C2
C1
v0
C3
R3
+
−
Copyright © 2006 by Morgan & Claypool All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means—electronic, mechanical, photocopy, recording, or any other except for brief quotations in printed reviews, without the prior permission of the publisher. Bioinstrumentation John D. Enderle www.morganclaypool.com ISBN10: 1598291327 ISBN13: 9781598291322 ISBN10: 1598291335 ISBN13: 9781598291339 paperback paperback ebook ebook
DOI 10.2200/S00043ED1V01Y200608BME006 Library of Congress CataloginginPublication Data SYNTHESIS LECTURES ON BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING Lecture #6 Series Editor and Afﬁliation: John D. Enderle, University of Connecticut 19300328 Print 19300336 Electronic First Edition 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Portions of this manuscript were reprinted from the following book with the Permission of Elsevier, INTRODUCTION TO BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING, ISBN 0122386626 2005, Chapter 8, pp403504, Enderle et al 2nd edition. This permission is granted for nonexclusive world English rights only in both print and on the world wide web. Additional Information regarding the bestselling book, Introduction to Biomedical Engineering, 2nd edition 2005, by Enderle, Blanchard and Bronzino, from Elsevier can be found on the Elsevier Homepage http://www/elsevier.com.
Bioinstrumentation
John D. Enderle
Program Director & Professor for Biomedical Engineering University of Connecticut
SYNTHESIS LECTURES ON BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING #6
M &C
Mor gan
& Cl aypool
Publishers
ABSTRACT
This short book provides basic information about bioinstrumentation and electric circuit theory. Many biomedical instruments use a transducer or sensor to convert a signal created by the body into an electric signal. Our goal here is to develop expertise in electric circuit theory applied to bioinstrumentation. We begin with a description of variables used in circuit theory, charge, current, voltage, power and energy. Next, Kirchhoff ’s current and voltage laws are introduced, followed by resistance, simpliﬁcations of resistive circuits and voltage and current calculations. Circuit analysis techniques are then presented, followed by inductance and capacitance, and solutions of circuits using the differential equation method. Finally, the operational ampliﬁer and time varying signals are introduced. This lecture is written for a student or researcher or engineer who has completed the ﬁrst two years of an engineering program (i.e., 3 semesters of calculus and differential equations). A considerable effort has been made to develop the theory in a logical manner—developing special mathematical skills as needed. At the end of the short book is a wide selection of problems, ranging from simple to complex.
KEYWORDS
Bioinstrumentation, Circuit Theory, Introductory Biomedical Engineering, Sensors, Transducers, Circuits, Voltage, Current
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v Contents 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 5. . . . 26 4. . . . .2 Current Divider Rule . . . . . 53 e 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Superposition and Source Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Sources . . . . . . . . . . .4 Series and Parallel Combinations of Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 4. . . . .3 Equivalent Resistance. . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Charge . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Resistors . 24 4.1 Linearity and Superposition . . . . 5. . . . . . . . .2 MeshCurrent Method . . . 1 Basic Bioinstrumentation System .2 Norton’s Theorem . . . . .1 Kirchhoff ’s Current Law . . . 14 Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Resistors in Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Power and Energy . . . . . . . . .2 Equivalent Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 4. . . . . .2 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 ´ Thevenin’s and Norton’s Theorems . Voltage. . . . 39 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power and Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 NodeVoltage Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3. . . . . . . . . 7 3. . . . . . . . . . . . 11 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Th´ venin’s Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . 23 4. . 27 Linear Network Analysis . . . . 7 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . 7 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Voltage Divider Rule . . . . . . 31 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Linearity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Voltage and Current Divider Rules . 17 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 5. . 53 6. . . . . . . . . .2 Resistors in Parallel . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Charge. . . . . . . . 44 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Kirchhoff ’s Voltage Law . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .2 Circuits with Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Kirchhoff ’s Laws and Other Techniques in the Phasor Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 TimeVarying Signals . . . . . . . . . . .1 Voltage Characteristics of the Op Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Operational Ampliﬁers . . . 135 12. . . . . . . . . . . . 119 11. 14. . . . 133 12. . 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Power and Energy . . . . . . 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Phasors . . . . . . . . . . . .vi CONTENTS 6. . . . . . 12. . . . . .1 Discontinuities and Initial Conditions in a Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Power and Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Bioinstrumentation Design . 153 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Inductance and Capacitance Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Active Analog Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 8. 13. 89 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Capacitors . . . . . . . . 59 e Inductors . . . . . . . . 154 Exercises . . . . . . . . . . .3 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacitors and Inductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Computers . . . . . . . .2 Passive Circuit Elements in the Phasor Domain . . . 79 General Approach to Solving Circuits Involving Resistors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dependent Sources and Th´ venin and Norton Equivalent Circuits . . . . . .
Elsevier. 2 and 13 contributed by Susan Blanchard.e. Blanchard..vii Preface This short book on bioinstrumentation is written for a reader who has completed the ﬁrst two years of an engineering program (i.. J. At the end of the short book is a wide selection of problems. . D. and Bronzino. I acknowledge and thank William Pruehsner for the technical illustrations. Amsterdam. 1118 pages. S. Amanda Marley. D. with Sections 1. I have found it best to introduce this material using simple examples followed by more difﬁcult ones. and H. three semesters of calculus and differential equations). Portions of this short book are from Chapter 8 of Enderle. Introduction to Biomedical Engineering (Second Edition). M. 2005. J.. Troy Nagle. presented in the same general order as covered in the textbook. ranging from simple to difﬁcult. A considerable effort has been made to develop the theory in a logical manner—developing special mathematical skills as needed..
.
medical technology advanced more in the 20th century than it had in the rest of history combined (Fig. In 1903. During this period. and electrical engineering began to work in conjunction with the medical ﬁeld. followed by inductance and capacitance. Next. Professionals in the areas of chemistry. voltage. followed by resistance. The origins of the changes that occurred within medical science are found in several developments that took place in the applied sciences. diagnosis was based on laboratory tests. During the early 19th century. and biomedical engineering became a recognized profession. During this period.1 CHAPTER 1 Introduction This short book provides basic information about bioinstrumentation and electric circuit theory. 1. charge. hospitals became institutions of research and technology. Before 1900. power. the operational ampliﬁer and timevarying signals are introduced. medicine had little to offer the typical citizen because its resources were mainly the education and little black bag of the physician. Many biomedical instruments use a transducer or sensor to convert a signal created by the body into an electric signal. physics. and solutions of circuits using the differential equation method. the area of electronics had a signiﬁcant impact on the development of new medical technology.1). Our goal here is to develop expertise in electric circuit theory applied to bioinstrumentation. By the late 19th century. As a result. and energy. mechanical engineering. simpliﬁcations of resistive circuits and voltage and current calculations. diagnosis was based on physical examination. and treatment was designed to remove the cause of the disorder. Einthoven placed two skin sensors on a man and attached them to the ends of a silvered wire that was suspended through holes drilled in both ends of a large permanent magnet. William Einthoven expanded on these ideas after he created the ﬁrst string galvanometer. Circuit analysis techniques are then presented. By projecting a tiny light beam across the silvered . The trend towards the use of technology accelerated throughout the 20th century. Men such as Richard Caton and Augustus Desire proved that the human brain and heart depended upon bioelectric events. current. and treatment was designed to heal the structural abnormality. The suspended silvered wire moved rhythmically as the subject’s heart beat. Finally. Kirchhoff ’s current and voltage laws are introduced. We begin with a description of variables used in circuit theory.
1785 – Coulomb worked out the laws of attraction and repulsion between electrically charged bodies. 1850 1860 – Maxwell worked out the mathematical equations for the laws of Electricity and magnetism. 1948 – The first large scale computer was built. 1820 – Oersted discovered electromagnetism. 1895 – Roentgen discovered Xrays. . 1909 – Millikan measured the charge of the electron.1: Timeline for major inventions and discoveries that led to modern medical instrumentation.2 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 1750 1752 – Ben Franklin flew his kite in the storm. 1972 – First CAT machine was made. 1800 1826 – Ohm formulated law of electrical resistance. 1929 – Hans Berger recorded the first EEG. 1900 1897 – Thomson discovered electrons. 1935 – Amplifiers were used to record EEGs. 1920s – Television was invented. 1791 – Galvani published his findings on “animal electricity. 1831– Faraday and Henry found that a moving magnet would induce an electric current in a coil of wire. 1774 – John Walsh proved electricity passes through humans. 1981 – IBM introduced the first personal computer 2000 FIGURE 1. 1903 – Einthoven discovered the galvanometer. 1886 – Hertz discovered the electromagnetic wave. Ampere measured the magnetic effect of an electric current. 1950 1960 – Chardock and Greatbatch created the first implantable pacemaker 1948 – Transistors become readily available. 1904 – Fleming invented the vacuum tube. 1959 – First transistorbased computer was made.“ 1800 – Volta built the first battery. First microprocessor was used.
was used to store a vast amount of data pertaining to clinical laboratory information. Hans Berger created the ﬁrst electroencephalogram (EEG). K. Some are used to monitor patient conditions or acquire information for diagnostic purposes. e. Telemedicine can be used to let a specialist in a major hospital receive information on a patient in a rural area and send back a plan of treatment speciﬁc for that patient. electrical ampliﬁers were used to prove that the electrical activity of the cortex had a speciﬁc rhythm. pacemakers and ventilators. These are just a small sample of the many examples in which the ﬁeld of electronics has been used to signiﬁcantly advance medical technology. The ﬁrst largescale computerbased medical instrument was created in 1972 when the computerized axial tomography (CAT) machine was invented. was created when W. which is routinely used today to measure and record the electrical activity of abnormal hearts and to compare those signals to normal ones. Telemedicine. . is being explored to permit access to health care for patients in remote locations. ECG and EEG machines. which allowed much faster and more complicated analyses and functions to be performed. are implantable while many others are used noninvasively. The invention of the computer made it possible for laboratory tests to be performed and analyzed faster and more accurately. The CAT machine created an image that showed all of the internal structures that lie in a single plane of the body.INTRODUCTION 3 wire.g. and other internal damage from information that was obtained noninvasively. hemorrhages. the Xray machine was the ﬁrst imaging device to be created. which is used to measure and record electrical activity of the brain. Today. which uses computer technology to transmit information from one medical site to another. the Xray machine. like pacemakers. while others are used to control physiological functions. This new type of image made it possible to have more accurate and easier diagnosis of tumors. Some devices. In 1929.g. in 1960. and. there is a wide variety of medical devices and instrumentation systems. Roentgen found that Xrays could be used to give pictures of the internal structures of the body. Another important addition to medical technology was provided by the invention of the computer. One of the ﬁrst computerbased instruments in the ﬁeld of medicine. Many other advancements that were made in medical technology originated from research in basic and applied physics. e. electrical ampliﬁers were used in devices such as the ﬁrst implantable pacemaker that was created by William Chardack and Wilson Greatbatch. In 1935. In 1895. one of the most important technological inventions in the medical ﬁeld. Thus. the sequential multiple analyzer plus computer. Thus. Einthoven was able to record the movement of the wire as waves on a scroll of moving photographic paper. the invention of the string galvanometer led to the creation of the electrocardiogram (ECG). This chapter will focus on those features that are common to devices that are used to acquire and process physiological data.
.
Sensors are used to convert physical measurands into electric outputs. 2. and converted to digital form. many instrumentation systems have the capability of storing data. or condition that is measured by an instrumentation system is called the measurand (Fig. Basic instrumentation systems also include output display devices that enable human operators to view the signal in a format that is easy to understand. . Most output display devices are intended to be observed visually. With the invention of the telephone and now with the Internet. such as those generated by muscles or the brain. a beeping sound with each heart beat.1). and transmitted to another device for processing and/or storage. Holter monitors. The outputs from these biosensors are analog signals. In some devices. property. In addition to displaying data. or a chemical or mechanical signal that is converted to an electrical signal. perhaps in a patient’s home. There. signals can be acquired with a device in one location. This has made it possible. for example. the signal is stored brieﬂy so that further processing can take place or so that an operator can examine the data. the signals are stored permanently so that different signal processing schemes can be applied at a later time.5 CHAPTER 2 Basic Bioinstrumentation System The quantity. continuous signals. i. the signals are ampliﬁed. such as amplifying and ﬁltering an ECG signal. are discussed later in this chapter. for example.e. conditioned. acquire 24 hrs of ECG data that is later processed to determine arrhythmic activity and other important diagnostic characteristics. to provide quick diagnostic feedback if a patient has an unusual heart rhythm while at home. Methods for modifying analog signals. discrete or continuous. This can be a bioelectric signal. In other cases. These displays may be numerical or graphical. but some also provide audible output. and permanent or temporary. e. Once the analog signals have been digitized and converted to a form that can be stored and processed by digital computers. many more methods of signal conditioning can be applied.g. which are sent to the analog processing and digital conversion block. It has also allowed medical facilities in rural areas to transmit diagnostic images to tertiary care hospitals so that specialized physicians can help general practitioners arrive at more accurate diagnoses. ﬁltered.
e. blood pressure. Another important component.g. The ﬁrst is the calibration signal. when needed or are part of biofeedback systems in which the patient is made aware of a physiological measurement. it is impossible to convert the output of an instrument system into a meaningful representation of the measurand. measured relationship. . A signal with known amplitude and frequency content is applied to the instrumentation system at the sensor’s input. Some feedback devices collect physiological data and stimulate a response.6 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Sensor Calibration Analog Processing A/D Control & Feedback Signal Processing Output Display Data Storage Data Transmission FIGURE 2. e.g. along with control and feedback. Two other components play important roles in instrumentation systems. is not a part of all instrumentation systems. These devices include pacemakers and ventilators that stimulate the heart or the lungs. storage and display capabilities. a feedback element. The calibration signal allows the components of the system to be adjusted so that the output and input have a known. and uses conscious control to change the physiological response. a heart beat or breath.1: Basic instrumentation systems using sensors to measure a signal with data acquisition. Without this information.
2) . The negative charge carried by an electron. q e . i(t). Example 3. Power and Energy 3.2 CURRENT Electric current. and Q for constant charge. respectively. is the smallest amount of charge that exists and is measured in units called Coulombs (C).1) q (t) = t0 i(λ) d λ + q (t0 ) (3.602 × 10−19 C The symbol q (t) is used to represent charge that changes with time. i(t) = and t dq dt (3.1095 × 10−31 kg electron = −5. positive and negative. q e = −1.27643 × 10−7 C 3.1 CHARGE Two kinds of charge.7 CHAPTER 3 Charge. Current. is deﬁned as the change in the amount of charge that passes through a given point or area in a speciﬁed time period. By deﬁnition. What is the charge of 3 × 10−15 g of electrons? Solution Q = 3 × 10−15 g × 1 electron −1. are carried by protons and electrons. The charge carried by a proton is the opposite of the electron.60219 × 10−19 C 1 kg × × 103 g 9. Voltage. Current is measured in amperes (A). one ampere equals one coulomb/second (C/s).1.
3. 3. there is no need to be concerned as to which is responsible for the current. Suppose the following current is ﬂowing in Fig.1. 3. current is carried by electrons in metallic conductors.1: A simple electric circuit illustrating current ﬂowing around a closed loop. In the time interval 0–1. Consider Fig. Current is deﬁned as positive if (a) A positive charge is moving in the direction of the arrow (b) A negative charge is moving in the opposite direction of the arrow Since these two possibilities produce the same outcome.1).5 s.2 with the current entering terminal 1 in the circuit on the right.03 C Consider Fig. (3. as given by Eq. Example 3. In the time interval 1. Current. In electric circuits. We typically refer to a constant current as a DC current.1.1).2. i(t) = Find the total charge. also depends on the direction of ﬂow as illustrated in the circuit in Fig. and . the current is negative and enters terminal 2 with a positive value. Solution ∞ ∞ 0 3e −100t A t<0 t≥0 Q= −∞ idt = 0 3e −100t 3 −100t e dt = − 100 ∞ t=0 = 0. deﬁned by Eq. current is positive and enters terminal 1.5–3 s. (3. Current is typically a function of time.1. 3.8 BIOINSTRUMENTATION i Circuit element Circuit element i FIGURE 3.
a point at which two or more circuit elements have a common connection.2.1. as shown in Fig. 3. 3. (Right) A circuit element with current entering terminal 1 and leaving terminal 2. (3. such as i(t). Whatever current enters one terminal must leave at the other terminal. Consider the circuit in Fig. Using Eq. CURRENT.5 2 2. capacitors and inductors.5 9 0. as i1 + i2 − i4 − i3 = 0 . This principle is known as Kirchhoff ’s current law (KCL). denote it with a capital letter such as I indicating it does not change with time.5 i 2 FIGURE 3.CHARGE. POWER AND ENERGY i (A) 1 1. that is.5 t (s) 3 i 1 Circuit element 1 1.3) and applying KCL for the currents leaving the node gives −i1 − i2 + i4 + i3 = 0 The previous equation is equivalently written for the currents entering the node. Passive circuit elements have two terminals with a known voltage– current relationship. Since charge cannot be created and must be conserved.5 1 1. VOLTAGE.3. the sum of the currents at any node.or just i.5 0 0. Examples of passive circuit elements include resistors.1 Kirchhoff ’s Current Law Current can ﬂow only in a closed circuit.3) where there are N currents leaving the node. We denote a timevarying current with a lower case letter.5 0 1 0. 3. No current is lost as it ﬂows around the circuit because net charge cannot accumulate within a circuit element and charge must be conserved. must equal zero so no net charge accumulates.5 0.2: (Left) A sample current waveform. given as N in (t) = 0 n=1 (3.
“closed path” and “mesh” as follows. A. Essential Node: A point at which three or more circuit elements have a common connection. C. B. which are all essential nodes. Mesh: A closed path that does not contain any other closed paths within it. Closed Path: A path that starts and ends at the same node. 3. there are ﬁve nodes. It is understood that the closed surface does not intersect any of the circuit elements.10 BIOINSTRUMENTATION i1 i2 i4 i3 FIGURE 3.4. whether they are all leaving or all entering the node. “path”.4. Branch: A circuit element or connected group of circuit elements. Consider the closed surface drawn with dashed lines in Fig. It should be clear that the application of KCL is for all currents. In Fig. Node A: −i1 + i2 − i3 = 0 Node B: i3 + i4 + i5 − i6 = 0 Node C: i1 −i4 − i8 = 0 Node D: −i7 − i5 + i8 = 0 Node E: −i2 + i6 + i7 = 0 Kirchhoff ’s current law is also applicable to any closed surface surrounding a part of the circuit. Kirchhoff ’s current law applied to the closed surface gives −i1 + i4 + i5 + i7 = 0 . A connected group of circuit elements usually connect nodes together. Essential Branch: A branch that connects two essential nodes. “branch”. Path: A connected group of circuit elements in which none is repeated.3: A node with 4 currents. 3. • • • • • • • Node: A point at which two or more circuit elements have a common connection. we deﬁne its characteristics with the terms “node”. D and E. In describing a circuit. Kirchhoff ’s current law is applied to each of the nodes as follows.
or just v. between two points (A and B). POWER AND ENERGY 11 Closed surface Circuit element E i7 i6 Circuit element i2 i1 A i3 Circuit element B i5 i4 Circuit element Circuit element D i8 Circuit element Circuit element C FIGURE 3. 3. VOLTAGE.5). is the amount of energy required to move a charge from point A to point B. .4) The unit of measurement for voltage is the volt (V). In Fig. 3.CHARGE. A constant (DC) voltage source is denoted by V while a timevarying voltage is denoted by v(t). CURRENT.3 VOLTAGE Voltage represents the work per unit charge associated with moving a charge between two points (A and B in Fig. the voltage. and given as v= dw dq (3. i A + v  1 Circuit element B 2 FIGURE 3.5.5: Voltage and current convention. v. 3.4: A circuit with a closed surface.
12
BIOINSTRUMENTATION
+ v1 CP3 CP1 + v3 Circuit element v4 + Circuit element CP2 Circuit element
+ v2 Circuit element
+ v5 
Circuit element
FIGURE 3.6: Circuit illustrating Kirchhoff ’s voltage law. Closed paths are identiﬁed as CP1, CP2 and CP3.
3.3.1
Kirchhoff ’s Voltage Law
N
Kirchhoff ’s voltage law (KVL) states the sum of all voltages in a closed path is zero, or vn (t) = 0
n=1
(3.5)
where there are N voltage drops assigned around the closed path, with vn (t) denoting the individual voltage drops. The sign for each voltage drop in Eq. (3.5) is the ﬁrst sign encountered while moving around the closed path. Consider the circuit in Fig. 3.6, with each circuit element assigned a voltage, vn , with a given polarity, and three closed paths, CP1, CP2 and CP3. Kirchhoff ’s voltage law for each closed path is given as CP1: −v3 + v1 − v4 = 0 CP2: v4 + v2 + v5 = 0 CP3: −v3 + v1 + v2 + v5 = 0 Kirchhoff ’s laws are applied in electric circuit analysis to determine unknown voltages and currents. Each unknown variable has its distinct equation. To solve for the unknowns using MATLAB, we create a matrix representation of the set of equations and solve. This method is demonstrated in many examples in this book.
CHARGE, CURRENT, VOLTAGE, POWER AND ENERGY
13
Example 3.3. Find I1 , I2 and I3 for the following circuit.
Circuit Element
2A I1 A
I2 Circuit Element 3A
B
I3 Circuit Element
C 4A
Circuit Element
Circuit Element
Circuit Element
Solution. We apply KCL ﬁrst at node C, then B and ﬁnally A. Node C: −2 + I3 + 4 = 0; Node B: I2 + 3 − I3 = 0; Node A: − I1 − I2 + 2 = 0; I3 = −2 A I2 = I3 − 3 = −5 A I1 = 2 − I2 = 7 A
3.4
POWER AND ENERGY
p= dw d w dq = = vi dt dq d t (3.6)
Power is the rate of energy expenditure given as
where p is power measured in watts (W), and w is energy measured in joules ( J). Power is usually determined by the product of voltage across a circuit element and the current through it. By convention, we assume that a positive value for power indicates that power is being delivered (or absorbed or consumed) by the circuit element. A negative value for power indicates that power is being extracted or generated by the circuit element, i.e., a battery. Figure 3.7 illustrates the four possible cases for a circuit element’s current and voltage conﬁguration. According to convention, if both i and v are positive, with the arrow and polarity shown in Fig. 3.7A, energy is absorbed (either lost by heat or stored). If either the current arrow or voltage polarity is reversed as in B and C, energy is supplied to the circuit. Note that if both the current direction and voltage polarity are reversed together, as in D, energy is absorbed.
14
BIOINSTRUMENTATION
A
i + v 1
p = vi
Circuit element
B
1 + v i
p = −vi
Circuit element
2
2
C
i v + 1
p = −vi
Circuit element
D
1 v + i
p = vi
Circuit element
2
2
FIGURE 3.7: Polarity references for four cases of current and voltage. Cases A and D result in positive power being consumed by the circuit element. Cases B and C result in negative power being extracted from the circuit element.
A passive circuit element is deﬁned as an element whose power is always positive or zero, which may be dissipated as heat (resistance), stored in an electric ﬁeld (capacitor) or stored in a magnetic ﬁeld (inductor). We deﬁne an active circuit element as one whose power is negative and capable of generating energy. Energy is given by
t
w(t) =
−∞
pd t
(3.7)
3.5
SOURCES
Sources are two terminal devices that provide energy to a circuit. There is no direct voltage– current relationship for a source; when one of the two variables is given, the other cannot be determined without knowledge of the rest of the circuit. Independent sources are devices for which the voltage or current is given and the device maintains its value regardless of the rest of the circuit. A device that generates a prescribed voltage at its terminals, regardless of the current ﬂow, is called an ideal voltage source. Figure 3.8A and B shows the general symbols for an ideal voltage source. Figure 3.8C shows an ideal current source that delivers a prescribed current to
CHARGE, CURRENT, VOLTAGE, POWER AND ENERGY
15
A
VS VS
B
+ IS
C
FIGURE 3.8: Basic symbols used for independent sources. (A) Battery. (B) Ideal voltage source. Vs can be a constant DC source (Battery) or a timevarying source. (C) Ideal current source Is .
VS
+ 
IS
FIGURE 3.9: Basic symbols used for dependent or controlled sources. (Left) Controlled voltage source. The voltage Vs is a known function of some other voltage or current in the circuit. (Right) Controlled current source. The current Is is a known function of some other voltage or current in the circuit.
the attached circuit. The voltage generated by an ideal current source depends on the elements in the rest of the circuit. Shown in Fig. 3.9 are a dependent voltage and current source. A dependent source takes on a value equaling a known function of some other voltage or current value in the circuit. We use a diamondshaped symbol to represent a dependent source. Often, a dependent source is called a controlled source. The current generated for a dependent voltage source and the voltage for a dependent current source depend on circuit elements in the rest of the circuit. Dependent sources are very important in electronics. Later in this chapter, we will see that the operational ampliﬁer uses a controlled voltage source for its operation. Example 3.4. Find the voltage V3 for the circuit shown in the following ﬁgure.
I2 + + V3 5V 5A + 3A + 10V 2I2
The voltage across the dependent voltage source on the right side of the circuit equals 2I2 = 10 V.16 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Solution. Current I2 equals 5 A because it is in the same branch as the 5 A current source. Applying KVL around the outer closed path gives −V3 − 5 − 10 = 0 or V3 = −15 V .
As described. and having 0 A current pass through it. This is true of many physiological models as well: linearity is observed only within a range of values.2A to write the voltage drop across a resistor. 4. We deﬁne an open circuit as shown in Fig. 4. There are two ways to write Ohm’s law. R.1) In this book.3B with R = ∞. 4.1. Conductivity (σ ) is the inverse of resistivity.3A with R = 0. with a slope equal to the resistance. we will use the convention shown in Fig. An ideal resistor follows Ohm’s law.2) (4. the model is nonlinear.2A as v = iR and for Fig. the voltage across a resistor is equal to the product of the current ﬂowing through the element and its resistance. We deﬁne a short circuit as shown in Fig. This linear relationship does not apply at very high voltages and currents. where 1 = 1 V/A. A gap between circuit elements has a resistance of inﬁnity. 4. Outside this range. Resistors are made of different materials and their ability to impede current is given with a value of resistance. 4. Resistance is measured in Ohms ( ). A theoretical bare wire that connects circuit elements together has a resistance of zero. Each material has a property called resistivity (ρ) that indicates the resistance of the material. and having a 0 V voltage drop. and conductance (G) is the inverse of . denoted R. Some electrically conducting materials have a very small range of currents and voltages in which they exhibit linear behavior. which describes a linear relationship between voltage and current. as shown in Fig. 4. Ohm’s law is written for Fig.1 RESISTORS A resistor is a circuit element that limits the ﬂow of current through it and is denoted with the symbol .2B as v = −i R (4.17 CHAPTER 4 Resistance 4. depending on the current direction and voltage polarity.
1: Voltage–current relationship for a resistor. A.18 BIOINSTRUMENTATION V (V) Slope = R I (A) FIGURE 4.3: Short and open circuits.2: An ideal resister with resistance R in Ohms ( ). Open Circuit i=0A + R=0 Ω v=0V − R= ∞ v − FIGURE 4. . Short Circuit i + B. A i(t) + v(t) − B R R + v(t) − i(t) FIGURE 4.
−5 + I2 + 8 = 0 and I2 = −3 A Current I3 is determined by applying KCL at the node on the right of the circuit. First we ﬁnd I2 by applying KCL at the node in the upper left of the circuit.1. I3 and V1 .6) and either Eq. −V1 − 50 + 5I3 = 0 V1 = −50 + 5 × (−2) = −60 V 4. Ohm’s law is written as i = Gv Example 4.2) as p = vi = v2 = i 2R R (4.3) 5Ω 5A R1 I2 10 A 8A + 50 V V1 − 5Ω I3 Solution. In terms of conductance. R2 (4.RESISTANCE 19 resistance. From the following circuit. Conductance is measured in units called siemens (S) and has units of A/V. 10 + I3 − 8 = 0 and I3 = −2 A Voltage V1 is determined by applying KVL around the lower right closed path and using Ohm’s law.4) .1) or (4. (4.2 POWER The power consumed by a resistor is given by the combination of Eq. ﬁnd I2 . (3.
as illustrated in the following ﬁgure.2. and therefore the current through it. the power supplied by the active elements always equals the power consumed. Calculate the power in each element. Equation (4. is 18 = 6 A. giving −I1 − 5I1 + 6 = 0 or I1 = 1 A The power for each of the circuit elements is p 18V = −I1 × 18 = −18 W p 5i1 = −18 × 5I1 = −90 W p3 = 182 = 108 W 3 In any circuit. We ﬁrst note that the resistor on the right has 18 V across it.3. which is true for any passive element. power is consumed by a resistor. the power generated is 108 W and the power consumed is 108 W. To ﬁnd the current I1 we apply KCL 3 at the upper node. signiﬁcant damage can occur. . I1 18 V 5I1 3Ω Solution. Electric safety is of paramount importance in a hospital or clinical environment. Here. Example 4. If sufﬁcient current is allowed to ﬂow through the body. according to Ohm’s law.20 BIOINSTRUMENTATION and given off as heat.4) demonstrates that regardless of the voltage polarity and current direction. Example 4. Power is always positive for a resistor. as required.
2000).RESISTANCE Burns. a current of magnitude 50 mA (dashed line) is enough to cause ventricular ﬁbrillation. A crude electric circuit model of the body consisting of two arms (each with resistance RA ).0 100.001 0.0 For instance. Introduction to Biomedical Engineering. Fatigue. and head (with resistance RH ) is shown in the following ﬁgure on the right. The ﬁgure on the left shows the current distribution from a macroshock from one arm to another (Redrawn from Enderle et al. Injury Sustained myocardial contraction 21 Ventricular fibrillation Respiratory paralysis.0001 0.. Pain Letgo current Threshold of perception 0.1 Current (A) 1.0 10. body trunk (with resistance RT ). as well as other conditions.01 0. two legs (each with resistance RL ). RH RA RA + RL RT RL VS .
we will expand this e remark to include any combination of sources and resistances. we have I= Vs 120 = 0. In another section on a Th´ venin equivalent circuit. as we will see. we reduce the body electric circuits to I RA VS RA If RA = 400 and Vs = 120 V. We consider two circuits equivalent if they cannot be distinguished from each other by voltage and current measurements. Solution. We represent the resistance of either circuit using Ohm’s law as RE Q = Vs Vs = IA IB (4.5.5) Thus. Consider the two circuits A and B in Fig. Using Ohm’s law.15 A = RA + RA 800 The current I is the current passing through the heart. it follows that any circuit consisting of resistances can be replaced by an equivalent circuit as shown in Fig. each stimulated by a DC voltage Vs . 4. These two circuits are equivalent if I A = I B . . 4. then ﬁnd I . and at this level it would cause ventricular ﬁbrillation. equivalent circuits.22 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Since the only elements that form a closed path that current can ﬂow is given by the source in series with the two arms. the two circuits behave identically. 4. consisting of combinations of resistors.4.3 EQUIVALENT RESISTANCE It is sometimes possible to reduce complex circuits into simpler and. that is.
1 SERIES AND PARALLEL COMBINATIONS OF RESISTANCE Resistors in Series If the same current ﬂows from one resistor to another.4: Two circuits.4 4. Consider Fig.RESISTANCE 23 IA IB VS Circuit A VS Circuit B FIGURE 4. An equivalent circuit can be derived through KVL as −Vs + IR1 + IR2 + IR3 = 0 or rewritten in terms of an equivalent resistance RE Q as RE Q = IA Vs = R1 + R2 + R3 I IA VS Circuit A VS REQ FIGURE 4.6 with three resistors in series.4. 4. If these two resistors are connected to a third and the same current ﬂows through all of them. . if the same current ﬂows through N resistors. the two are said to be in series.5: Equivalent circuits. 4. In general. then the three resistors are in series. then the N resistors are in series.
6: A series circuit. RE Q = R1 R2 R3 .7 is derived through KCL as −I + Vs Vs Vs + + =0 R1 R2 R3 I VS R1 R2 R3 FIGURE 4.4. if we have N resistors in series. Thus in Fig. In general.2 Resistors in Parallel Two or more elements are said to be in parallel if the same voltage is across each of the resistors. We use a shorthand notation to represent resistors in parallel using the symbol.7. 4.6) 4.7: A parallel circuit. 4. An equivalent circuit for Fig.24 BIOINSTRUMENTATION I R1 VS R2 R3 FIGURE 4. . Consider the three parallel resistors as shown in Fig. 4. N RE Q = i=1 Ri (4.7.
4. These combinations are shown in the following ﬁgure and calculation: I 2Ω 3Ω 5V 12 Ω 12 Ω 12 Ω 2Ω 2Ω 2 2 =1 Ω 12 12 12 =4 Ω 4 4 =2 Ω 2+2 = 4 Ω 3+1= 4 Ω . To solve for RE Q .7) For just two resistors in parallel. if we have N resistors in parallel. this group is in series with the 2 resistor. Eq. I 2Ω 5V 12 Ω 12 Ω 12 Ω 2Ω 2Ω Solution. Next.8) Example 4. (4. RE Q = 1 R1 + 1 R2 1 + ··· + 1 RN (4. apply from right to left the parallel and series combinations.7) is written as RE Q = R1 R2 = R1 R2 R1 + R2 3Ω (4. First. Find RE Q and the power supplied by the source for the following circuit. Finally. this group is in parallel with the three 12 resistors.RESISTANCE 25 or rewritten in terms of an equivalent resistance RE Q as RE Q = Vs = I 1 1 R1 + 1 R2 + 1 R3 In general. we have two 2 resistors in parallel that are in series with the 3 resistor.
8: Voltage divider rule circuit.5. to allow us to quickly calculate I voltages in series resistor circuits and currents in parallel resistor circuits without digressing to the fundamentals. where RE Q = R1 + R2 . Consider ﬁnding V2 in the series circuit shown in Fig. I= Vs Vs = RE Q R1 + R2 I R1 VS R2 + V2 − FIGURE 4. .1 Voltage Divider Rule The voltage divider rule allows us to easily calculate the voltage across a given resistor in a series circuit.25 W 4.5 VOLTAGE AND CURRENT DIVIDER RULES Let us now extend the concept of equivalent resistance.8. RE Q = V . Accordingly. (3 + 1)) = 2 + 2 = 4 I= and 5 5 = = 1.26 BIOINSTRUMENTATION RE Q = 2 =2+ + ((12 1 1 12 12 + 1 12 12 ) 1 12 (3 1 2 + (2 1 + 1 2 2 ))) + 3+ = 2 + ((4) Accordingly.25 A RE Q 4 p = 5 × I = 6. 4. 4.
2 Current Divider Rule The current divider rule allows us to easily calculate the current through any resistor in parallel R resistor circuits. and therefore V2 = IR2 = Vs This same analysis can be used to ﬁnd V1 as V1 = Vs R1 R1 + R2 R2 R1 + R2 In general.9) 4. Consider ﬁnding I2 in the parallel circuit shown in Fig. if a circuit contains N resistors in series. where RE Q = R11 R22 . the voltage divider rule gives the voltage across any one of the resistors.RESISTANCE 27 I I1 I2 V S R1 R2 FIGURE 4. +R Accordingly.9: Current divider rule circuit.9. as Vi = Vs Ri R1 + R2 + · · · RN (4. I2 = and Vs = I R1 R2 R1 + R2 Vs R2 .5. 4. Ri .
as Ii = I 1 Ri 1 R1 + 1 R2 ··· + 1 RN (4. if a circuit contains N resistors in parallel. which. as is evident from the redrawn circuit that follows. We solve this circuit problem in two parts. The equivalent resistance is found as RE Q = 1 + (12 12 12) = 1 + 1 1 12 + 1 12 + 1 12 =5 . when placed into the circuit. I2 1Ω I1 5A 10/3 Ω 2Ω 12 Ω 12 Ω 12 Ω REQ To begin. ﬁnd I1 . ﬁrst ﬁnd RE Q . reduces to three parallel resistors from which I2 is calculated.10) Example 4. Ri . 1Ω I1 5A 10/3 Ω 2Ω 12 Ω 12 Ω 12 Ω Solution. by ﬁrst ﬁnding I2 and then I1 .5.28 BIOINSTRUMENTATION yielding after substituting Vs I2 = I 1 R2 1 R1 + 1 R2 In general. the current divider rule gives the current through any one of the resistors. For the following circuit.
RESISTANCE 29 Applying the current divider rule on the three parallel resistors. I2 = 5 1 5 3 +1 10 2 10 3 2 RE Q . we have + 1 5 = 1A I2 ﬂows through the 1 resistor. The current I1 can also be found by applying the current divider rule as I1 = I2 1 12 + 1 12 1 12 + 1 12 = 1 12 + 1 12 1 12 + 1 12 = 1 A 3 . and then divides into three equal currents of 1 A through each 3 12 resistor.
.
The application of the meshcurrent method involves expressing the branch voltages in terms of mesh currents. These two methods are systematic approaches that lead to a solution that is efﬁcient and robust. but as the circuit complexity increases. MATLAB is ideal for solving problems that involves solution of simultaneous equations. The number of independent equations necessitates: • • N1 equations involving KCL at N1 nodes for the nodevoltage method. the resulting linear set of simultaneous equations is solved to determine the unknown voltages or currents. and applying KCL at each of the nodes. In this section. it becomes more difﬁcult to solve problems. This approach works for all circuit problems. The application of the nodevoltage method involves expressing the branch currents in terms of one or more node voltages. This number may be fewer if there are current sources in the circuit. resulting in a minimum number of simultaneous equations that saves time and effort. As we will see. N1 equations involving KVL around each of the meshes in the circuit for the meshcurrent method.1 NODEVOLTAGE METHOD The use of node equations provides a systematic method for solving circuit analysis problems by the application of KCL at each essential node. resistive circuit simpliﬁcation. 5. The number of unknown voltages for the nodevoltage method or currents for the meshcurrent method determines the number of equations. providing a straightforward tool that minimizes the amount of work.31 CHAPTER 5 Linear Network Analysis Our methods for solving circuit problems up to this point have included applying Ohm’s law and Kirchhoff ’s laws. The nodevoltage method involves the following two steps: . In both cases. and the voltage and current divider rules. and applying KVL around each mesh. This number may be fewer if there are voltage sources in the circuit. we introduce the nodevoltage method and the meshcurrent method to provide a systematic and easy solution of circuit problems.
5. 5. Find V1 using the nodevoltage method. we write the value of the independent voltage source in those equations. Since the node voltage is known. Consider Fig. The current is written for (A) as I A = V = V1 −V2 and for (B) as I B = V = V2 −V1 . we do not write a node voltage equation for node 2 in this case.32 BIOINSTRUMENTATION IA + V1 − + V − R + V2 − + V1 − −V+ R IB + V2 − (A) (B) FIGURE 5. All voltages are written with respect to the reference node. The current through a resistor is written using Ohm’s law. 5. We express nodevoltage equations as the currents leaving the node. and is denoted with the symbol . Two adjacent nodes give rise to the current moving to the right (like Fig. The reference node is usually the one with the most branches connected to it. This reduces the number of independent node equations by one and the amount of work in solving for the node voltages. the current I A is written as −5 I A = V1R . because the node voltage is known. Example 5. 2. It is easy to verify in (A) that V = V1 − V2 R R R R by applying KVL. we write KCL at each of the N1 nodes.1B) for the other node.1. 1/2 Ω 1/2 Ω + V1 − 1/3 Ω 1/4 Ω 5V 3A . In writing the node equations for the other nodes. we do not write a node equation for this node. When writing the nodevoltage equation for node 1. 1. with the voltage expressed as the difference between the potential on either end of the resistor with respect to the reference node as shown in Fig. Ex. 5.1: Ohm’s law written in terms of node voltages.1 further illustrates this case.1.1A) for one node. If one of the branches located between an essential node and the reference node contains an independent or dependent voltage source. and the current moving to the left (like Fig. Except for the reference node. 5. Assign each node a voltage with respect to a reference node (ground).1 (A) and assume the voltage V2 results from an independent voltage source of 5 V.
4211 −0. F = [10. The node involving the 5 V voltage source has a known node voltage and therefore we do not write a node equation for it.4211 V. V1 and V2 .0263 Thus. V1 = 1. indicated. V = A\F V= 1. labeled 1 and 2 in the redrawn circuit that follows.LINEAR NETWORK ANALYSIS 33 Solution. −3]. 1/2 Ω 1 + V1 − 1/2 Ω 2 + 5V 1/3 Ω V2 − 1/4 Ω 3A Summing the currents leaving node 1 gives 2(V1 − 5) + 3V1 + 2(V1 − V2 ) = 0 which simpliﬁes to 7V1 − 2V2 = 10 Summing the currents leaving node 2 gives 2(V2 − V1 ) + 4V2 + 3 = 0 which simpliﬁes to −2V1 + 6V2 = −3 The two node equations are written in matrix format as 7 −2 −2 6 and solved with MATLAB as follows: A = [7 − 2. This circuit has two essential nodes. V1 V2 = 10 −3 . −2 6]. with the reference node and two node voltages.
N−1 VN−1 = I1 −G 2.1 ⎥ ⎢ .. I N−1 Note the symmetry about the main diagonal where the offdiagonal terms are equal to each other and negative. For the following circuit. the nodevoltage approach is the same as before except for an additional equation describing the relationship between the dependent source and the node voltage.N−1 VN−1 ⎤ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎥ ⎦ (5.N−1 VN−1 = I N Equation (5. A dependent source destroys this symmetry. the coefﬁcient for the node voltage is the sum of the conductances connected to the node.1 −G N−1. 1/4 Ω 2Id 1/2 Ω 1/4 Ω + Id 5A 1/3 Ω 3A V3 1Ω − . there is one equation for each dependent source in terms of the node voltages. This is true of all circuits without dependent sources. then the node equations have the following form.34 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Generally. ⎥ ⎢ ⎢ .N−1 G 1. ⎦ ⎣ ⎣ −G N−1.1 V1 − G N−1.2 V2 − · · · − G 1.2) (5. . The coefﬁcients for the other node voltages are the negative of the sum of conductances connected between the node voltage and other node voltages.2 V2 − · · · − G 2. ⎥ ⎢ .2 V2 − · · · − G N−1.1) I1 I2 . −G N−1.1) is put in matrix form for solution by MATLAB as ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎡ V1 −G 2. G 1.1 V1 + G 2. In general. ﬁnd V3 using the nodevoltage method. . if a circuit has dependent sources. In cases involving more than one dependent source. ⎥=⎢ ⎢ .N−1 ⎥ ⎢ V2 ⎥ ⎢ ⎢ −G 2.1 V1 − G 1. Example 5.1 ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎢ G 2.1 · · · −G 1. . .2.2 ··· G N−1. If the input consists of a set of current sources applied at each node. ⎦ ⎣ .N−1 VN−1 = I2 .2 · · · −G 2.
Notice that this circuit has three essential nodes and a dependent current source. Summing the currents leaving node 1 gives 5 + 2 (V1 − V2 ) + 2Id + 4 (V1 − V3 ) = 0 which reduces to 6V1 − 2V2 − 2V3 = −5 Summing the currents leaving node 2 gives −2Id + 2 (V2 − V1 ) + 3V2 + 4 (V2 − V3 ) = 0 which simpliﬁes to −2V1 + 9V2 − 6V3 = 0 Summing the currents leaving node 3 gives 4 (V3 − V2 ) − 3 + V3 + 4 (V3 − V1 ) = 0 reducing to −4V1 − 4V2 + 9V3 = 3 . We label the essential nodes 1. with the reference node at the bottom of the circuit and three node voltages V1 . 2 and 3 in the redrawn circuit. V2 and V3 . as indicated. 1/4 Ω 2Id 1 2 + 1/4 Ω 3 + Id + 1/2 Ω 5A V1 V2 1/3 Ω 3A V3 1Ω − − − Note that Id = V3 according to Ohm’s law.LINEAR NETWORK ANALYSIS 35 Solution.
F = [−5. we form a supernode by combining the two nodes.5294 −0. we write a second equation by applying KVL for the two node voltages 1 VΔ IA IB + V2 IC 1 + − + V1 2 ID − − FIGURE 5. 3].1471 −0. Because we have two unknowns and one supernode equation. If one of the branches has an independent or controlled voltage source located between two essential nodes as shown in Fig. Solving with MATLAB gives A = [6 −2 −2. I A . is passed through the source and written in terms of currents leaving node 2. . 5. we replace I A with I B + IC + I D in terms of node voltages. and two of the three nodes have a current source giving rise to a nonzero term on the righthand side of the matrix equation.4118 Thus V3 = −0.36 BIOINSTRUMENTATION The three node equations are written in matrix format as ⎤⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ V1 6 −2 −2 −5 ⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ 9 −6⎦ ⎣V2 ⎦ = ⎣ 0⎦ ⎣−2 −4 −4 9 3 V3 Notice that the system matrix is no longer symmetrical because of the dependent current source. The supernode technique requires only one node equation in which the current. 0.2: A dependent voltage source is located between nodes 1 and 2. the current through the source is not easily expressed in terms of node voltages.4118 V. −2 9 − 6. Speciﬁcally. V = A\F V= −1.2. −4 −4 9]. In this situation.
ﬁnd V3 . We label the essential nodes as 1. The circuit has three essential nodes. For the following circuit. with the reference node at the bottom of the circuit and three node voltages. 1/5 Ω 1 + 1/4 Ω 2 + 1V 3 + 2A 1/2 Ω V1 1/3 Ω 1A V2 1/2 Ω V3 − − − . V1 .LINEAR NETWORK ANALYSIS 37 and 2 and the source as −V1 − V + V2 = 0 or V = V1 − V2 Example 5. 1/5 Ω 1/4 Ω 1V + 2A 1/2 Ω 1/3 Ω 1A 1/2 Ω V3 − Solution. 2 and 3 in the redrawn circuit. V2 and V3 as indicated.3. two of which are connected to an independent voltage source and form a supernode.
F = [2.8356 −0. .4110 0.38 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Summing the currents leaving node 1 gives −2 + 2V1 + 5 (V1 − V3 ) + 4 (V1 − V2 ) = 0 Simplifying gives 11V1 − 4V2 − 5V3 = 2 Nodes 2 and 3 are connected by an independent voltage source. giving −V2 + 1 + V3 = 0 or −V2 + V3 = −1 The two node and KVL equations are written in matrix format as ⎤ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎡ V1 2 11 −4 −5 ⎥ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎢ 7 7 ⎦ ⎣ V2 ⎦ = ⎣ 1 ⎦ ⎣ −9 −1 0 −1 1 V3 Solving with MATLAB gives A = [11 −4 −5.1644 Thus V3 = −0. −9 7 7. 1.1644. so we form a supernode 2 + 3. −1]. Summing the currents leaving the supernode 2 + 3 gives 4 (V2 − V1 ) + 3V2 − 1 + 2V3 + 5 (V3 − V1 ) = 0 Simplifying yields −9V1 + 7V2 + 7V3 = 1 The second supernode equation is KVL through the node voltages and the independent source. V = A\F V= 0. 0 −1 1].
All of our problems in this book involve planar circuits. Under special circumstances. In general. we deﬁne the meshcurrent direction for all meshes to be clockwise. the clockwise direction gives a voltage drop according to convention as R (I2 − I1 ). it is a powerful technique that simpliﬁes analysis of circuit problems as shown in the next example. are not measurable with an ammeter in that they do not equal a branch current. we move through the mesh in a clockwise direction by writing the voltage drops in terms of mesh currents. we draw the mesh currents with a circle. we write one equation for each mesh. . By convention.2 MESHCURRENT METHOD Another method for analyzing planar circuits is called the meshcurrent method. as in Fig.3. Moreover. 2. just the opposite as in mesh 1.3. arc or a surface on the inside perimeter of the mesh. Deﬁne the mesh currents in the circuit. The current through the branch is composed of the difference between the two mesh currents. here I = I1 − I2 . The meshcurrent method involves the following two steps: 1. In writing the mesh equation. the voltage drop across the resistor is V = RI = R (I1 − I2 ) when writing the equation for mesh 1. as in Fig. Whenever a circuit element is shared by two meshes. Write a set of mesh equations using KVL. When writing the mesh equation for mesh 2. The meshcurrent method provides a systematic process for solving circuit analysis problems with the application of KVL around each mesh. Even though the mesh current is not real. 5. A mesh is a closed path without any other closed paths within it and a planar circuit is a circuit without any overlapping branches. Moreover. I I1 R + V − I2 FIGURE 5.LINEAR NETWORK ANALYSIS 39 5. 5.3: Mesh currents. according to KCL I = I1 − I2 Mesh currents. the number of mesh equations may be fewer than the total number of meshes.
Mesh currents are always deﬁned in a clockwise direction.40 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Example 5. Find I in the following circuit. as illustrated in the redrawn circuit that follows. 2Ω I I1 10 V 4Ω I2 5V 3Ω Summing the voltage drops around mesh 1 gives −10 + 2I1 + 4 (I1 − I2 ) = 0 which simpliﬁes to 6I1 − 4I2 = 10 Summing the voltage drops around mesh 2 gives 4 (I2 − I1 ) + 3I2 + 5 = 0 .4. one for each mesh. 2Ω I 3Ω 10 V 4Ω 5V Solution. There are two meshes in this circuit.
3846 = 1. where the mesh current equals the branch current. 2Ω I1 3A I 3Ω I2 5V 10 V 2Ω I1 I 3Ω I2 5V 4Ω 3A FIGURE 5. The mesh current I1 equals the source current. we do not write a mesh equation because the current is known.1 on the structure and symmetry of the system matrix with the nodevoltage method also apply for the meshcurrent method. When one of the branches has an independent or dependent current source in the circuit. −5]. −4 7]. In this case.5385 A. .9231 0. as shown in Fig. 5. (Right) A current source in a branch between two meshes. The current source is located on the perimeter.3846 The current I is found from I = I1 − I2 = 1.4: (Left) A current source on the perimeter of a circuit.LINEAR NETWORK ANALYSIS 41 which simpliﬁes to −4I1 + 7I2 = −5 The two mesh equations are written in matrix form as 6 −4 −4 7 I1 10 = −5 I2 Comments made in Section 5.4. we handle both cases as follows: 1. giving A = [6 −4.4. a modiﬁcation must be made to the meshcurrent method.9231 − 0. We solve this problem with MATLAB. 5. Depending on whether the current source is on the outer perimeter or inside the circuit. as in the circuit on the left in Fig. F = [10. I = A\F I= 1.
The equation for mesh 2 is found by applying KVL.5. Here the KCL equation is I2 − I1 = 3. This circuit has four meshes. Since we cannot easily write the voltage drop across the current source. 2. The second equation is written using KCL for the current source and the two mesh currents. . A supermesh is formed by combing two meshes together. Find V0 as shown in the following circuit. as shown in the circuit diagram that follows. circumventing the voltage drop across the current source. so we do not write a mesh equation for it. which gives I2 = 1 A. but write simply I4 = 2 A. with one equation describing both meshes. 2A 2Ω + 3Ω 4Ω 3V V0 − IS = 2 V0 5Ω Solution. we form a supermesh. Example 5. giving 4 (I2 − I1 ) + 3I2 + 5 = 4 (I2 − 3) + 3I2 + 5 = 0. 5. the equation starts wit the ﬁrst mesh and continues on to the second mesh. Mesh 4 has a current source on the perimeter.42 BIOINSTRUMENTATION I1 = 3 A. In this case.4 (right). The current source is located within the circuit where the mesh current does not equal the branch current as shown in Fig. Here the supermesh equation is −10 + 2I1 + 3I2 + 5 = 0 Because there are two unknown currents. we need two independent equations.
Summing the voltages around supermesh 2 + 3 yields 3 (I2 − I1 ) + 4I2 + 5I3 = 0 which reduces to −3I1 + 7I2 + 5I3 = 0 Applying KCL for the dependent current source gives 2V0 = 2 × 3 (I1 − I2 ) = I3 − I2 yielding 6I1 − 5I2 − I3 = 0 . we form a supermesh for meshes 2 and 3.LINEAR NETWORK ANALYSIS 43 2A I4 2Ω I1 3V + 3Ω 4Ω I2 IS = 2 V0 I3 5Ω V0 − Summing the voltages around mesh 1 gives −3 + 2 (I1 − 2) + 3(I1 − I2 ) = 0 Simplifying gives 5I1 − 3I2 = 7 Since there is a dependent current source inside the circuit.
1 LINEARITY.0000 Thus. where • • A dead voltage source is a short circuit A dead current source is an open circuit In linear circuits with multiple independent sources. Dependent sources must remain in the circuit when applying this technique. Speciﬁcally for circuits.0000 21. the total response is obtained by summing the individual responses. 0]. the total response is the sum of each independent source taken one at a time. V0 = 3(I1 − I2 ) = 3(14 − 21) = 21 V 5. and they . This property is called the principle of superposition. and assuming the other sources are dead. Note carefully that this principle holds true solely for independent sources. After the circuit is analyzed with the ﬁrst source. the response to several independent sources is the sum of responses to each independent source with the other independent sources dead.0000 −21. it is set equal to a dead source and the next source is applied with the remaining sources dead. 0. When each of the sources have been analyzed. I = A\F I= 14. This analysis is carried out by removing all of the sources except one.3 5.3. SUPERPOSITION AND SOURCE TRANSFORMATIONS Linearity and Superposition If a linear system is excited by two or more independent sources. −3 7 5.44 BIOINSTRUMENTATION The three independent equations are written in matrix format as ⎤⎡ ⎤ ⎡ ⎤ ⎡ I1 5 −3 0 7 ⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ 7 5⎦ ⎣ I2 ⎦ = ⎣0⎦ ⎣−3 6 −5 −1 0 I3 Solution using MATLAB gives A = [5 − 3 0. F = [7. then the total response is the sum of the separate individual responses to each input. 6 − 5 − 1].
Using superposition. Generally. and that we cannot mix and match voltages and currents from one circuit with another. due to the 10 V source V010 = 10 8 2+8 = 8V . as shown in the following ﬁgure. 2Ω 3Ω + 10 V V0 2A 5Ω 3A − Solution. 2Ω 3Ω + 10 V V010 5Ω − The voltage divider rule easily gives the response. It should be apparent that voltages and currents in one circuit differ among circuits. This property is especially valuable when dealing with an input consisting of a pulse or delays. V010 . We start by analyzing the circuit with just the 10 V source active and the two current sources dead. ﬁnd V0 as shown in the following ﬁgure. These are considered in future sections. Example 5. superposition provides a simpler solution than is obtained by evaluating the total response with all of the applied sources.LINEAR NETWORK ANALYSIS 45 must be analyzed based on the current or voltage for which it is deﬁned.6.
5 A through each branch (2 + 3 ). consider the response. 2Ω 3Ω + V0 3 5Ω 3A − To ﬁnd V03 .2 − 3 = 8. Finally. RE Q = 2 (3 + 5) = 2×8 = 1.5 × 2 = −3 V. and the other two sources dead.46 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Next consider the 2 A source active.6 . The total response is given by the sum of the individual responses as V0 = V010 + V02 + V03 = 8 + 3. as shown in the following circuit.2 V This is the same result we would have found if we analyzed the original circuit directly using the nodevoltage or meshcurrent method.2 V. and V03 = −1. to the 3 A source as shown in the following ﬁgure. note that the 3 A current splits into 1.6 = 3. and 5 . V03 . 2Ω 3Ω + V0 2 2A 5Ω − Combining the resistors in an equivalent resistance. 2+8 and then applying Ohm’s law gives V02 = 2 × 1.
applying KCL . 3V0 3Ω + 5Ω + 10 V V0 2Ω V5 5A − − Solution. due to the 10 V source only with the 5 A source dead as shown in the following ﬁgure. the dependent current source is kept in the modiﬁed circuit and should not be set dead. As required during the analysis.7. Find the voltage across the 5 A current source. and that the current ﬂowing through the 5 resistor is 3V0 . 3V0 10 3Ω A + I=0A 5Ω 3 V0 10 + 10 V V 10 0 2Ω V5 10 − − Notice that no current ﬂows through the open circuit created by the dead current source. First consider ﬁnding the response. V010 . V5 . Therefore.LINEAR NETWORK ANALYSIS 47 Example 5. in the following ﬁgure using superposition.
2 = 6 V. giving 1. with the 10 V source dead.2 . due to the 5 A source. KVL gives −V010 − 5 × 3V010 + V510 = 0. KCL is then applied at node B to ﬁnd I5 . If Is = Vss as shown in the ﬁgure on the R right. and therefore V510 = 64 V. then the same current and voltage are seen in resistor Rl in either circuit as easily shown . V05 is easily calculated by Ohm’s law as V05 = 5 × 1. Finally. I5 = 3 × 6 + 5 = 23 A.3. giving −3V05 + I5 − 5 = 0 With V05 = 6 V. Consider the two circuits in Fig.5. apply KVL around the closed path −V05 − 5I5 + V55 = 0 or V55 = V05 + 5I5 = 6 + 5 × 23 = 121 V. 3V05 3Ω I5 B + + 5Ω V05 2Ω V55 5A − − First combine the two resistors in parallel (3 2 ).48 BIOINSTRUMENTATION at node A gives V010 − 10 V010 + + 3V010 − 3V010 = 0 3 2 which gives V010 = 4 V. Next consider ﬁnding the response. V05 .2 Equivalent Sources We call two sources equivalent if they each produce the same voltage and current regardless of the resistance. 5. The total response is given by the sum of the individual responses as V5 = V510 + V55 = 64 + 121 = 185 V 5.
For the circuit on the left.LINEAR NETWORK ANALYSIS 49 RS VS R1 Il + Vl − Il IS = V S RS RS R1 + Vl − FIGURE 5.5: Two equivalent circuits. using voltage and current divider rules. the resistor Rx has no effect on the circuit and can be removed. the current and voltage for Rl are Vl = Vs Rl Rl + Rs and Il = Vs Rl + Rs Rs Il Rs Il VS Rx R1 + Vl − VS R1 + Vl − Rx Il Il Is = Vs Rs Rs R1 + Vl − Is = V s Rs Rs R1 + Vl − FIGURE 5.6: Equivalent circuits. In both circuits on the left. .
5 (left) with the current source and Rs in the box in Fig. current sources in parallel and voltage sources in series.6.5 (right). We ﬁrst remove the 4 resistor since it is in series with the 3 A source and has no effect on the circuit. 5. 4V + 3A 2Ω 2Ω 2A 4Ω V0 − .8. and as indicated. 4Ω 4V + 2Ω 3A 2Ω 4V 4Ω V0 − Solution. 5.5 simpliﬁes the analysis of circuits. In the two circuits on the left. Consider Fig. the resistor Rx has no impact on the voltage and current on Rl . and transform the 2 resistor and 4 V source into a 4 = 2 A source in parallel with a 2 resistor as shown in the following 2 ﬁgure. 5. 5. We shall see that exchanging source plus resistor according to Fig. Notice that the current direction in the transformed source is in agreement with the polarity of the 4 V source. Example 5. we can replace the voltage source and Rs in the box in Fig. Our strategy in this solution involves combining resistors in series and parallel. the current and voltage for Rl are and Vl = Il Rl = Vs Rl Rl + Rs Vs Rl + Rs Therefore. these circuits can be replaced by the two circuits on the right by completely removing Rx . Use source transformations to ﬁnd V0 in the following ﬁgure.50 BIOINSTRUMENTATION For the circuit on the right with Is = Il = Is Rs Rl + Rs = Vs Rs .
4V + 1A 1Ω 4Ω V0 − Another source transformation is carried out on the current source and resistor in parallel as shown in the next ﬁgure. combining the two parallel current sources results in a 1 A source.LINEAR NETWORK ANALYSIS 51 As shown in the next ﬁgure. resulting in a 5 V source. 1Ω 4V + 1V 4Ω V0 − The two voltage sources are combined. and combining the two parallel resistors results in a 1 resistance. Using the voltage divider gives V0 = 5 4 4+1 = 4V .
.
The resistor RE Q is the resistance seen across the terminals A. can be used to replace any circuit that consists of independent and dependent voltage and current sources and resistors.B (that are not shown) as the load. A Norton equivalent circuit reduces the original circuit into a current source in parallel with a resistor (lower right of Fig.2.1). the load is not included in the simpliﬁcation because it is important for other analysis.1.B as shown in Fig. controlled sources. Recall that a dead voltage source is a short circuit and a dead current source is an open circuit.B) can be replaced by a single resistance and an independent source. 6. RE Q . and independent sources with two external terminals (A and B.53 CHAPTER 6 ´ Thevenin’s and Norton’s Theorems Any combination of resistances. these two theorems can be extended to any circuit composed of linear elements with two terminals. We refer to the circuit elements connected across the terminals A. VOC . VOC is equal to the open circuit voltage across terminals A. Although we focus here on sources and resistors. A Th´ venin equivalent circuit reduces the original circuit into e a voltage source in series with a resistor (upper right of Fig.1 ´ THEVENIN’S THEOREM Th´ venin’s Theorem states that an equivalent circuit consisting of an ideal voltage source. The Th´ venin equivalent circuit and Norton equivalent circuits are equivalent to the e original circuit in that the same voltage and current are observed across any load. 6. . 6.B when all sources are dead. such as maximum power expended by the load. These two theorems help reduce complex circuits into simpler circuits. and calculated using standard techniques such as the nodevoltage or meshcurrent methods. as shown in Fig. Usually. 6.1). 6. denoted A. e in series with an equivalent resistance.
is calculated across the terminals A.B using standard techniques such as nodevoltage or meshcurrent methods. and resistances VOC − B FIGURE 6. . A + Independent and dependent sources. VOC .1: A general circuit consisting of independent and dependent sources can be replaced by a voltage source (VOC ) in series with a resistor (RE Q ) or a current source (ISC ) in parallel with a resistor (RE Q ).54 BIOINSTRUMENTATION A REQ A VOC Independent and dependent sources. and resistances B Replaced by A B ISC REQ B FIGURE 6.2: The open circuit voltage.
Next. The open circuit voltage.B as shown in the following ﬁgure. 2Ω A + 10 V 2Ω 4A VOC − B The sum of currents leaving the node is VOC − 10 VOC + −4=0 2 2 and VOC = 9 V. RE Q is found by ﬁrst setting all sources dead (the current source is an open circuit and the voltage source is a short circuit).B for the . is easily found using the nodevoltage method as shown in the following circuit.1 Find the Th´ venin equivalent circuit with respect to terminals A. . ﬁrst e ﬁnding VOC and then solving for RE Q . VOC . and then ﬁnding the resistance seen from the terminals A. The solution to ﬁnding the Th´ venin equivalent circuit is done in two parts. e following circuit.´ THEVENIN’ S AND NORTON’ S THEOREMS 55 Example 6. 2Ω A 10 V 2Ω 4A B Solution.
can be used to replace any circuit that consists of independent and dependent voltage and current sources and resistors. in parallel with an equivalent resistance. 2 2 ). the A 9V B It is important to note that the circuit used in ﬁnding VOC is not to be used in ﬁnding RE Q as not all voltages and currents are relevant in the other circuit and one cannot simply mix and match. 6. The Th´ venin e . 6. ISC .56 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 2Ω A 2Ω B REQ From the previous circuit. and calculated using standard techniques such as the nodevoltage or meshcurrent methods.2 NORTON’S THEOREM Norton’s Theorem states that an equivalent circuit consisting of an ideal current source. Thus. it is clear that RE Q is equal to 1 Th´ venin equivalent circuit is e 1Ω (that is.B as shown in Fig.3. ISC is equal to the current ﬂowing through a short between terminals A. RE Q .
2Ω A 10 V 2Ω 4A B .B in Fig.2. (6.B for the following circuit.3: The short circuit current.3 are source I transformations of each other. Example 6. ISC .1).B.1) This is easily seen by shorting the terminals A. 6. and Norton equivalent circuits are related to each other according to RE Q = VOC ISC (6. and ﬁnding the current through the short using standard techniques such as nodevoltage or meshcurrent methods. is calculated by placing a short across the terminals A. The current ﬂowing through the OC short is VSC in agreement with Eq. 6. It should be clear that Figs.2 and 6.´ THEVENIN’ S AND NORTON’ S THEOREMS 57 A ISC Independent and dependent sources. and resistances B FIGURE 6. Find the Norton equivalent circuit with respect to terminals A.2.
6.58 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Solution. Applying KCL at the node denoted A. This circuit is the same as Ex. so RE Q = 1 . gives 0 = −I2 − 4 + ISC = −5 − 4 + ISC and ISC = 9 A. I2 + 10 V − A 2Ω ISC 10 V 4A B Note also that current I2 equals 5 A since the 10 V source is applied directly across the 2 resistor.B as shown in the following ﬁgure. therefore it is removed since no current ﬂows through it. 6. To ﬁnd ISC we place a short between the terminals A.1 since ISC = VOC 9 = =9A RE Q 1 . We could have found the current ISC directly from the solution of Ex.B.1. 2Ω A ISC 2Ω 10 V 4A B Note that the 2 resistor is in parallel with the short across terminals A. as shown in the next ﬁgure.
OC In this case we ﬁnd VOC and ISC .B for the fole lowing circuit. because the dependent e source has resistance.3 ´ DEPENDENT SOURCES AND THEVENIN AND NORTON EQUIVALENT CIRCUITS If a circuit connected to terminals A.´ THEVENIN’ S AND NORTON’ S THEOREMS 59 The Norton equivalent circuit is shown in the following ﬁgure. I Example 6. 3V1 3Ω + 2Ω 5Ω A 10 V V1 5A − B . the process for ﬁnding RE Q for either the Th´ venin or Norton equivalent circuit must be modiﬁed.3 Find the Th´ venin equivalent circuit with respect to terminals A. A 9A 1Ω B 6. and this resistance cannot be calculated when setting all sources dead.B contains dependent sources. and then calculate RE Q = VSC .
Summing the currents leaving node gives V1 − 10 V1 V1 + + + 3V1 = 0 3 2 5 and V1 = 100 121 V. . Applying KVL around mesh 2 to ﬁnd VOC gives 2 (I2 − I1 ) + 5 (I2 − I3 ) + VOC = 0 With I1 = 0 A. RE Q is found by RE Q = ﬁnd VOC using the meshcurrent method as labeled in the next ﬁgure. gives VOC = 185 V.60 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Solution. I2 = −5 A and I3 = 30 A. Since this circuit has a dependent source. 3V1 VOC . Next. we ﬁnd ISC using the nodevoltage method as labeled in the next ﬁgure. I2 = −5 A and I3 = 3V1 = 3 × 2 (I1 − I2 ) = 6I1 + 30. Summing the voltage drops around mesh 1 gives −10 + 3I1 + 2 (I1 − I2 ) = 0 Simplifying with I2 = −5 A gives I1 = 0 A. ISC Let’s ﬁrst I3 3Ω I1 10 V + 2Ω 5Ω I2 5A A + V1 VOC − − B Note that since there are two current sources on the perimeter of the circuit.
18 Ω = 185 7.65 = 24.18 . gives ISC = 7.65 A. The Th´ venin e A 185 V B . Therefore RE Q = 121 equivalent circuit is 24.´ THEVENIN’ S AND NORTON’ S THEOREMS 61 Applying KCL at terminal A gives 3V1 Δ 3Ω + 2Ω 5Ω A ISC 10 V V1 5A − B −3V1 − 5 − V1 + ISC = 0 5 VOC ISC With V1 = 100 .
.
A magnetic ﬁeld is established when current ﬂows through the coil. ..1. we examine the inductor. An inductor is a passive element that is able to store energy in a magnetic ﬁeld. a step change in current through an inductor is possible by applying a voltage that is a Dirac delta function. 7. a passive element that relates the voltage–current relationship with a differential equation. Circuits that contain inductors are written in terms of derivatives and integrals. and is made by winding a coil of wire around a core that is an insulator or a ferromagnetic material. For convenience.1) (i.e. i. We use the symbol to represent the inductor in a circuit. Physically. Any changes in the source are instantaneously observed in the response.1) The convention for writing the voltage drop across an inductor is similar to that of a resistor. The relationship between voltage and current for an inductor is given by v=L di dt (7.. a step input. we considered circuits involving sources and resistors that are described with algebraic equations. the inductors can be replaced by short circuits since the voltage drop across the inductors are zero. the derivative of current at the time of the instantaneous change is inﬁnity). have a response that is not instantaneous. the unit of measure for inductance is the henry or henries (H).e. (7. current cannot change instantaneously through an inductor since an inﬁnite voltage is required according to Eq. Any changes in the source with circuits that contain inductors. when a circuit has just DC currents (or voltages). Mathematically. as shown in Fig. In this section. but has natural response that changes exponentially and a forced response that is the same form as the source.63 CHAPTER 7 Inductors In the previous sections. where 1 H = 1 V s/A.
1. 6Ω 4Ω 4Ω I 5V 2Ω 5H 3H 1H 3H .1: An inductor.64 BIOINSTRUMENTATION i + v L − FIGURE 7. Find I in the following circuit. 5A 2H + v − Solution. given that the source has been applied for a very long time. Example 7. Find v in the following circuit. Example 7.2. Accordingly. v=L di d (5) =2× =0 dt dt This example shows that an inductor acts like a short circuit to DC current.
we ﬁnd the total resistance seen by the source and use Ohm’s law as follows: RE Q = 6 therefore. We use Eq. (7. i (A) 1 i 2H + v − 0 1 2 3 t (s) Solution. The solution to this problem is best approached by breaking it up into time intervals consistent with the changes in input current. Clearly for t < 0 and t > 2. only DC current ﬂows in the circuit and the inductors can be replaced by short circuits as shown in the following ﬁgure. 6Ω 4Ω 4Ω 2Ω 2Ω I 6V To ﬁnd I .1) to determine the voltage in the other two intervals as follows. I= 6 =3 2 ((4 4) + (2 2)) = 2 Example 7.INDUCTORS 65 Solution.3. . Find v in the following circuit. the current is zero and therefore v = 0. Since the source has been applied for a very long time.
as is often the case in solving circuit problems.2) reduces to 1 i(t) = L t v (λ) d λ −∞ (7.1) deﬁnes the voltage across an inductor for a given current. and therefore Eq. the input is i = −(t − 2) .1) by multiplying both sides by d t. Suppose one is given a voltage across an inductor and asked to ﬁnd the current. which means i(t0 ) is a positive quantity. . the initial current is by deﬁnition equal to zero. We start from Eq. (7.2) reduces to 1 i(t) = L 0 t v (λ) d λ + i(0) (7. Eq. and v=L d (t) di =2 = 2V dt dt For 1 ≤ t ≤ 2 In this interval. the input is i = t. and di d (− (t − 2)) =2 = −2 V dt dt Equation (7. then i(t0 ) is negative.66 BIOINSTRUMENTATION For 0 < t < 1 In this interval.2) For t0 = 0. If the direction of i(t0 ) is in the opposite direction of i (as will happen when we write node equations). (7. (7. (7.2).4) The initial current in Eq.3) and for t0 = −∞. i(t0 ). is usually deﬁned in the same direction as i. giving v=L v (t) d t = Ldi Integrating both sides yields t i(t) v (λ) d λ = L t0 i(t0 ) dα or 1 i(t) = L t v (λ) d λ + i(t0 ) t0 (7.
From Eq.4. we assume that the initial current is zero and thus the total energy is given by w(t) = 1 2 Li 2 (7. v 2H Solution. power is not consumed as heat. At time equal to negative inﬁnity.6) =L i(t0 ) i di = 1 L [i(t)]2 − [i(t0 )]2 2 where the unit of energy is joules ( J). (7. as happens in a resistor. it absorbs power according to the relationship Within the inductor. but stored as energy in the magnetic ﬁeld around the coil during any period of time [t0 .2).1 POWER AND ENERGY p = vi = Li di dt (7. t] as t t w(t) − w (t0 ) = t0 p dt = L t0 i(t) i di dt dt (7.7) . we have 1 i(t) = L =2 = t t0 1 vd λ + i(t0 ) = 2 0 t 4e −3λ 1 d λ + i(0) = 2 0 t 4e −3λ d λ + 2 e −3 −3λ t λ=0 +2 2 4 − e −3t u(t)V 3 7.INDUCTORS 67 Example 7. Find i for t ≥ 0 if i(0 ) = 2 A and v(t) = 4e i −3t u(t) in the following circuit.5) Since the inductor is a passive element.
68 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Any energy stored in the magnetic ﬁeld is recoverable. the input is v = 2t. energy is being stored in the inductor. If power is negative in Eq. v (V) i +2 v 2H 0 −2 1 2 t (s) Solution. the input is v = 2 (t − 2). As before.5) can be applied to ﬁnd the power. (7. and 1 i(t) = L 1 t 1 v (λ)d λ + i(1) = 2 1 t 2 (λ − 2)d λ + 1 2 = t − 2t + 2 A 2 2 .5. energy is being extracted from the inductor. the solution is best approached by breaking it up into time intervals consistent with the changes in input voltage. (7. We ﬁrst solve for current so that Eq. If power is positive. and 1 i(t) = L 0 t 1 v (λ) d λ + i(0) = 2 0 t 2λ d λ = t2 A 2 Power for this interval is t2 =t3 W 2 The current at t = 1 needed for the initial condition in the next part is p = vi = 2t × i(1) = t2 2 = t=1 1 A 2 For 1 ≤ t ≤ 2 In this interval. Example 7. For 0 < t < 1 In this interval. Find the inductor power in the following circuit for t > 0 when i(0) = 0 A.5).
. power is p = vi = 2 (t − 2) × t2 − 2t + 2 = t 3 − 6t 2 + 12t − 8 W 2 For t > 2 Power is zero in this interval since the voltage is zero.INDUCTORS 69 Accordingly.
.
A. as C= εA d (8. Figure 8. or Teﬂon. Dielectric materials.3) As described. Using the relationship between current and charge. We use the symbol C to denote a capacitor.2) The capacitance of a capacitor is determined by the permittivity of the dielectric (ε = 8. most capacitors are measured in terms of microfarads (1 μF = 10−6 F) or picofarads (1 pF = 10−12 F).71 CHAPTER 8 Capacitors A capacitor is a device that stores energy in an electric ﬁeld by charge separation when appropriately polarized by a voltage.1) is written in a more useful form for circuit analysis problems as i= dq dv =C dt dt (8. The charge separation caused by the polarization of the dielectric is proportional to the external voltage and given by q (t) = C v (t) (8.2) that dielectric . air. as James Clerk Maxwell hypothesized when he described the uniﬁed electromagnetic theory. that is.1) where C represents the capacitance of the element. the capacitor physically consists of two conducting surfaces that stores charge. separated by a thin insulating material that has a very large resistance. where 1 F = 1 C/V. Rather. current does not ﬂow through the capacitor plates. Eq.854 × 10−12 F/M for air) that ﬁlls the gap between the parallel plates. The unit of measure for capacitance is the farad or farads (F). a displacement current ﬂows internally between capacitor plates and this current equals the current ﬂowing into the capacitor and out of the capacitor. In actuality. It should be clear from Eq. and the crosssectional area of the plates. the size of the gap between the plates. mica. Thus KCL is maintained. (8.1 illustrates a capacitor in a circuit. contain a large number of electric dipoles that become polarized in the presence of an electric ﬁeld. d . (8. Simple capacitors consist of parallel plates of conducting material that are separated by a gap ﬁlled with a dielectric material.
72 BIOINSTRUMENTATION i v C FIGURE 8. 2F 2H 4H 2H 2F 4A 2Ω 1F 3Ω 2Ω I . Suppose v = 5 V and C = 2 F for the circuit shown in Fig.1: Circuit with a capacitor. Find I in the following circuit given that the current source has been applied for a very long time. Example 8.2. Example 8. Solution. capacitors act as open circuits when DC currents are present. i =C dv d =2× (5) = 0 dt dt A capacitor is an open circuit to DC voltage. 8. materials do not conduct DC currents.1 Find i.1.
Furthermore the inductors can be replaced by short circuits and capacitors can be replaced by open circuits. Find i for the following circuit. i v (V) 1 v 2F 0 1 2 t (s) Solution.2) is used to determine the current for each interval as follows. For nonzero values. Equation (8.CAPACITORS 73 Solution. For t < 0 and t > 2. only DC current ﬂows in the circuit. v = 0 V. Since the source has been applied for a very long time. I 4A 2Ω 2Ω To ﬁnd I .3. and therefore i = 0 in this interval. For 0 < t < 1 i =C dv d =2× (t) = 2 A dt dt . we use the current divider law as I =4× 1 2 1 2 + 1 2 =2A Example 8. v = t V for 0 ≤ t ≤ 1. the voltage waveform is described with two different functions. and v = −(t − 2) V for 1 < t ≤ 2. as shown in the following ﬁgure.
we start from Eq. Equation (8. then v(t0 )is negative. Suppose one is given a current through a capacitor and asked to ﬁnd the voltage. (8. (8. is usually deﬁned with the same polarity as v.4) reduces to 1 v(t) = C t i (λ) d λ −∞ (8. If the polarity of v(t0 ) is in the opposite direction of v (as will happen when we write mesh equations). To have a step change in voltage across a capacitor requires that an inﬁnite current ﬂow through the capacitor. .4) id t + v(0) (8.2) by multiplying both sides by dt.6) The initial voltage in Eq. which is not physically possible.4) reduces to 1 v(t) = C 0 t t id t + v(t0 ) t0 (8. which means v(t0 ) is a positive quantity. this is mathematically possible using a Dirac delta function. (8. To ﬁnd the voltage.74 BIOINSTRUMENTATION For 1 ≤ t ≤ 2 i =C dv d =2× (− (t − 2)) = −2 A dt dt Voltage cannot change instantaneously across a capacitor. giving i(t) d t = C d v Integrating both sides yields t v(t) i(λ) d λ = C t0 v(t0 ) dv or 1 v(t) = C For t0 = 0.4). v(t0 ). Eq.2) deﬁnes the current through a capacitor for a given voltage. Of course. (8. Eq.5) and for t0 = −∞.
4. The current waveform is described with three different functions: for the interval t ≤ 0. (8.6) for each interval as follows. To ﬁnd the voltage. for the interval 0 < t ≤ 2. we apply Eq. is (A) 2 + is v 2F − 0 2 t (s) Solution. For t < 0 1 v(t) = C For 0 ≤ t ≤ 2 1 v(t) = C 0 t t −∞ 1 i dt = 2 0 0 dt = 0 V −∞ i d t + v(0) and with v(0) = 0.CAPACITORS 75 Example 8.we have 1 v(t) = 2 0 t λ dλ = 1 2 λ2 2 t = 0 t2 V 4 The voltage at t = 2 needed for the initial condition in the next part is v(2) = For t > 2 1 v(t) = C 2 t t2 4 = 1V t=2 1 i d t + v(2) = 2 2 t 0 d t + v(2) = 1 V . and for t > 2. Find v for the circuit that follows.
9) 2 Any energy stored in the electric ﬁeld is recoverable.7) The capacitor is a passive element that absorbs power according to the relationship dv dt Energy is stored in the electric ﬁeld during any period of time [t0 . If power is positive.8) =C v(t0 ) 1 v d v = C([v(t)]2 − [v (t0 )]2 ) 2 where the unit of energy is joules ( J).2). we assume that the initial voltage is zero and thus the total energy is given by 1 w(t) = C v2 (8.5. ⎧ t<0 ⎪0 A dv ⎨ i(t) = C = 4t A 0≤t≤1 ⎪ dt ⎩ −2e −(t−1) A t > 1 . energy is being stored in the capacitor. ⎧ t<0 ⎪0 V ⎨ vs (t) = t 2 V 0≤t≤1 ⎪ ⎩ −(t−1) e V t>1 i vs 2F Solution.76 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 8.1 POWER AND ENERGY p = vi = C v (8. Find the power and energy for the following circuit.7). If power is negative in Eq. To ﬁnd the power. Example 8. we ﬁrst need to ﬁnd the current calculated from Eq. (8. t] as t t w(t) − w (t0 ) = t0 p dt = C t0 v(t) v dv dt dt (8. energy is being extracted from the capacitor. At time equal to negative inﬁnity. (8.
8). we calculate the energy stored in the electric ﬁeld during time interval [0. From Eq. ⎧ t<0 ⎪0 ⎨ 1 w(t) = C v2 = 1 × 2[t 2 ]2 = t 4 J 0≤t≤1 ⎪2 2 ⎩1 −(t−1) 2 −2(t−1) × 2[e ] =e J t>1 2 Note that energy is being stored in the interval 0 ≤ t ≤ 1 since power is positive.CAPACITORS 77 Equation (8. 1] as w(1) − w(0) = 1 × 2(v(1)2 − v(0)2 ) = 1 J 2 and the energy delivered from the electric ﬁeld in the interval [1.7) is used to ﬁnd the power as follows.9) as follows. (8. (8. ⎧ t<0 ⎪0 ⎨ 2 3 p(t) = v · i = t · 4t = 4t W 0≤t≤1 ⎪ ⎩ −(t−1) · (−2e −(t−1) ) = −2e −2(t−1) W t > 1 e The energy in each interval is calculated using Eq. and energy is being extracted from the electric ﬁeld by the source for t > 1 since power is negative. ∞] as w (∞) − w (1) = 1 × 2(v (∞)2 − v (1)2 ) = −1 J 2 .
.
consider N inductors connected in parallel as shown in Fig. Since the same current ﬂows through each inductor. whereby L E Q = L1 + L2 + · · · + L N (9. it is possible to reduce complex inductor and capacitor circuits into simpler. Consider the following circuit consisting of N inductors in series. equivalent circuits by combining series and parallel collections of like elements. the current through each inductor is ii = Li v0 d t + ii (t0 ). t0 Applying KCL on the upper node of this circuit gives ⎡ ⎤ t N 1 ⎣ v0 d t + ii (t0 )⎦ is = Li i=1 t0 1 1 1 + + ··· + = L1 L2 LN = 1 LEQ t0 t t N v0 d t + t0 i=1 ii (t0 ) v0 d t + is (t0 ) . inductors connected in a series can be replaced by an equivalent inductance.1. Applying KVL on this circuit gives d vs = v1 + v2 + · · · + vN di di di = L1 + L2 + · · · + L N dt dt dt di = (L1 + L2 + · · · + L N ) dt di = LEQ dt Thus. Since the same t 1 voltage is across each inductor. 9. the voltage drop across each inductor is vi = Li dit .79 CHAPTER 9 Inductance and Capacitance Combinations As with resistors.1) Next.
2: (Left) N inductors in parallel. .2) 1 L1 + 1 L2 1 LN For the case of two inductors in parallel.2) are similar to the results we found for resistors in series and parallel. and the process used for simplifying resistor circuits is the same used for inductors in series and parallel. Thus. + i1 i2 iN + is v0 − L1 L2 LN is v0 − FIGURE 9. Eq. inductors connected in parallel can be replaced by an equivalent inductance. (Right) An equivalent circuit for inductors in series.1: (Left) N inductors in series.3) Equations (9.1) and (9.2) reduces to LEQ = L1 L2 L1 + L2 (9. (9. (Right) An equivalent circuit for inductors in parallel. whereby LEQ = 1 + ··· + (9.80 BIOINSTRUMENTATION i + v1 − L1 + v2 − L2 + i vs LN vN − vs L EQ FIGURE 9.
The equivalent inductance is found by forming series and parallel combinations from right to left until it reduces to a single inductance as shown in the following ﬁgure.1. Find L E Q for the following circuit. 1H 4H 2H 6H 6H 4H 2H L EQ Solution.INDUCTANCE AND CAPACITANCE COMBINATIONS 81 Example 9. 1H 4H 2H 6H 6H 4H 2H L EQ 2 +2= 4 H 4 4=2 H 4 +2 = 6 H 6 6 6=2H 1+2=3H If follows that L E Q = 1 + (6 6 (4 + (4 (2 + 2)))) =1+ 6 6 1 1 6 4+ 1 4 1 + 1 4 =1+ + 1 6 + 1 6 = 1 + 2 = 3H .
the current through each inductor is ii = Ci ddvt0 . Next. 9. (Right) An equivalent circuit for capacitors in series.4) Next. as shown in Fig.3. consider N capacitors connected in parallel.82 BIOINSTRUMENTATION + + is v0 − C1 C2 CN v0 − CN FIGURE 9.3: (Left) N capacitors in parallel. consider N capacitors connected in series as shown in Fig. 9.4: (Left) N capacitors in series.4. the voltage across each inductor is vi = Ci i d t + vi (t0 ). . (Right) An equivalent circuit for capacitors in parallel. whereby C E Q = C1 + C2 + · · · + C N (9. t0 Applying KVL around this circuit gives C1 i + v1 − C2 i + v2 − + + CN vs vN vs vN − − C EQ FIGURE 9. Since the same voltage is across each capacitor. Applying KCL on the upper node of this circuit gives is = C1 d v0 d v0 d v0 + C2 + · · · + CN dt dt dt d v0 dt = CEQ Thus. capacitors connected in series can be replaced by an equivalent capacitance. Since the same t 1 current ﬂows through each capacitor.
and capacitors in series as resistors in parallel. Reduce the following circuit to a single capacitor and inductor.5) and (9. from right to left.2.5 H. respectively.6) are similar to the results we found for resistors in parallel and series. . of inductors and capacitors until the analysis reduces the circuit to a single inductance and capacitance. That is.5) For the case of two capacitors in series.5 H 2H 3F 3H 2H 2H 6F Solution. we treat capacitors in parallel using the techniques for resistors in series.6) Equations (9. The equivalent inductance is found by forming series and parallel combinations.⎣1 vs = Ci i=1 N ⎡ INDUCTANCE AND CAPACITANCE COMBINATIONS t ⎤ 83 i d t + vi (t0 )⎦ t0 t N 1 1 1 = + + ··· + C1 C2 CN = 1 CEQ t0 t i dt + t0 i=1 vi (t0 ) i d t + vs (t0 ) Thus. Eq. Consider the inductors ﬁrst as shown in the following ﬁgure on the right. (9. Also note that the two parallel capacitors equal 6 F. Example 9.5) reduces to CEQ = C1 C2 C1 + C2 (9. 6F 3F 0. capacitors connected in series can be replaced by an equivalent capacitance. which results in 1. whereby CEQ = 1 C1 + 1 C2 1 + ··· + 1 CN (9.
5 = 2 H 6 6 6=2F The ﬁnal reduced circuit is shown in the following ﬁgure.5 H 6F 3F 2H 3F 3H 2H 2H 6F 2 2=1H 2+1=3H 3+3=6F 3 3 = 1. 1 6 6 6 0.5 + 1.84 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 0.5 H Next we slide the 1.5 H equivalent inductance to the left past the capacitors as shown in the following ﬁgure. 2H 2F . and the three capacitors in series (treated like resistors in parallel) equal 1 + 1 + 1 = 2 F.5 H 6F 6F 6F 0. The two series inductors equal 2 H.5 H 1.
i 400 Ω i1 + i2 200 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 3H v 6H − Solution (a) For ease in solution. ﬁrst simplify the circuit by combining the three resistors as RE Q = 400 + and two inductors as L E Q = 3×6 3+6 1 1 200 + 1 300 + 1 600 = 500 = 2 H as shown in the following circuit. Recall that the voltage drop across an inductor is vL = L dit . i + 500 Ω i v 2H − We use the meshcurrent method to ﬁnd v(t) as follows. (c) Find the energy dissipated in the resistors between t = 0 and t = ∞.3. i1 (t). (a) Find i(t). so we have d 500i + 2 di =0 dt . (d) Find the energy trapped in the inductors at t = ∞.INDUCTANCE AND CAPACITANCE COMBINATIONS 85 The next example illustrates how to simplify a circuit and then apply the meshcurrent method to solve for unknown currents. (b) Find the initial energy stored in the inductors. Example 9. i2 (t) and v(t) for the following circuit for t ≥ 0 given i1 (0− ) = 5 A and i2 (0− ) = 15 A.
i1 (0− ) = i1 (0+ ) = 5 A.86 BIOINSTRUMENTATION or di + 250i = 0 dt The previous differential equation has the characteristic equation s + 250 = 0 with root s = −250 and solution i(t) = K 1 e −250t A Note that the forced response is zero since there is no input.5 J 2 2 2 2 .7. i2 (0− ) = i2 (0+ ) = 15 A and i(0− ) = i(0+ ) = i1 (0+ ) + i2 (0+ ) = 20 A To determine K 1 we use i(0) = 20 = K 1 . For t ≥ 0 d 0 v (t) = 2 and 1 i1 (t) = 3 0 t di = −10000e −250t u(t) V dt (−10000e −250λ 40 −250λ e ) dλ + 5 = 3 t λ=0 +5= 40 −250t 40 e +5 − 3 3 40 −250t 25 − e A 3 3 t 1 40 −250λ e (−10000e −250λ ) d λ + 15 = i2 (t) = 6 6 = 0 t λ=0 + 15 = 20 −250t 20 45 e + − 3 3 3 = 20 −250t 25 + e A 3 3 Naturally i(t) = i1 (t) + i2 (t) = 20e −250t u(t) A. (b) From Eq. To ﬁnd t 1 i1 (t) and i2 (t) we ﬁnd v(t) = L E Q dit and then use ii (t) = Li v d t + ii (0). Thus. Because the energy stored in an inductor cannot change instantaneously. our solution is i(t) = 20e −250t u(t) A. the total initial energy stored in the inductors equals w L (0) = 1 1 1 1 2 2 L1 i1 + L2 i2 = × 3 × 52 + × 6 × 152 = 712. 7.
L E Q . Note that the initial energy stored in the equivalent inductor is 1 × 2 × (20)2 = 400 J.1667 J = 208. . is zero. and that the energy dissipated in the 2 resistors equals the energy stored in the equivalent inductor at t = 0.333 J Notice that energy trapped in the two inductors equals the total initial stored energy minus the energy dissipated in the resistors.INDUCTANCE AND CAPACITANCE COMBINATIONS 87 (c) The energy dissipated in the resistors equals ∞ ∞ w RE Q = 0 ∞ RE Q i 2 (t) d t = 0 500 × (20e −250t )2 d t ∞ 0 = 0 500 × 400e −500t d t = − 400e −500t = 400 J (d) The energy trapped in the inductors at t = ∞ equals 25 1 1 2 w1 (∞) = L1 i1 (∞) = × 3 × − 2 2 3 w2 (∞) = 1 1 2 L2 i2 (∞) = × 6 × 2 2 25 3 2 2 = 104. the energy stored in the equivalent inductor. Also note that while energy is trapped in the two inductors at t = ∞.
.
Consider the circuit shown in Fig. we apply the nodevoltage and meshcurrent methods to write equations involving integrals and differentials using element relationships for resistors. With the reference node at the bottom of the circuit. When writing the nodevoltage ˙ equations.1. we can solve for unknown currents and voltages of interest. From these equations.1. as shown in the following redrawn circuit. 10. L1 C1 vs(t) R1 R2 C2 Solution.1. Example 10. Write the node equations for the following circuit for t ≥ 0 if the initial conditions are zero. In this case. the absence of parallel or series combinations of resistors. inductors or capacitors prevents us from simplifying the circuit for ease in solution. the current through a capacitor is ic = C v.89 CHAPTER 10 A General Approach to Solving Circuits Involving Resistors. where v˙ is the derivative of the . 10. we have two essential nodes. as in Ex. Capacitors and Inductors Sometimes a circuit consisting of resistors. In this section. inductors and capacitors. Recall that the node involving the voltage source is a known voltage and that we do not write a node equation for it. inductors and capacitors cannot be simpliﬁed by bringing together like elements in series and parallel combinations.
the term i L (0) = 0. Since the initial conditions are zero. 0 where v is the voltage across the inductor. 1 voltage across the capacitor.90 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 5H 1F 3Ω 2H 3F 2Ω 4F FIGURE 10.1: A circuit that cannot be simpliﬁed. and the current through an inductor is i L = L vd λ + i L (0). t L1 1 C1 vs(t) R1 + R2 2 + v1 C2 v2 − − Summing the currents leaving node 1 gives C1 (v˙1 − v˙s ) + which simpliﬁes to C1 v˙1 + 1 1 1 v1 − + v 2 = C1 v˙s R1 R2 R2 t v1 v1 − v2 + =0 R1 R2 Summing the currents leaving node 2 gives v2 − v1 1 + C2 v˙2 + R2 L1 (v 2 − vs ) d λ = 0 0 .
this gives 1 1 1 1 ¨ v˙2 − v˙1 + C2 v2 + v2 − vs = 0 R2 R2 L1 L1 and after rearranging yields ¨ v2 + 1 1 1 1 v˙2 + v˙1 = v2 − vs C2 R2 C 2 L1 C2 R2 C 2 L1 When applying the nodevoltage method. let us assume that the values for the circuit elements are R1 = R2 = 1 . ¨ ¨ v 1 + 3v1 + 2v˙1 + 2v 1 = v s + vs + v˙s − vs .. C1 = C2 = 1 F. . and L1 = 1 H.. .. we solve for v 2 . giving us v˙1 + 2v 1 − v 2 = v˙s and ¨ v2 + v˙2 + v 2 − v˙1 = vs ¨ Using the ﬁrst equation.. we have .GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS 91 Typically. and assume that we are interested in obtaining a single differential equation involving node voltage v 1 and its derivatives.1. The easiest case involves a node equation containing an undesired node voltage without its derivatives... calculate v˙2 and v2 .. For ease in analysis.. we generate one equation for each essential node.. 10. we eliminate integrals in the node equations by differentiating. . v 2 = v˙1 + 2v 1 − v˙s ¨ ¨ v˙2 = v1 + 2v˙1 − vs . and then substitute into the second equation as follows.. and the input.. Another method for creating a single differential equation is to use the D operator. When applied to the previous expression. To write a single differential equation involving just one node voltage and the inputs. ¨ ¨ ¨ v 1 + 2v1 − v s + v1 + 2v˙1 − vs + v˙1 + 2v 1 − v˙s − v˙1 = vs and after simplifying . ¨ ¨ v 2 = v 1 + 2v 1 − v s After substituting into the second node equation. we use the other node equations and substitute into the node equation of the desired node voltage.. Consider the node equations for Ex. Sometimes this involves differentiation as well as substitution.
. two capacitors are connected directly to a voltage source. .. In Fig. 10. It should be clear that in the previous equation. speciﬁcally voltages and the inputs. there is an algebraic relationship . the order of the differential equation relating a single output variable and the inputs is equal to the number of energy storing elements in the circuit (capacitors and inductors). the two node equations are written as (D + 2)v 1 − v 2 = Dvs (D 2 + D + 1)v 2 − Dv 1 = vs Solving the ﬁrst equation for v 2 gives v 2 = (D + 2) − Dvs . the order of the differential equation is less than the number of capacitors and inductors in the circuit.92 BIOINSTRUMENTATION The D operator also provides us the means to write the two differential equations as a single differential equation involving only v 1 and vs . that is. ¨ ¨ v 1 + 3v1 + 2v˙1 + 2v 1 = v s + vs + v˙s − vs which is the same expression we calculated before. This occurs when capacitor voltages and inductor currents are not independent. In some circuits. 10. that is. In general. This occurs when capacitors are connected directly to a voltage source or when inductors are connected directly to a current source as shown in Fig.2A. v 1 (t) and v 2 (t) are not independent.. KVL applied around the outer loop gives −v(t) + v 1 (t) + v 2 (t) = 0 or v(t) = v 1 (t) + v 2 (t) where v 1 (t) and v 2 (t) are the voltages across the two capacitors. In terms of the D operator. there is an algebraic relationship between the capacitor.. the result is .2A and B. and after substituting v 2 into the second equation yields (D 2 + D + 1)(D + 2)v 1 − D(D 2 + D + 1)vs − Dv 1 = vs Upon simpliﬁcation (D 3 + 3D 2 + 2D + 2)v 1 = (D 3 + D 2 + D + 1)vs Returning to the differential notation. or the inductor currents and the inputs.
10. By including an internal resistance Rs in the circuit. if v 1 (t) is known. 10.2: (A). The same situation occurs with two inductors connected directly to a current source as in Fig. between the two. . (C). 10. 10. and the resulting differential equation is of thirdorder.2A and B are rare in realistic situations. the two circuits in Fig.1 has three energy storing elements (two capacitors and one inductor). KCL applied at the upper node gives i(t) = i1 (t) + i2 (t) As before. For example. Rs (called an internal resistance—a small resistance for voltage source and a large resistance for a current source). with no algebraic relationships between voltages and currents.2C and D since the voltage and current sources are more appropriately modeled with a resistance within the ideal source. as expected.GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS 93 A + v1(t) − + v2(t) − B i1(t) C1 i(t) R2 C2 L1 L2 R1 i2(t) R2 R1 v (t) C RS + v1(t) − + v2(t) − D is(t) C1 i(t) R2 C2 Rs L1 L2 i1(t) R1 i2(t) R2 R1 v (t) FIGURE 10. Circuits with the characteristics of Fig. 10. then v 2 (t) = v(t) − v 1 (t). (B) Circuits described by ﬁrstorder differential equations and having algebraic relationships between the voltages and currents. Notice that the circuit given in Ex.2A and B are better described by those in Fig. we no longer have any algebraic relationships among the voltages and currents. (D) Circuits described by secondorder differential equations. currents i1 (t) and i2 (t) are not independent: there exists an algebraic relationship between the currents.2B.
L1 i3 R2 R1 vs(t) i1 i2 C2 C1 Summing the voltage drops around mesh 1 gives 1 −vs + C1 t (i1 − i3 )d λ + R1 (i1 − i2 ) = 0 0 Differentiating and rearranging the previous equation gives R1 di1 di2 d vs 1 1 i1 − R1 i3 = + + dt C1 dt C1 dt Summing the voltage drops around mesh 2 gives 1 R1 (i2 − i1 ) + R2 (i2 − i3 ) + C2 t i2 d λ = 0 0 Differentiating and rearranging the previous equation gives (R1 + R2 ) 1 di1 di3 di2 + − R2 =0 i2 − R1 dt C2 dt dt .1 for t ≥ 0 if the initial conditions are zero. Solution. vC (0+ ) = 0.2. 10.94 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Example 10. There are three meshes in this circuit. To write the t 1 meshcurrent equations. Write the meshcurrent equations for the circuit in Ex. Since the initial conditions are zero. 0 where i is the resultant current (sum of mesh currents) through the capacitor. and the voltage across a inductor vL = L dd t i where dd t i is the derivative of the resultant current through the inductor. recall that the voltage across a capacitor is vC = C i d λ + vC (0+ ). as shown in the following ﬁgure.
summing the voltage drops around mesh 3 gives di3 1 L1 + R2 (i3 − i2 ) + dt C1 t (i3 − i1 )d λ = 0 0 Differentiating and rearranging the previous equation gives L1 1 1 d 2 i3 di3 di2 + − + R2 i3 − R2 i1 = 0 2 dt dt C1 dt C1 The previous two examples involved a circuit with zero initial conditions. When circuits involve nonzero initial conditions. Write the node equations for the following circuit for t ≥ 0 assuming the initial conditions are i L1 (0) = 8 A and i L2 (0) = −4 A.GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS 95 Finally. i L1 10 Ω 1H 2H i L2 vs 1F 2F 3F Solution. our approach remains the same as before except that the initial inductor currents are included when writing the nodevoltage and the initial capacitor voltages are included when writing the meshcurrent equations. 1 10 Ω + i L1 1H + 2 i L2 2H + 3 vs v1 1F v2 2F v3 3F − − − . Example 10. we have three essential nodes as shown in the redrawn circuit that follows. With the reference node at the bottom of the circuit.3.
If we were to write a single differential equation involving just one node voltage and the input.1 DISCONTINUITIES AND INITIAL CONDITIONS IN A CIRCUIT Discontinuities in voltage and current occur when an input such as a unit step is applied or a switch is thrown in a circuit. if the inputs to a circuit are known for all time. so our discussion here is focused on time zero. Notice that the sign for the initial inductor current is negative because the direction is from right to left and the current is deﬁned on the circuit diagram in the opposite direction for the node 2 equation. which would have eliminated the initial inductor currents from the nodeequations. the initial node voltage for the variable selected. typically the output variable and its (n − 1) derivatives at the time the input is applied or switch thrown. To solve the differential equation. when solving an nth order differential equation one must know n initial conditions. As we have seen. Almost all of our problems involve the input applied at time zero. we have not simpliﬁed the node equations by differentiating to remove the integral. a ﬁfthorder differential equation would result because there are ﬁve energy storing elements in the circuit. but may be easily extended to any time an input is applied. as well as the ﬁrst through fourth derivatives at time zero. 10. Summing the currents leaving node 3 gives 1 2 0 t (v3 − v 2 )d λ + 4 + 3v˙3 = 0 In this example. . As we will see.96 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Summing the currents leaving node 1 gives (v 1 − vs ) + v˙1 + 10 0 t (v 1 − v 2 ) d λ + 8 = 0 where i L1 (0) = 8 A. we would need ﬁve initial conditions. we can solve for initial conditions directly based on energy considerations and not depend on being provided with them in the problem statement. Summing the currents leaving node 2 gives t 1 (v2 − v1 )d λ − 8 + 2v˙2 + 2 0 t (v2 − v3 )d λ − 4 = 0 0 where i L2 (0) = −4 A.
we analyze the circuit at t = 0+ . we analyze the circuit at t = 0− . since the capacitor voltage cannot change in . Thus at steady state at t = 0− . we replace all inductors by short circuits and capacitors by open circuits in the circuit. especially at a time when a unit step is applied or when a switch is thrown. other variables can have discontinuities. we replace the inductors with current sources whose values are the currents at t = 0− . We then solve for the appropriate currents and voltages in the circuit to ﬁnd the currents through the inductors (actually the shorts connecting the sources and resistors) and voltages across the capacitors (actually the open circuits among the sources and resistors). and any applicable sources. Moreover. The initial conditions for variables not associated with current through an inductor and voltage across a capacitor at times of a discontinuity are determined only from the initial conditions from variables associated with current through an inductor and voltage across a capacitor. a discontinuity is allowed for the derivative of the current through an inductor and voltage across a capacitor at t = 0− and t = 0+ since vL (0+) di L (0+) = dt L and d vC (0+) iC (0+) = dt L as discontinuities are allowed in vL (0+) and iC (0+). the value of the variable remains the same at t = 0− and t = 0+ . With the exception of variables associated with current through an inductor and voltage across a capacitor. The analysis is done in two steps involving KCL and KVL or using the nodevoltage or meshcurrent methods. 2. these variables must obey KVL and KCL. In the previous problem when we were given initial conditions for the inductors and capacitors. 1. we assume the derivative of a unit step input is zero at t = 0+ .GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS 97 Energy cannot change instantaneously for elements that store energy. Recall that when a circuit is at steady state. Since the inductor current cannot change in going from t = 0− to t = 0+ . Second. Here. the derivative of a unit step input may be needed. this implied. v 2 (0− ) = v 2 (0+ ) and v3 (0− ) = v3 (0+ ). that is di L (0+) di L (t) = dt dt and t=0+ d vC (t) d vC (0+) = dt dt t=0+ In calculations to determine the derivatives of variables not associated with current through an inductor and voltage across a capacitor. Keep in mind that the derivatives in the previous expression are evaluated at zero after differentiation. First. While it may not seem obvious at ﬁrst. an inductor acts as a short circuit and a capacitor acts as an open circuit. there are no discontinuities allowed in current through an inductor or voltage across a capacitor at any time—speciﬁcally. Thus. i L1 (0− ) = i L1 (0+ ) and i L2 (0− ) = i L2 (0+ ). and v 1 (0− ) = v 1 (0+ ). however.
98 BIOINSTRUMENTATION going from t = 0− to t = 0+ . vL (0− ). i R2 (0+ ). From this circuit we solve for all desired initial conditions necessary to solve the differential equation. vC (0+ ). i R2 (0− ). i R1 (0− ).4. the capacitor is replaced by an open circuit and the inductor by a short circuit as shown in the following circuit. i L (0+ ). Using the voltage divider rule. we replace the capacitors with voltage sources whose values are the voltages at t = 0− . Example 10. and the derivative of each passive element’s current and voltage at t = 0+ for the following circuit.02 A 100 + 400 100 = 2V 400 + 100 . Also note that the 500 resistor is not shown in the circuit since it is shorted out by the inductor. vL (0+ ). i R1 (0+ ). For t = 0− . and so i R3 (0− ) = 0 A. i R3 (0+ ). we have vC (0− ) = 10 × and by Ohm’s law i L (0− ) = 10 = 0. i L (0− ). iR1 400 Ω + 5u(t) V vC iR2 iC 100 Ω + iR3 iL 10 mH 500 Ω 5μ F vL 10 V − − − Solution. i R3 (0− ). iR1 400 Ω + iR 2 iC 100 Ω + iR 3 iL(0 ) 10 V − vC (0 ) − vL − Notice vL (0− ) = 0 V because the inductor is a short circuit. Find vC (0− ).
giving −i R1 (0+ ) + iC (0+ ) + i R2 (0+ ) = 0 or iC (0+ ) = i R1 (0+ ) − i R2 (0+ ) = 0.02 + i R3 (0+ ) = 500 0.GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS − − − 99 It follows that i R1 (0 ) = i R2 (0 ) = i L (0 ) = 0.02 = 0. Now i R3 (0+ ) = vL (0 ) = 0 A. note that iC (0+ ) = C v˙C (0+ ) or v˙C (0+ ) = Similarly.02 A. we sum the currents leaving node L. di L (0+ ) vL (0+ ) = = 0 A/s dt L iC (0+ ) 0. = C 5 × 10−6 + .02 A. yielding vL vL − 2 + 0. The circuit for t = 0+ is drawn by replacing the inductors in the original circuit with current sources whose values equal the inductor currents at t = 0− and the capacitors with voltage sources whose values equal the capacitor voltages at t = 0− as shown in the following ﬁgure with nodes C and L and reference.125 A To ﬁnd v˙C (0+ ).02 + =0 100 500 which gives vL (0+ ) = 0 V.0325 − 0. andi R1 (0+ ) = 15−2 = 0. Because voltage across a capacitor and current through an inductor are not allowed to change from t = 0− to t = 0+ we have vC (0+ ) = vC (0− ) = 2 V and i L (0− ) = i L (0+ ) = 0. i R2 (0+ ) = 0. Note also that the input is now 10 + 5u(t) = 15 V.02 A − vL 500 Ω To ﬁnd vL (0+ ).0125 = 2.02 A.5 × 103 V/s. 400 To ﬁnd iC (0+ ). we write KCL at node C. iR1 400 Ω + iC vC C iR 2 100 Ω L + iL iR 3 15 V 2V − 0.0325 A.
167 A/s 100 At t = 0+ .167 A/s dt 100 d t 100 d t 100 .5 × 103 di R2 (0+ ) = − = − 5 × 4.25 A/s dt 400 dt 400 To ﬁnd di R3 dt we start with KCL i R3 = i R2 − i L = i R1 − iC − i L .5 × 103 − 0 = 4.167 = 4. the di R2 dt term is given by as vC − vL 100 = 500 and di R2 1 d vC 1 d vL = − dt 100 d t 100 d t i R2 = With vL = 500i R3 and d vL dt di R3 . 400 Next we have i R1 = and di R1 (0+ ) 1 d vC (0+ ) 2. the previous equation reduces to 1 d vC di L − 100 d t dt 2. we have di R3 (0+ ) 1 = dt 6 1 d vC (0+ ) di L (0+ ) − 100 d t dt di R2 dt = 1 6 From before. we have for 1 d vC (0+ ) 500 di R3 (0+ ) 2. dt we have di R2 1 d vC 500 di R3 = − dt 100 d t 100 d t Substituting di R2 dt into the dic dt equation gives diC di R1 di R2 di R1 1 d vC 500 di R3 = − = − + dt dt dt dt 100 d t 100 d t Returning to the di R3 dt equation we have di R3 di R1 diC di L di R1 di R1 1 d vC 500 di R3 di L = − − = − + − − dt dt dt dt dt dt 100 d t 100 d t dt Collecting the di R3 dt terms and canceling the di R3 1 = dt 6 di R1 dt terms.100 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 15−vC . dt dt dt dt For the dic dt term we have iC = i R1 − i R2 and diC di R1 di R2 = − dt dt dt Using Ohm’s law. and di R1 diC di L di R3 = − − .5 × 103 =− =− = −6.
10. here. We use the node voltage method to solve this problem since vC is one of the variables used in the solution.7 V/s dt dt and d vR3 di R = 500 3 = 500 × 4.4. the derivatives of the voltages across the resistors are d vR1 di R = 400 1 = 400 × (−6. C 400 Ω + iC 100 Ω + L iL 10 mH 500 Ω 15 V vC 5μF vL − − Summing the currents leaving node C gives vC − vL vC − 15 + 5 × 10−6 v˙C + =0 400 100 which simpliﬁes to v˙C + 2500vC − 2000vL = 7500 . The initial conditions necessary to solve the differential equation for this circuit were calculated in Ex.4.167 = 416.25) = −2500 V/s dt dt d vR2 di R = 100 2 = 100 × 4.5. 10. we calculated many more initial conditions than are required in this example. For t ≥ 0.5 V/s dt dt Example 10.1665 = −10.167 = 2083. we only need vC (0+ ) and v˙C (0+ ). Using the nodevoltage method also results in two equations rather than three equations with the meshcurrent method. the circuit is redrawn for analysis in the following ﬁgure. Solution.GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS 101 and for dic dt di R1 (0+ ) di R2 (0+ ) diC (0+ ) = − = −6. Keep in mind that in Ex. Find vC for the circuit in Ex.4 for t ≥ 0. 10.25 − 4.417 A/s dt dt dt Finally.
7×10 t V 3 3 Next. assuming that vC f (t) = K 3 . our two differential equations are written as DvC + 2500vC − 2000vL = 7500 or (D + 2500)vC − 2000vL = 7500 6DvL + 50 × 103 vL − 5DvC = 0 or (6D + 50 × 103 )vL − 5DvC = 0 We then solve for vL from the ﬁrst equation.833 × 106 = 0 with roots −7.417 × 103 v˙C + 20. giving (6D + 50 × 103 )vL − 5DvC = (6D + 50 × 103 )((0.718×10 t + K 2 e −2.417 × 103 s + 20.5 × 10−3 D + 1.83 × 106 vC = 62. simpliﬁes to 6v˙ L + 50 × 103 vL − 5v˙C = 0 Using the D operator method.5 × 106 Returning to the time domain gives ¨ vC + 10.7 × 103 and the natural solution vCn (t) = K 1 e −7.5 × 106 . we solve for the forced response. After substituting into the differential equation.25)vC − 3.417 × 103 DvC + 20.5 × 10−3 D + 1. this gives 20.750) − 5DvC =0 Reducing this expression yields D 2 vC + 10.102 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Summing the currents leaving node L gives vL − vC 1 + 100 10 × 10−3 t vL d λ + i L (0+ ) + 0 vL =0 500 which.83 × 106 vC = 62. after multiplying by 500 and differentiating. vL = (0.25)vC − 3.75 and then substitute vL into the second equation.718 × 103 and − 2.833 × 106 K 3 = 62.5 × 106 The characteristic equation for the previous differential equation is s 2 + 10.
for t = 0− we replace the independent source by a short circuit if it is a voltage source and an open circuit if it is a current source. our solution is now vC (t) = vCn (t) + vC f (t) = K 1 e −7. Example 10.04e −2. If a circuit has an independent voltage or current source that is introduced at zero via a unit step function.718×10 t − 2.5 × 103 = −7.04e −7.7×10 t + 3 V 3 3 for t ≥ 0. Find i L1 for the following circuit for t ≥ 0 using the meshcurrent method. First vC (0) = 2 = K 1 + K 2 + 3 Next v˙C (t) = −7. Thus. We analyze the circuit for t = 0− and t = 0+ to establish the initial conditions with the controlled source operational.04.04 and K 2 = −1.6.7×10 t + 3 V 3 3 We use the initial conditions to solve for K 1 and K 2 . we replace it with an open circuit if it is a current source and a short circuit if it is a voltage source. If the voltage or current used in the controlled source is zero.7 × 103 K 2 Solving gives K 1 = 0.GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS 103 or K 3 = 3.718 × 103 K 1 − 2.718×10 t − 1. v˙C (0) = 2.7×10 t 3 3 and at t = 0. iL1 3H ix 10 Ω 5u(t) V 3ix 10 V − 1H 2 mF 10 Ω 20 Ω . Our approach remains the same for circuits with controlled sources.7 × 103 K 2 e −2.718×10 t + K 2 e −2. Substituting these values into the solution gives vC (t) = 0.718 × 103 K 1 e −7.
we form a supermesh for meshes 1 and 2. since there are three energy storing elements. where i is the resultant current (sum of mesh currents) through the inductor. Since there is a controlled current source in the circuit. Eliminate all currents except i4 . recall that the voltage across a capacitor is 1 t vC = C 0 i d λ + vC (0+ ). Summing the voltages around supermesh 1 + 2 yields −15 + 10(i1 − i4 ) + 10(i2 − i4 ) + d (i2 − i3 ) =0 dt 3H ix 10 Ω 10 Ω i4 20 Ω 15 V i1 3ix i2 1H i3 2 mF Rearranging the previous equation gives 10i1 + di2 di3 + 10i2 − − 20i4 = 15 dt dt . which gives a thirdorder differential equation 2. It should be clear that a thirdorder differential equation should describe this system. To solve this problem. The steps involve: 1. Solve for the initial conditions 3. which is i L1 . we will use the meshcurrent method with currents deﬁned in the following circuit.104 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Solution. and the voltage across a inductor vL = L dd t i where dd t i is the derivative of the resultant current through the inductor. Solve the differential equation. Mesh Equations To write the meshcurrent equations. Notice that mesh current i4 = i L1 .
is used to eliminate i1 from the three mesh equations.GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS 105 Summing the voltage drops around mesh 3 yields 1 d (i2 − i3 ) + 20(i3 − i4 ) + dt 2 × 10−3 t i3 d λ + vC (0+ ) = 0 0 Differentiating and rearranging the previous equation reduces to − di3 di4 d 2 i2 d 2 i3 + 500i3 − 20 =0 + 2 + 20 2 dt dt dt dt Summing the voltage drops around mesh 4 gives 3 di4 + 20(i4 − i3 ) + 10(i4 − i2 ) + 10(i4 − i1 ) = 0 dt and after rearranging. − di3 di4 d 2 i2 d 2 i3 + 500i3 − 20 =0 + 2 + 20 2 dt dt dt dt After substituting i1 and collecting like terms in the mesh 4 equation. we have 4i1 − i2 − 3i4 = 0 At this time. an algebraic equation. The dependent current source equation. we have − 50 di4 130 i2 − 20i3 + 3 + i4 = 0 4 dt 4 . but is written here for convenience. since i1 = 1 (i + 3i4 ). we ﬁnd −10i1 − 10i2 − 20i3 + 3 di4 + 40i4 = 0 dt Applying KCL for the dependent current source gives 3i x = i2 − i1 Since i x = 3(i1 − i4 ). we have four equations and four unknowns. Substituting i1 into the supermesh 1 + 2 equation and collecting like terms gives 4 2 di2 50 di3 50 + i2 − − i4 = 15 dt 4 dt 4 The mesh 3 equation did not have an i1 .
− di3 dt and d 2 i3 d t2 into the mesh 3 equation after collecting like terms gives 13 d 2 i2 50 di2 3 d 3 i4 37 d 2 i4 350 di4 − 312. we premultiply the ﬁrst equation by (− 13 D 2 − 50 D − 312.106 BIOINSTRUMENTATION The mesh 4 equation is used to eliminate i3 from the other two equations.5) × 15 8 4 . we use the D operator method on our two differential equations giving 13 3 13 50 50 D+ i2 + − D 2 − D− i4 = 15 8 4 20 8 4 − 13 2 50 D − D − 312. and then subtract the ﬁrst equation from the second equation. Solving for i3 and taking its derivatives yields i3 = 1 di4 130 50 − i2 + 3 + i4 20 4 dt 4 di3 1 50 di2 d 2 i4 130 di4 = − +3 2 + dt 20 4 dt dt 4 dt d 2 i3 50 d 2 i2 1 d 3 i4 130 d 2 i4 − = +3 3 + d t2 20 4 d t2 dt 4 d t2 Substituting the di3 dt term into the supermesh 1 + 2 equation and simplifying gives 13 di2 50 3 d 2 i4 13 di4 50 − + i2 − − i4 = 15 8 dt 4 20 d t 2 8 dt 4 Substituting i3 .875D 3 + 112. premultiply the 8 4 second equation by ( 13 D + 50 ).5 2 + 1750 + 6250i4 = 4687. 8 4 This yields (4.5 3 dt dt dt 13 2 50 D − D − 312.5 i2 + 8 4 3 3 37 2 350 D + D + D + 812.5 i4 = 0 20 8 4 To solve for i4 .5i2 + + 812.5).5D 2 + 1750D + 6250)i4 = −(− Returning to the time domain gives 4.5i4 = 0 − + + 8 d t2 4 dt 20 d t 3 8 d t2 4 dt To eliminate i2 .875 d 3 i4 d 2 i4 di4 + 112.
Solving this equation yields v 1 (0− ) = 8 V.875 to put it in a more convenient form results in d 3 i4 d 2 i4 di4 + 23.3 A.GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS 107 Note that the derivative terms on the righthand side of the D operator equation are zero since the derivative of a constant is zero.2 A. Since the capacitor is connected across the 20 10 10 battery. Ld t and L1t 2 .5 = 1.1 3 dt dt dt Initial Conditions The next step in the solution involves ﬁnding the initial conditions for the circuit necessary to di 1 (0+ ) d 2 i (0+ ) solve the differential equation. Analyzing the circuit at t = 0+ with inductors replaced as current sources whose values equal the inductor currents at t = 0− and the capacitor as a voltage source whose value equal the capacitor voltage at t = 0− . this involves: d 1. iL1 ix 10 Ω + 1 4ix 10 Ω iL2 20 Ω + 10 V + v1 3ix vC − − − Summing the currents leaving node 1 gives v 1 − 10 −3 10 10 − v 1 10 + v1 =0 10 where i x = 10−v 1 .5 A and i x (0− ) = 10−v 1 (0 ) = 10−8 = 0. Analyzing the circuit at t = 0− with the inductors replaced as short circuits and the capacitor as an open circuit 2. for a nodevoltage solution the circuit is redrawn as shown in the following diagram. vC (0− ) = 10 V.8 + 0. .1 2 + 359 + 6250i4 = 1282. Ohm’s law gives i L1 (0− ) = 10 − 10 = 0. i L1 (0+ ). KCL gives the current through the other inductor as i L2 (0− ) = 4i x (0− ) + i L1 (0− ) = 0. For t = 0− . Dividing the previous differential equation by 4. As before.
5 A ix 10 Ω + 15 V v1 − 3ix 1 10 Ω + v2 − iL2 (0 + ) = 1. i L1 (0+ ) = i L1 (0− ) = 0. Summing the currents leaving node d 1 yields v 1 − 15 15 − v 1 −3 10 10 Simplifying the equation.6154 and v 2 0+ ) = 3.3 A vC (0 + ) = 10 V 2 20 Ω iC To ﬁnd the initial conditions for the circuit at t = 0+ . yields 5v 1 − v 2 = 60 Summing the currents leaving node 2 yields v2 − v1 v 2 − 10 + 1.3 + =0 10 20 Simplifying the equation.0769.108 BIOINSTRUMENTATION For t = 0+ . we have −2v 1 + 3v 2 = −16 Solving the two simultaneous node equations gives v 1 (0+ ) = 12. and i L2 (0+ ) = i L2 (0− ) = 1. + v1 − v2 =0 10 . we ﬁrst solve for the nodevoltages di 1 (0+ ) d 2 i (0+ ) v 1 (0+ ) and v 2 (0+ ) and then solve for Ld t and L1t 2 .3 A from the analysis at t = 0− . Recall that vC (0+ ) = vC (0− ) = 10 V. + vL 1 − iL1 (0 + ) = 0. for a nodevoltage solution the circuit is redrawn as shown in the following diagram.5 A.
154 A 20 20 1 1000 d vC (0+ ) = iC (0+ ) = × 0. =− d t2 3 dt Solving the Differential Equation The differential equation describing the circuit is d 3 i4 d 2 i4 di4 + 23. s 2.1 3 dt dt dt As before.0796 − 10 + i L1 (0+ ) = + 0.4749.4221t)) .3125t (K 2 cos(17.154 = 77 V/s dt C 2 Therefore 1 d vC (0+ ) d 2 i L1 (0+ ) = −25.4221t) + K 3 sin(17. and from KVL before vL1 = 15 − 2 3 dt + d 2 i (0+ ) d v 1 (0+ ) d vC = − ddvtC . s 3 + 23.1 2 + 359 + 6250i4 = 1282. Thus L1t 2 = 1 Ld t = − 1 d vCd(0 ) .6667 A2 /s. Thus di L1 (0 ) dt + and d i L1 (0 ) d t2 2 + using the relationships vL = L1 di L1 dt 1 di L1 (0+ ) = vL1 (0+ ) dt 3 and using KVL to ﬁnd vL1 (0+ ) gives −15 + vL1 (0+ ) + vC (0+ ) = 0 or vL1 (0+ ) = 15 − vC (0+ ) = 15 − 10 = 5 V and di L1 (0+ ) 1 5 A = vL1 (0+ ) = dt 3 3 s We also have dv ing d L1 = 0 − t d 2 i L1 (0+ ) d v 1 (0+ ) = 1 Ld t . dt 3 3 t d vC and after differentiatNow iC (0+ ) = and v 2 (0+ ) − 10 3.3125 ± j 17.1s 2 + 359s + 6250 as s 1 = −20.4221.GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS 109 Our next tasks involve ﬁnding and iC = C ddvtC . the natural solution is determined ﬁrst by ﬁnding the roots of characteristic equation.3 = −1. The roots give rise to the natural response i4n (t) = K 1 e −20.5 = 0.4749t + e −1.
3125t (K 2 cos(17.4221K 3 cos(17. K 2 and K 3 .3125t (−17.3125t (−17.4221K 3 − 303. The total solution equals the natural and forced response.2215K 1 − 301.3125t (K 2 cos(17. giving d 2 i4 (0) = −25.3125e −1.4221t)) + e −1.4749K 1 e −20.4221t) + 17.4221K 2 sin(17. giving di4 = −20.2050 The initial conditions are used to determine the constants K 1 .807K 2 − 45. we have i4 (0) = 1 = K 1 + K 2 + 0.4221t)) We evaluate this expression at t = 0. From the solution for i4 (t).3125K 2 + 17. we ﬁnd the derivative of the solution.4749t + e −1.6667 = 419.4221K 3 cos(17.3125t (−303.4221K 2 sin(17.4221K 3 dt 3 Finally.110 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Next we solve for the forced response to the input by assuming i4 f (t) = K 4 which.4221K 3 cos(17.4221t) + 17.3125e −1.2215K 1 + 1. written as i4 (t) = i4n (t) + i4 f (t) = K 1 e −20.733K 3 .4221t) + K 3 sin(17.4221t) + K 3 sin(17.4749t − 1.2215K 1 e −20.2050.2050 2 To use the next initial condition.4749K 1 − 1.4221t)) + 0.4221t) − 303.5296K 2 d t2 = 419. we take the second derivative of the solution giving d 2 i4 = 419.4221t) + K 3 sin(17.3125e −1.7227K 2 − 2. yields 6250K 4 = 1281.6250 × 17.5296K 3 sin(17.4749t + 1. when substituted into the original differential equation.4221t) + 17. giving 5 di4 (0) = = −20.3125t (−17.4221t)) d t2 − 1.7227e −1.1 giving K 4 = 0.4221K 2 sin(17.3125t (K 2 cos(17.4221t)) We evaluate this expression at t = 0.4221t)) dt + e −1.5296K 2 cos(17.4221t)) − 1.
F = [0.1025e −20. we solve the circuit using the techniques of this section.3125 17.4749 −1.2306 sin(17.4221t) + 0.2306 The complete solution is i L1 (t) = i4 (t) = 0.3125 17. we have A = [1 1 0.807 − 45. and so on.4749t + e −1.2 CIRCUITS WITH SWITCHES To ﬁnish this section.295. with the only carryover from one time interval to the next being the voltages across the capacitor and currents through the inductors at the switch time.3125t (0.4221t)) + 0. . For ease in solving the circuit after the ﬁrst switch time at t = 0. − + move to the next switch time. we determine the necessary voltages and currents at ti− and ti+ and solve the circuit problem.4221 ⎥ ⎢ K 2 ⎥ = ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ 3 419.733 K3 −25.6667]. Each time interval is separately analyzed. we replace the variable t with t − t1 where t1 is the switch time and use the unit step function. −20.2215 −301.2215 −301. K = A\F K= 0.4749 −1. 10. we consider circuits with multiple switches.807 −45. ti .1925 0.GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS 111 The three initial condition equations are put into matrix form for a straightforward solution as AK = F or ⎤ ⎡ ⎤⎡ ⎤ ⎡ 0. and repeat this substitution at each switch time. The next example illustrates this approach. each time a switch is thrown.1925 cos(17. −25. determine the necessary voltages and currents at ti+1 and ti+1 and solve the circuit problem. 419. In effect. That is.4221. at each switch time.1025 0.6667 Using MATLAB. 5/3.2050 for t ≥ 0.733].295 1 1 0 K1 ⎥ ⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎥ ⎢ 5 ⎥ ⎢ −20.
112
BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Example 10.7. Find vC for the following circuit for t ≥ 0.
t=0 t=4s 50 Ω 10 Ω + 2A 0.03 F vc − 40 Ω 1 H 3 t=1s
Solution. There are two switches operating in this circuit, with switching times at t = 0, t = 1 and t = 4 s . We therefore break up the solution into three time intervals, 0 ≤ t < 1, 1 ≤ t < 4 and t ≥ 4 s, while realizing that we need to know the initial conditions just before and after each switch time, and that we also need to solve for the steadystate solution for t < 0. For t < 0 At steady state, the capacitor is replaced by an open circuit as shown in the following ﬁgure.
10 Ω + 2A 50 Ω vc − 40 Ω
Using the current divider rule and Ohm’s law, we have vC (0− ) = 40 V. Note that voltage cannot instantaneously change across a capacitor, so vC (0+ ) = 40 V. For 0 ≤ t < 1 During this interval, the switch on the left opens, leaving us with the following circuit to analyze.
+ 0.03 F vc − 40 Ω
GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS
113
Notice the 10 resistor is eliminated since no current ﬂows through it because it is an open circuit. Using KCL we have 0.03v˙C + vC =0 40
1 The differential equation has a root equal to − 1.2 and a solution in this time interval of
vC = vC (0+ )e − 1.2 u(t) = 40e − 1.2 u(t) V
t t
For 1 ≤ t < 4 When t = 1, the switch on the right closes, introducing an inductor as shown in the following ﬁgure.
iC + vc − 0.03 F 40 Ω 1 H 3 iR iL
Applying KCL yields vC d vC + +5 0.03 dt 40
1 t
vC d λ + i L (1+ ) = 0
Dividing the previous equation by 0.03 and differentiating gives ¨ vC + 1 5 v˙C + vC = 0 1.2 0.03
with complex roots determined from MATLAB as −0.42 ± 12.9 j . The solution consists of the natural solution only, since the forced response is zero, and is given by vC = e −0.42(t−1) (K 1 cos(12.9(t − 1)) + K 2 sin(12.9(t − 1))) (u(t − 1) − u(t − 4)) This solution requires two initial conditions. Recall that at t = 1, vC (1+ ) = vC (1− ) and i L (1+ ) = i L (1− ). Moreover, all other voltages and currents and their derivatives change from t = 1− to t = 1+ s. Now using the solution for vC from the previous interval, we have vC (1+ ) = vC (1− ) = 40e − 1.2 = 17.4 V
1
114
BIOINSTRUMENTATION
From our solution in this interval, we have vC (1+ ) = K 1 = 17.4 V Since no current was ﬂowing through the inductor during the interval 0 ≤ t < 1, i L (1+ ) = (1+ i L (1− ) = 0 A. Now i R(1+ ) = vC40 ) = 17.4 = 0.44 A, and accordingly 40 iC (1+ ) = −(i L (1+ ) + i R(1+ )) = −(0 + 0.44) = −0.44 A 1 v˙C (1+ ) = iC (1+ ) = −14.5 V C Now ⎛ v˙C = ⎝ −0.42e −0.42(t−1) (K 1 cos(12.9(t − 1)) + K 2 sin(12.9(t − 1))) + e −0.42(t−1) (−12.9K 1 sin(12.9(t − 1)) + 12.9K 2 cos(12.9(t − 1))) ⎞ ⎠
× (u (t − 1) − u (t − 4)) and v˙C (1+ ) = −14.5 = −0.42K 1 + 12.9K 2 = −0.42 × 17.4 + 12.9K 2 which gives K 2 = −0.557. Our complete solution is vC = e −0.42(t−1) (17.4 cos(12.9(t − 1)) − 0.557 sin(12.9(t − 1)))(u(t − 1) − u(t − 4)) V For t > 4. For the last interval, the switch on the left closes, giving us the following ﬁgure to analyze.
10 Ω + 2A 50 Ω vc − 0.03 F 40 Ω 1 H 5 iL
To ease the solution, the 2 A current source with 50 resistor is transformed into a 100 V voltage source in series with a 50 resistor. The 50 and 10 resistors are summed together, and the 100 V voltage source and 60 resistor are transformed into a 10 A current source in 6 parallel with a 60 resistor. The 60 and 40 resistors are combined to give a 24 resistor. The reduced circuit is shown in the following circuit.
GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS
115
iL + 10 A 6 25 Ω vc − 0.03 F 1 H 5
Applying KCL gives 10 vC − + + 0.03v˙C + 5 6 24
1 t
vC d λ + i L (4+ ) = 0
Differentiating the previous equation and dividing by 0.03 yields ¨ vC + 1.4v˙C + 166.7vC = 55.6 with roots determined from MatLab as −0.7 ± 12.9 j . The roots are complex, which gives rise to the natural response vC = e −0.7(t−4) (K 1 cos(12.9(t − 4)) + K 2 sin(12.9(t − 4))) u(t − 4) Next, we solve for the forced response to the input by assuming y f (t) = K 3 . When substituted into the differential equation describing this interval, this yields 166.7K 3 = 55.6 giving 11.1. The total solution in this interval equals the natural and forced response, written as vC = 11.1 + e −0.7(t−4) (K 1 cos(12.9(t − 4)) + K 2 sin(12.9(t − 4))) u(t − 4) Two initial conditions (vC (4+ ) and v˙C (4+ )) are needed to determine the constants K 1 and K 2 . As before, at t = 4, vC (4+ ) = vC (4− ) and i L (4+ ) = i L (4− ), and all other voltages and currents and their derivatives change from t = 4− to t = 4+ s. Using the solution for vC from the previous interval, we have vC (4+ ) = vC (4− ) = e −0.42(t−1) (17.4 cos(12.9(t − 1)) − 0.557 sin(12.9(t − 1))) × (u(t − 1) − u(t − 4))t=4− = e −0.42(4−1) (17.4 cos (12.9 (4 − 1)) − 0.557 sin (12.9 (4 − 1))) = 2.5 V
6 V.9(t − 4)) − 0.557 sin(12. we have K 2 = −0.9(t − 1)) − 0.53 24 = 0.105 A.6 sin(12.9(t − 1)) + 6.9(t − 1)))) d t −0.6.116 BIOINSTRUMENTATION From our solution in this interval.7(t−4) (−12. Our solution for this interval is vC = 11.614 = −0.53 V and K 1 = −8. To ﬁnd i L (4− ) we use the solution for vC in the previous interval and compute 4 4 i L (4 ) = i L (4 ) = 5 1 4 + − vC d t + i L (1 ) = 5 1 + vC d t + 0 =5 1 (e −0.05 A 6 24 6 24 1 v˙C (4+ ) = iC (4+ ) = −1.9 (t − 4))) . 0.9(t − 4)) + K 2 sin(12. we have vC (4+ ) = 11. and 10 vC (4+ ) 10 2.9K 2 with K 1 = −8.6 cos(12.9(t − 1))) 4 1 = 1. The next initial condition.7(t−4) (K 1 cos(12.03 C is determined from KCL 10 vC (4+ ) + + iC (4+ ) + i L (4+ ) = 0 6 24 where i L (4+ ) = i L (4− ).7K 1 + 12. v˙C (4+ ) = − 1 i (4+ ).1 + e −0.7e −0.53 − − i L (4+ ) = − − 1.9K 1 sin(12.9(t − 4))) u(t − 4) V −0.1 + K 1 = 2.42(t−1) =e (−0.75 = −0.6.4 cos(12.9 (t − 4)) + 12.614 A Now i R(1+ ) = vC (4+ ) 24 = 2.9(t − 4))) u (t − 4) + e −0.0037 cos(12.74 sin(12.42(t−1) (17.7(t−4) (−8.9K 2 cos (12.75 V C iC (4+ ) = Now v˙C = and v˙C (4+ ) = −1.
GENERAL APPROACH TO SOLVING CIRCUITS
117
Summarizing, our complete solution is ⎧ − t ⎪ 40e 1.2 V ⎨ vC = e −0.42(t−1) (17.4 cos(12.9 (t − 1)) − 0.557 sin(12.9 (t − 1))) V ⎪ ⎩ 11.1 + e −0.7(t−4) (−8.6 cos(12.9(t − 4)) − 0.6 sin(12.9(t − 4))) V 0≤t<1 1≤t<4 t≥4
119
CHAPTER 11
Operational Ampliﬁers
In Section 3, we considered controlled voltage and current sources that are dependent on a voltage or current elsewhere in a circuit. These devices were modeled as a two terminal device. Here we consider the operational ampliﬁer, also known as an op amp, a multiterminal device. An operational ampliﬁer is an electronic device that consists of large numbers of transistors, resistors and capacitors—to fully understand its operation requires knowledge of diodes and transistors, topics not covered in this book. However, to appreciate how an operational ampliﬁer operates in a circuit involves a topic already covered, the controlled voltage source. As the name implies, the operation ampliﬁer is an ampliﬁer, but when combined with other circuit element, it integrates, differentiates, sums and subtracts. One of the ﬁrst operational ampliﬁers approved as an eightlead dualinline package (DIP) is shown in Fig. 11.1. Differing from previous circuit elements, this device has two inputs and one output terminals. Rather than draw the operational ampliﬁer using Fig 11.1, the operational ampliﬁer is drawn with the symbols in Fig. 11.2. The input terminals are labeled the noninverting input (+) and the inverting input (−). The power supply terminals are labeled V+ and V−, which are frequently omitted since they do not affect the circuit behavior except in saturation conditions as will be described. Most people shorten the name of the operational ampliﬁer to the “op amp”. Illustrated in Fig. 11.3 is a model of the op amp focusing on the internal behavior of the input and output terminals. The input–output relationship is vo = A (v p − vn ) (11.1)
Since the internal resistance is very large, we will replace it with an open circuit to simplify analysis leaving us with the op amp model show in Fig. 11.4. With the replacement of the internal resistance with an open circuit, the currents in = i p = 0 A. In addition, current i A , the current ﬂowing out of the op amp, is not zero. Because i A is unknown, we seldom apply KCL at the output junction. In solving op amp problems, KCL is applied at input terminals.
120
BIOINSTRUMENTATION
Offset null Inverting input Noninverting input V− Eight terminal operational amplifier
NC V+ Output Offset null
FIGURE 11.1: An eightterminal operational ampliﬁer. The terminal NC is not connected, and the two terminal offset nulls are used to correct imperfections (typically not connected). V+ and V− are terminal power to provide to the circuit. Keep in mind that a ground exists for both V+ and V− , a ground that is shared by other elements in the circuit. Modern operational ampliﬁers have ten or more terminals.
V+ Inverting input Output Noninverting input V−
FIGURE 11.2: Circuit element symbol for the operational ampliﬁer.
in vn A (vp − vn) R ip vp vo
iA
FIGURE 11.3: An internal model of the op amp. The internal resistance between the input terminals, R, is very large exceeding 1 M . The gain of the ampliﬁer, A, is also large exceeding 104 . Power supply terminals are omitted for simplicity.
iA Example 11. Replacing the current using Ohm’s law gives vs − v1 vo − v1 + =0 R1 R2 Multiplying by R1 R2 and collecting like terms. Find v0 for the following circuit. we apply KCL at the inverting terminal giving −i1 − i2 = 0 since no current ﬂows into the op amp’s input terminals. i2 R2 i1 R1 VS vn vp v0 − − − Solution.OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 121 in vn vo= A (vp − vn) ip vp FIGURE 11. Using the op amp model of Fig. 11.4: Idealized model of the op amp with the internal resistance.1. we have R2 vs = (R1 + R2 ) v1 − R1 vo Now vo = A v p − vn and since the noninverting terminal is connected to ground. R.4. replaced by an open circuit. v p = 0 so vo = −Avn .
v0 remains ﬁnite due to the resistor R2 . Keep in mind that this approximation is valid as long as A is very large (inﬁnity) and a feedback is included. the previous equation goes to vo = − R2 vs R1 Interestingly. Because of the inﬁnite gain. Applying KCL at the inverting input gives − or vo = − R2 vs R1 vs −vo + =0 R1 R2 Notice how simple the analysis becomes when we assume vn = v p . With v p = 0 means vn = 0. . R1 An operational ampliﬁer with a gain of inﬁnity is known as an ideal op amp. there must be a feedback path between the output and input and we cannot connect a voltage source directly between the inverting and noninverting input terminals.122 BIOINSTRUMENTATION or vn = − vo A vo − R1 vo A Substituting vn into the KCL inverting input equation gives. This happens because a negative feedback path exists between the output and the inverting input terminal through R2 . we simplify the analysis by letting vn = v p Consider the previous example. When analyzing an ideal op amp circuit. This circuit is called an inverting ampliﬁer with an overall gain of − R2 . Rs vs = (R1 + R2 ) − = or vo = −R2 vs R1 + R2 R1 + A R1 + R2 + R1 vo A As A goes to inﬁnity. with A going to inﬁnity.
Ampliﬁers are used in most all clinical instrumentation from ECK. Assuming the op amp is ideal.OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 123 Example 11. etc. we start with vn = v p . R1 + R2 vs R1 . Because no current ﬂows into the op amp. vn vp VS i1 − i2 R2 v0 R1 − − Solution. by KCL we have i1 + i2 = 0 and vs vs − vo + =0 R1 R2 or vo = The overall gain is vo R1 + R2 = vs R1 This circuit is a noninverting op amp circuit used to amplify the source input. Then since the op amp’s noninverting terminal is connected to the source. EEG. EOG.2. Find the overall gain for the following circuit. vn = v p = vs .
yielding vn = v p = 0 V. Example 11. As before we start the solution with vn = v p and note that the noninverting input is connected to ground. This op amp is often referred to as a differential ampliﬁer. Find the overall gain for the following circuit. Find the overall gain for the following circuit. Applying KCL at the inverting input node gives − or vo = − R2 R2 Va + Vb Ra Rb Va Vb vo − − =0 Ra Rb R2 We can add additional source resistor inputs.3. Assuming an ideal op amp. Example 11.124 BIOINSTRUMENTATION The next example describes a summing op amp circuit. we note no current ﬂows into the input terminals and that vn = v p . Ra R2 Rb Va Vb vn vp − − v0 − Solution. Solution.4. Apply KCL at the inverting input terminal gives vn − Va vn − vo + =0 R1 R2 . so that in general vo = − R2 R2 R2 Va + Vb + · · · + Vm Ra Rb Rm Our next op amp circuit provides an output proportional to the difference of two input voltages.
Commonmode signal comes from lighting. inadequate grounding and power supply leakage. The noise is typically called commonmode signal. this op amp circuit. Ideally. This ampliﬁer is used for bipolar measurements involving ECG and EEG as the typical recording is obtained between two bipolar input terminals. subtracts the weighted input signals.OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 125 i2 R2 R1 ia ib R1 Va Vb R2 vp v0 vn and (R1 + R2 )vn − R2 Va = R1 vo The previous equation involves two unknowns. . A differential ampliﬁer with appropriate ﬁltering can reduce the impact of the commonmode signal. thus we need another equation easily found by applying voltage divider at the noninverting input. vp = R2 vb = vn R1 + R2 Substituting this result for vn into the KCL equation at the inverting terminal gives R2 Vb − R2 Va = R1 vo or vo = R2 (Vb − Va ) R1 As shown. 60Hz power line signals. also known as the differential ampliﬁer. the measurement contains only the signal of interest uncontaminated by noise from the environment.
the commonmode gain is not zero. . Ac m . The general approach to solving op amp circuits is to ﬁrst assume that the op amp is ideal and v p = vn . and the measure of how ideal the differential ampliﬁer is called the commonmode rejection ratio. In more complex circuits. Next. is zero. one can solve va and vb in terms of vd m and vc m as va = vc m − and vb = vc m + vd m 2 vd m 2 When substituted into the response in Exercise 44 gives v0 = R1 R2 − R1 R2 vc m + R1 (R1 + R2 ) R2 (R1 + R2 ) + R2 (R1 + R2 ) vd m = Ac m vc m + Ad m vd m 2R1 (R1 + R2 ) Notice the term multiplying. and EMG is 100–120 db. we apply KCL or KVL at the two input terminals. The rejection of the commonmode signal is called commonmode rejection. vc m . So when one designs a differential ampliﬁer. characteristic of the ideal op amp that ampliﬁes only the differentialmode of the signal. Values of CMRR for a differential ampliﬁer for EEG. given as C MRR = 20 log10 Ad m Ac m where the larger the value of CMRR the better. Using the two previous equations. the commonmode signal is the average of the input voltages. ECG. the goal is to keep Ac m as small as possible and Ad m as large as possible. we continue to apply our circuit analysis tools to solve the problem as the next example illustrates. vd m = vb − va and vc m = (va + vb ) 2 As described.126 BIOINSTRUMENTATION The response of a differential ampliﬁer can be decomposed into differentialmode and commonmode components. Since real ampliﬁers are not ideal and resistors are not truly exact.
we apply KVL from ground to node 1 to the noninverting input and back to ground giving −v1 − Vs + v p = 0 and with vn = v p we have vn − v1 = Vs . R2 vn vp R2 VS 1 R2 v1 R1 v0 Solution. we apply KCL at the inverting input vn − v1 vn − vo + =0 R2 R2 and 2vn − v1 − vo = 0 Next.OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 127 Example 11. With vn = v p . we apply KCL at node 1. noting no current ﬂows into the noninverting input terminal v1 v1 − vo v1 − vn + + =0 R1 R2 R2 Combining like terms in the previous equation gives −R1 vn + (2R1 + R2 )v1 − R1 vo = 0 . Now.5. Find v0 for the following circuit.
we have vo = (3R1 + 2R2 ) Vs R2 The next two examples illustrate an op amp circuit that differentiates and integrates by using a capacitor. we substitute the solutions for v1 and vn into the node 1 KCL equation giving −R1 vn + (2R1 + R2 )v1 − R1 vo = 0 −R1 (vo − Vs ) + (2R1 + R2 )(vo − 2Vs ) − R1 vo = 0 After simpliﬁcation. iR + vC − R iC C VS vn vp v0 . we ﬁrst eliminate v1 by subtracting the inverting input KCL equation by the KVL equation giving v1 = vo − 2Vs Next. Find v 0 for the following circuit. Example 11.6.128 BIOINSTRUMENTATION With three equations and three unknowns. we eliminate vn by substituting v1 into the inverting input KCL equation as follows 1 vn = (v1 + vo ) 2 1 = (vo − 2Vs + vo ) 2 = vo − Vs Finally.
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 129 Solution. Find v 0 for the following circuit. C vn − vo vo =− R R d Vs vo = iR = − dt R d Vs dt the circuit in this example differentiates the input. iC = i R. we have v p = 0 = vn . + vC − iC iR R VS vn vp C v0 Solution.7. With the noninverting input connected to ground. t Example 11. From KVL vC = Vs and it follows that iC = C d Vs d vC =C dt dt Since no current ﬂows into the op amp. With iR = and iC = C we have vo = −RC If R = 1 . It follows that vn = v p = 0 . vo = − ddVs .
v0 V+ V− V+ A(vp − vn) V− FIGURE 11. The output voltage characteristics are shown in Fig.5: Voltage characteristics of an op amp. C t t Vs R t −∞ 1 iC d λ = C −∞ Vs dλ R Vs d λ −∞ the circuit operates as an integrator t vo = − −∞ Vs d λ 11. v0 saturates at V − .1 VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OP AMP In the past examples involving the op amp. . 11.2) and that the output voltage of an ideal op amp is constrained to operate between the supply voltages V + and V − . v0 saturates at V + . If analysis determines v0 is less than V − .130 BIOINSTRUMENTATION and iC = i R = Therefore 1 vC = C From KVL. If analysis determines v0 is greater than V + . we have vC + vo = 0 and 1 vo = − RC With R = 1 . we have neglected to consider the supply voltage (shown in Fig. 11.5.
For the circuit shown in Ex. let V the output voltage characteristics of the circuit. Graph Vs which saturates whenever v0 is less than V − and greater than V + as shown in the following graph. The solution for Ex. Solution.8.5 is vo = 3R1 + 2R2 R2 + = +10 V and V − = −10 V. v0 V+ slope is 3R1 + 2R2 R2 VS V− .OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 131 Example 11.5. 11. 11.
.
and peak magnitude (Vm ). The period of the sinusoid T is related to frequency f (Hz or cycles/s) and angular frequency by ω=2 f = 2 T (12.1) where the voltage is deﬁned by angular frequency (ω in radians/s). 12. Applying KVL to the circuit gives T 2 Vm cos2 (ωt + φ)d t Vr ms = (12. In bioinstrumentation. analysis in the steady state simpliﬁes the design by focusing only on the steadystate response. consider the circuit shown in Fig. 2 To appreciate the response to a timevarying input. which is where the device actually operates. A sinusoidal voltage source is a timevarying signal given by vs = Vm cos(ωt + φ) (12. attention is now focused on the steadystate or forced response. vs = Vm cos(ωt + φ). While most of this chapter has focused on the transient response.2) An important metric of a sinusoid is its rms value (square root of the mean value of the squared function).1 in which the switch is closed at t = 0 and there is no initial energy stored in the inductor.133 CHAPTER 12 TimeVarying Signals An alternating current (AC) or sinusoidal source of 50 or 60 Hz is common throughout the world as a power source supplying energy for most equipment and other devices. phase angle (φ in radians or degrees).3) L di + iR = Vm cos(ωt + φ) dt . given by 1 T 0 V which reduces to Vr ms = √m . when dealing with sinusoidal sources.
134 BIOINSTRUMENTATION t= 0 R vs i L FIGURE 12.4) In Eq. the angle in the exponential is written in radians. and after some work. but a different phase angle and maximum amplitude). given as V = Vm (cos φ + j sin φ) (12. (12. then the only unknowns are the response amplitude and phase angle.1) is expressed as V = Vm e j φ = Vm φ (12.1: A RL circuit with sinusoidal input.1). 12. the rectangular form of the phasor is also used. (12. Work in the phasor domain involves the use of complex algebra in moving between the time and phasor domain.1 PHASORS The phasor is a complex number that contains amplitude and phase angle information of a sinusoid. The remainder of this section deals with techniques involving the phasor to efﬁciently ﬁnd these unknowns. the solution is i = in + i f =√ −Vm R2 + ω 2 L2 cos φ − ωL − R t Vm ωL e L +√ cos ωt + φ − 2 + ω 2 L2 R R R The ﬁrst term is the natural response that goes to zero as t goes to inﬁnity. in degrees. If all you are interested in is the steadystate response as in most bioinstrumentation applications. by practice.5) .. and in the φ notation. and for the signal in Eq. The second term is the forced response that has the same form as the input (i.e. therefore. a sinusoid with the same frequency ω.
For an inductor. Assume that i = Im cos(ωt + θ ) I = Im θ = Im e j θ For a resistor. Now i =C d dv = C (Vm cos(ωt + θ )) dt dt = −C Vm ω sin(ωt + θ) = −C Vm ω cos(ωt + θ − 90◦ ) And the phasor for i is I = −ωC Vm θ − 90◦ = −ωC Vm e j θe − j 90 = −ωC Vm e j θ (cos(90◦ ) − j sin(90◦ )) = j ωC Vm e j θ = j ωC V ◦ .TIMEVARYING SIGNALS 135 12.6) Note that there is no phase shift for the relationship between the phasor current and voltage for a resistor.7) Note that inductor current and voltage are out of phase by 90◦ . deﬁne v = Vm cos(ωt + θ) and V = Vm θ . v = I R = RIm cos(ωt + θ) and the phasor of v is V = RIm θ = R I (12. inductor and capacitor. v=L and the phasor of v is V = −ωLIm θ − 90◦ = −ωLIm e j (θ−90 ) ◦ = −ωLIm e j θe −j 90 = −ωLIm e j θ (− j ) = j ωLIm e j θ = j ωL I ◦ di = −ωLIm sin(ωt + θ) = −ωLIm cos(ωt + θ − 90◦ ) dt (12. For a capacitor. that is current lags behind voltage by 90◦ . the relationship between voltage and current is needed for the resistor.2 PASSIVE CIRCUIT ELEMENTS IN THE PHASOR DOMAIN To use phasors with passive circuit elements for steadystate solutions.
that is voltage lags behind current by 90◦ . the inductor. 12.136 BIOINSTRUMENTATION i 0. . For the voltage source. shown in Fig. The imaginary part of the impendence is called reactance. we have 0. Equations (12. The ﬁnal part to working in the phasor domain is to transform a circuit diagram from the time to phasor domain. j ωL. ωC . The impedance −j for the resistor is R. For example.8) all have the form of V = Z I. 12.6)–(12.2.5μF ↔ −j = − j 4000 ωC − j 4000 Ω 500 − 90° mV 1000 Ω I j 100 Ω FIGURE 12.3. and the capacitor. where Z represents the impedance of the circuit element and is. or V= 1 −j I= I j ωC ωC (12. with units of Ohms. we have vs = 100 sin 500t = 100 cos(500t − 90◦ ) mV ↔ 500 −90◦ mV For the capacitor. a complex number.8) Note that capacitor current and voltage are out of phase by 90◦ . 12. by replacing each circuit element with their impedance equivalent and sources by their phasor.2: A circuit diagram. The impedance is a complex number and not a phasor even though it may look like one. the circuit shown in Fig. in general.3: Phasor and impedance equivalent circuit for Fig.5 μF vs = 100 sin 500t mV 1000 Ω 200 mH FIGURE 12.2 is transformed into the phasor domain.
3 KIRCHHOFF’S LAWS AND OTHER TECHNIQUES IN THE PHASOR DOMAIN It is fortunate that all of the material presented before in this chapter involving Kirchhoff ’s current and voltage laws. . 12.TIMEVARYING SIGNALS 137 For the resistor. as well as superposition.12) The nodevoltage method.10) (12. Solution. Th´ venin equivalent circuits is applicable e in the phasor domain. I= V 0. The following two examples illustrate the process. with the most difﬁcult aspect involving complex algebra. 12. we have 200 mH ↔ j ωL = j 100 Each of the elements are replaced by their phasor and impedance equivalents as shown in Fig. the sum of phasor voltages around any closed path is zero Vi = 0 and for KCL.5 −90◦ = 124−14◦ μA = = Z 1000 − j 3900 4026−76◦ .3. ↔ 1000 12. the sum of phasor currents leaving any node is zero I=0 Impedances in series are given by Z = Z1 + · · · + Zn Impedances in parallel are given by Z= 1 Z1 (12. for KVL. and all the other techniques apply to phasors. The impedance for the circuit is Z = − j 4000 + 1000 + j 100 = 1000 − j 3900 Using Ohm’s law. That is.1 For the circuit shown in Fig. Example Problem 12.11) 1 + ··· + 1 Zn (12. we have 1000 For the inductor.9) (12.3. ﬁnd the steadystate response i.5 −90◦ 0.
the steadystate current is i = 124 cos (500t − 14◦ ) μA Example Problem 12. the following circuit. The ﬁrst step is to transform the circuit elements into their impedances. Find the steadystate response v using the nodevoltage method for . 1Ω + vs = 50sin 10ω t V 1 F 10 1 H 5 v 1 Ω 2 is = 20 cos ( 10ωt + 20°) A − Solution. the phasor drawing of the circuit is shown in the following ﬁgure with the ground at the lower node. which for the capacitor and inductor are 1 −j F↔ = −j 10 ωC 1 H ↔ j ωL = j 2 5 The phasors for the two sources are: vs = 50 sin ωt V ↔ Vs = 50−90◦V is = 20 cos (ωt + 20◦ ) A ↔ Is = 20 20◦ Since the two resistors retain their values. 1 1Ω + V =50 − 90° V s − jΩ j2 Ω V 1 Ω 2 I s =20 20° − .138 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Returning to the time domain.2.
5◦ = 47.5◦ V= 47.8 = 18.5◦ v = 15.2 V × 3.049.TIMEVARYING SIGNALS 139 Writing the nodevoltage equation for node 1 gives V − 50−90◦ + V V + + 2V − 20 20◦ = 0 −j j2 Collecting like terms.6 cos (10t − 76◦ ) V The steadystate solution is .04 9.5−76◦ 3.5◦ = 15.1−66. converting to rectangular form and converting to polar form gives V 3+ V 3+ j 2 j 2 = 50−90◦ + 20 20◦ = −50 j + 18.1−66.8 − j 43.8 + j 6.
.
Shown in Fig. H ( j ω). The magnitude of the ﬁlter. The signal that is removed by the ﬁlter is indicated by the frequency interval called the stopband. it is sometimes convenient to include both ampliﬁcation and ﬁltering in the same circuit. By using the op amp. and eliminates any signal or noise outside this interval. The lowpass ﬁlter allows slowly changing signals with frequency less than ω1 pass through the ﬁlter. capacitors and inductors. any real ﬁlter cannot possibly have these ideal characteristics. the resistive load at the output of the ﬁlter is usually increased. 13.2. In reality. highpass. The signal that is passed through the ﬁlter is indicated by the frequency interval called the passband. and eliminates any signal or noise outside this interval. for example in Fig. The notch ﬁlter allows signals in the frequency band less than ω1 and greater than ω2 to pass through the ﬁlter. and eliminates any signal or noise with frequency less than ω2 . . The bandpass ﬁlter allows signals in the frequency band greater than ω1 and less than ω2 to pass through the ﬁlter. The frequencies ω1 and ω2 are typically called cutoff frequencies for the lowpass and highpass ﬁlters.141 CHAPTER 13 Active Analog Filters This section presents several active analog ﬁlters involving the op amp. ﬁne control of the performance is achieved without increasing the load at the output of the ﬁlter. Passive analog ﬁlters use passive circuit elements: resistors. bandpass and notch ﬁlters. Filters are used to modify the measured signal by removing noise. Further.1 are the frequency characteristics of four ﬁlters: lowpass. To improve performance in a passive analog ﬁlter. the reason for this behavior is described in a later chapter. is one in the passband and zero in the stopband. so the maximum of the magnitude does not need to be one. A ﬁlter is designed in the frequency domain so that the measured signal to be retained is passed through and noise is rejected. but can be a value of M speciﬁed by the needs of the application. as shown. but instead has a smooth transition from the passband to the stopband. 13. The highpass ﬁlter allows quickly changing signals with frequency greater than ω2 to pass through the ﬁlter. and eliminates any signal or noise above ω1 .
from top to bottom: lowpass. . Note that the magnitude M does not necessarily need to be one.H ( jω) Passband Stopband ω1 H ( jω) Passband Stopband ω ω2 H ( jω) Passband Stopband ω ω1 H ( jω) Passband Stopband ω2 Stopband ω Passband ω1 ω2 ω FIGURE 13. bandpass and notch.2: A realistic magnitude–frequency response for a bandpass ﬁlter. highpass.1: Ideal magnitude–frequency response for four ﬁlters. The passband is deﬁned as the frequency interval when the M magnitude is greater than √2 . H ( jω) M M 2 Stopband Passband Stopband FIGURE 13.
At high frequencies. Example 13. the capacitor acts like a short circuit. and therefore. the inverting input is also connected to ground. the capacitor acts like an open circuit. 1 jωC Rb Ra VS + V0 − . the ﬁlter is driven by a sinusoidal input.ACTIVE ANALOG FILTERS 143 To determine the ﬁlter’s performance. C Rb Ra VS + v0 − Solution. The operation of this ﬁlter is readily apparent for at low frequencies. Using the lowpass ﬁlter in the following circuit. The critical frequencies are when H ( j ω) = √2 .1. The phasor method will be used to solve this problem by ﬁrst transforming the circuit into the phasor domain as shown in the following ﬁgure. One varies the input over the entire spectrum of interest (at discrete frequencies) and records the output M magnitude. design the ﬁlter to have a gain of 5 and a cutoff frequency of 500 rad/s. which connects the output terminal to the inverting input and ground. By treating the op amp as ideal. reducing the circuit to an inverting ampliﬁer that passes low frequency signals. note that the noninverting input is connected to ground.
e. b b Thus. 5 √ = 2 With 1 Rb C 1 Ra C 1 Ra C ω2 + 1 Rb C 2 ωc2 + 1 Rb C 2 = 500. with the cutoff frequency set at ωc = 500 rad/s. j ω + R1C set equal to zero).. the magnitude is 5 √ = 2 1 Ra C ωc2 + 1 Rb C 2 =√ = √ 500 2 5002 + 5002 1 Ra C 1 Ra C which gives Ra C = 1 2500 . where M = 5. The cutoff frequency b M is also deﬁned as when H ( j ω) = √2 . then R1C = 500. the cutoff frequency is deﬁned as ωc = R1C (i.144 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Summing the currents leaving the inverting input gives − V0 V0 Vs − 1 − =0 Ra Rb j ωC Collecting like terms and rearranging yields −V0 After further manipulation. the denominator term. V0 Vs 1 1 j ωC + 1 Rb = Vs Ra ⎛ 1 ⎝ Ra 1 Ra C 1 1 j ωC ⎞ 1 + 1 Rb =− ⎠=− 1 Ra 1 j ωC + 1 Rb V0 Vs =− 1 jω + 1 Rb C Similar to the reasoning for the characteristic equation for a differential equation. ωc = 500 rad/s. The magnitude of V0 is given by Vs V0 = Vs and at the cutoff frequency.
Using the highpass ﬁlter in the following circuit. there are an inﬁnite number of solutions. the cutoff frequency gives a value of magnitude equal to 3. which is the design goal. Rb Ra VS C + v0 − .ACTIVE ANALOG FILTERS 1 2500 1 Rb C 145 Since we have three unknowns and two equations (Ra C = and = 500). As can be seen. design the ﬁlter to have a gain of 5 and a cutoff frequency of 100 rad/s.2.53 at 100 Hz. one can select a convenient value for one of the elements. and the other two elements are determined as C= and Rb = 1 1 = 100 k = 500 × C 500 × 20 × 10−9 1 1 = 20 nF = 2500 × Ra 2500 × 20000 A plot of the magnitude versus frequency is shown in the following ﬁgure. 6 5 4 Magnitude 3 2 1 0 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 Frequency (rad/s) Example 13. say Ra = 20 k . Therefore.
the capacitor acts like a short circuit. At high frequencies. Since there is no input. Rb Ra VS 1 jωC + V0 − Summing the currents leaving the inverting input gives − Rearranging yields jω Rb Rb V0 =− =− 1 Vs Ra j ω + R1C Ra + j ωC a At cutoff frequency ωc = 100 rad/s = 1 . Rb 5 √ = Ra 2 ωc ωc2 + 1 Ra C 2 . and the noninverting input is connected to ground. then the output is zero. the capacitor acts like an open circuit and so no input voltage is seen at the noninverting input.146 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Solution. The operation of this ﬁlter is readily apparent for at low frequencies. As before. Since the op amp is assumed ideal. the phasor method will be used to solve this problem by ﬁrst transforming the circuit into the phasor domain as shown in the following ﬁgure. Ra C V0 Vs − =0 1 Rb Ra + j ωC The magnitude of ω ω2 + 1 Ra C 2 V0 Vs is given by V0 Rb = Vs Ra and at the cutoff frequency. which reduces the circuit to an inverting ampliﬁer that passes through high frequency signals. therefore the inverting input is also connected to ground.
say Rb = 20 k . Since we have three unknowns and two equations. As can be seen. the cutoff frequency gives a value of magnitude equal to 3.53 at 500 Hz. design the ﬁlter to have a gain of 5 and pass through frequencies from 100 to 500 rad/s. 6 5 4 Magnitude 3 2 1 0 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 Frequency (rad/s) The next example demonstrates the technique to create a bandpass ﬁlters (which require two cutoff frequencies). gives Rb 5 √ = Ra 2 ωc ωc2 + 1 Ra C 2 = Rb Rb 100 Rb Ra C = =√ √ Ra 1002 + 1002 Ra 100 2Ra 1 Rb Thus R a = 5. which is the design goal. Example 13.5 μF 100Ra 100 × 4000 A plot of the magnitude versus frequency is shown in the following ﬁgure. .ACTIVE ANALOG FILTERS 147 With 1 Ra C = 100 and ωc = 100 rad/s. Using the bandpass ﬁlter in the following circuit. and the other two elements are determined as Ra = and C= 20000 Rb = = 4k 5 5 1 1 = = 2.3. one can select a convenient value for one of the elements.
thus a lowpass and highpass ﬁlter cascaded together form a bandpass. the noninverting input to the op amps are connected to ground. which means that the inverting input is also connected to ground. The phasor domain circuit is given in the next ﬁgure. Note the elements around the op amp on the left are the lowpass ﬁlter circuit elements. when working with op amps. Summing the currents leaving the inverting input for each op amp gives − − Vs VL VL − 1 − =0 Ra L Rb L j ωC L Ra H VL V0 − =0 1 Rb H + j ωC H . ﬁlters can be cascaded together to form other ﬁlters. and those on the right. 1 jωC L RbL Ra L VS RbH + VL − Ra H 1 jωCH + V0 − As before. the highpass ﬁlter. and makes use of work done in the previous two examples. the design of the ﬁlter is done in the phasor domain. In fact. As usual.148 BIOINSTRUMENTATION CL R bL Ra L VS R bH + vL − R aH CH + v0 − Solution.
The magnitude of the ﬁlter is V0 Rb = H Vs Ra H ω ω2 + 1 Ra H C H 2 1 Ra L C L ω2 + 1 Rb L C L 2 Since there are two cutoff frequencies. two equations evolve. ωc H = and ωc L = 1 = 500 rad/s Rb L C L 5 √ .ACTIVE ANALOG FILTERS 149 Solving the ﬁrst equation for VL gives VL = − 1 Ra L C L 1 j ω + Rb 1C L L Vs Solving the second equation for V0 gives V0 = − Rb H jω VL Ra H j ω + R 1C a H H Substituting VL into the previous equation yields V0 = jω Rb H 1 × 1 Ra H j ω + R C Ra L C L a H H 1 j ω + Rb 1C L L Vs The form of the solution is simply the product of each ﬁlter. the magnitude is 5 Rb √ = H Ra H 2 ωc H ωc2H + such that at ωc H = 100 rad/s 1 Ra L C L 1 Ra H C H 2 2 ωC H + 1 1 Rb L C L 2 100 Rb Ra L C L = H√ √ 2 + 1002 Ra H 100 1002 + 5002 . 2 1 = 100 rad/s Ra H C H At the either cutoff frequency.
1–13.5 0 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 Frequency (rad/s) None of the ﬁlters in Examples 13. To improve the performance from the passband to stopband in a lowpass ﬁlter with a sharper transition.5 2 1. giving Rb H = 50. Rb 1C L = 500 and 500 26 = Ra RaH C L ). A plot of the magnitude versus frequency is shown in the following ﬁgure. H H L H L 1 500Rb L = 20nF and √ Rb H = 500 26C L Ra H = 5.1 μF.53 at 500 Hz. For convenience. which gives C L = √ Rb 1 C H = 100Ra = 0. There are now √ Rb three equations ( Ra 1C H = 100. the better the performance. say Ra L = 10 k . set Rb L = 100 k and Ra H = 100 k . 13. . i.e.5 3 Magnitude 2. The more cascaded ﬁlters. one can specify one of the resistors. which is the design goal.150 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Therefore.099 Ra L H L Once again.5 1 0. the cutoff frequency gives a value of magnitude equal to 3. and six unknowns. one can cascade identical ﬁlters together.5 4 3. The magnitude of the overall ﬁlter is the product of the individual ﬁlter magnitudes.1. √ 500 26 = Rb H Ra H Ra L C L The other cutoff frequency gives the same result as the previous equation. connect the output of the ﬁrst ﬁlter to the input of the next ﬁlter and so on. As can be seen. Now from 500 26 = Ra H Ra 1C L ..099 k .3 have the ideal characteristics of Fig. 4.
ACTIVE ANALOG FILTERS C1 151 R1 R2 VS C2 v0 C2 R2 R1 R3 V S C1 C3 v0 FIGURE 13. 13. (Bottom) Thirdorder Butterworth lowpass ﬁlter. While this approach is appealing for improving the performance of the ﬁlter.3: (Top) Secondorder Butterworth lowpass ﬁlter. . Better ﬁlters are available with superior performance such as a Butterworth ﬁlter. the overall magnitude of the ﬁlter does not remain a constant in the passband. Two Butterworth ﬁlters are shown in Fig. Analysis of these ﬁlters is carried out in Exercises 183 and 184.3.
.
we often sample at ﬁve to ten times the highest frequency content of the signal so as to achieve better accuracy by reducing aliasing error. This kind of noise is effectively reduced by careful attention to the circuit’s wiring conﬁguration to minimize coupling effects.g. . The A/D converter uniformly samples the continuoustime waveform and transforms it into a sequence of numbers. To adequately capture the continuoustime signal. The minimum sampling rate is twice the highest frequency content of the signal (based on the sampling theorem from communication theory). power lines and transmitted radio and television electromagnetic waves. Interference noise is introduced by power lines (50 or 60 Hz). one every tk seconds. Even the action potentials from nerve conduction in the patient generate noise at the sensor/ampliﬁer interface.153 CHAPTER 14 Bioinstrumentation Design Figure 14.. 14. Electromagnetic energy radiating from noise sources is injected into the ampliﬁer circuit or into the patient by capacitive and/or inductive coupling. The purpose of this type of instrument is to monitor the output of a sensor or sensors and to extract information from the signals that are produced by the sensors. the amplitude takes one of 2n discrete values) which are converted into computer words and stored in computer memory. ﬂuorescent lights. AM/FM radio broadcasts. e. the sampling instants tk must be selected carefully so that information is not lost. Filters are used to reduce the noise and to maximize the signaltonoise (S/N) ratio at the input of the A/D converter. computer clock oscillators. Interference noise occurs when unwanted signals are introduced into the system by outside sources. The A/D converter also transforms the continuoustime wave form into a digital signal (i.e. cellular phones. etc.1 NOISE Measurement signals are always corrupted by noise in a biomedical instrumentation system.1 described the various elements needed in a biomedical instrumentation system. Realistically. Acquiring a discretetime signal and storing this signal in computer memory from a continuoustime signal is accomplished with an analogtodigital (A/D) converter. laboratory equipment.
Bandstop ﬁlters are commonly used to reduce powerline noise. along with control and feedback. hence. computers. noise signals within the frequency range of the biosignal being ampliﬁed cannot be eliminated by this ﬁltering approach. The notch frequency in these bandstop ﬁlters is set to the powerline frequency of 50 or 60 Hz with the cutoff frequencies located a few Hertz to either side. 14. the arithmetic and logic unit (ALU). etc. radio broadcasts. cellular phones. sensor drift. Powerline noise is a very difﬁcult problem in biological monitoring since the 50 or 60 Hz frequency is usually within the frequency range of the biological signal that is being measured. storage and display capabilities. Lowpass ﬁlters can be used to reduce high frequency components.) is eliminated by a highpass ﬁlter with the cutoff frequency set above the noise frequencies and below the biological signal frequencies. The second type of corrupting signal is called inherent noise. is reduced by good circuit design practice. However. temperature ﬂuctuations.1: Basic instrumentation systems using sensors to measure a signal with data acquisition. Low frequency noise (ampliﬁer DC offsets. it can never be eliminated. Inherent noise arises from random processes that are fundamental to the operation of the circuit’s elements and. etc.154 BIOINSTRUMENTATION Sensor Calibration Analog processing A/D Control & feedback Signal processing Output display Data storage Data transmission FIGURE 14.2 COMPUTERS Computers consist of three basic units: the central processing unit (CPU). and memory.) is reduced by a lowpass ﬁlter with the cutoff set below the noise frequencies and above the frequencies of the biological signal that is being monitored. High frequency noise (nerve conduction. The CPU directs the functioning of all other units and controls . While inherent noise can be reduced.
Computers are binary devices that use the presence of an electrical signal to represent 1 and the absence of an electrical pulse to represent 0. Ordinarily.g. RAM is where usergenerated programs. At the next level. Instructions in these languages often resemble English and contain commonly used mathematical notations. ROM is permanently programmed into the integrated circuit that forms the basis of the CPU and cannot be changed by the user. Most desktop computers that are available today are 32bit systems. are represented by special codes. Letters of the alphabet and other symbols. and divide) as well as logical operations (AND. A word is made up of 2 bytes. It is controlled by program instructions. Machine language represents the natural language of a particular computer. word processing ﬁles are saved in special programspeciﬁc binary formats. The ﬁrst microcomputers were 8bit devices that could interact with only 256 memory locations. Programs written in assembly language can manipulate memory locations directly. These programs run very quickly and are often used in data acquisition systems that must rapidly acquire a large number of samples. but almost all data analysis programs can import and export data in ASCII ﬁles. Program instructions are designed to tell computers when and how to use various hardware components to solve speciﬁc problems. assembly languages use Englishlike abbreviations for binary equivalents. and C++. perhaps from an array of sensors. ASCII stands for the American Standard Code for Information Exchange. These instructions must be delivered to the CPU of a computer in the correct sequence in order to give the desired result. The signals are combined in groups of 8 bits . Higher level languages. input data. punctuation marks.BIOINSTRUMENTATION DESIGN 155 the ﬂow of information among the units during processing procedures. how often samples should be taken from how . and processed data are stored.g. subtract. they are saved in ASCII format. programming instructions tell the computer when data acquisition should begin. at a very high sampling rate. ASCII provides a common standard that allows different types of computers to exchange information. e. which means that they can address 4. The ALU performs all arithmetic calculations (add. FORTRAN. Programming languages relate instructions and data to a ﬁxed array of binary bits so that the speciﬁc arrangement has only one meaning. Higher level languages are easier to learn than machine and assembly languages. contain statements that accomplish tasks that require many machine or assembly language statements. When word processing ﬁles are saved as text ﬁles. Computer memory consists of read only memory (ROM) and random access memory (RAM). NOT) that compare one set of information to another. a byte. PERL. RAM stores information temporarily and can be changed by the user. to code information.29 × 109 locations in memory. The lowest level of computer languages is machine language and consists of the 0s and 1s that the computer interprets. When computers are used to acquire physiological data. multiply. OR. e.
.g. e. how long data acquisition should continue. The rate at which a system can acquire samples is dependent upon the speed of the computer’s clock. the gain of the input ampliﬁers must be manually adjusted.156 BIOINSTRUMENTATION many sensors. Some computers can also control the gain on the input ampliﬁers so that signals can be adjusted during data acquisition. and where the digitized data should be stored. 233 MHz. In other systems. and the number of computer instructions that must completed in order to take a sample.
(b) v = −10 V and i = −2 A. ﬁnd the total charge at: (a) 1 s. 2. (c) v = −5 V and i = −5 A. 3. Find the power absorbed for the circuit element in Fig. (b) 2 s.5 is i(t) = Find q (t). (c) 3 s and (d) 4 s. (c) v = −5 V and i = 2 A. 3.5 ms? (b) Find i(t). (b) v = 5 V and i = 12 A. (d) v = −5 V and i = 2 A. 6. Determine the current for t ≥ 0. The charge entering the upper terminal in the circuit element in Fig. 5.5. (d) v = 10 V and i = 3 A. 3. Find the power absorbed for the circuit element in Fig. i(t) (A) 2 0 t<0 −2t 5e A t≥0 1 1 −1 2 3 4 (s) t 4. Suppose the current ﬂowing through the circuit element in Fig.157 Exercises 1. 3. (a) How much charge enters the terminal from t = 0 to t = 0.5 is 3 sin(2000t) μC.5 if (a) v = 10 V and i = −2 A.5 if (a) v = 5 V and i = −2 A. Let the charge entering the upper terminal in the circuit element in Fig. Let i(t) shown in the following diagram ﬂow through the circuit element in Fig. 3.5 be q (t) = e −1000t sin(2000πt) C for t ≥ 0. With i(t) = 0 for t < 0. 3. . 3.
0 1 2 3 t (s) 0 1 2 3 t (s) i (A) 2 v (V) 1 1 c. 3. 0 1 2 t (s) 0 1 2 t (s) i (A) 2 v (V) 1 1 b.158 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 7.5 if v (V) 2 i (A) 1 1 a. 0 1 2 3 t (s) 0 1 2 t (s) . Find the power absorbed for the circuit element in Fig.
3. The voltage and current at the terminals in Fig. The voltage and current at the terminals in Fig.000t u(t) V i = (t + 10)e −10.5 are v = te −10. 0 1 2 t (s) 0 1 2 t (s) 8. t (s) 0 2 t (s) i (A) 2 v (V) 1 1 e. .5 if v = 3e −1000t u(t) V i = 5e −1000t u(t) A 9. (b) Find the maximum power. 3.EXERCISES 159 v (V) 1 i (A) 1 0 2 d.5 are v = e −500t u(t) V i = 2te −500t u(t) A (a) Find the time when the power is at its maximum. 3. 10.000t u(t) A (a) Find the time when the power is at its maximum.004 s. (b) Find the energy delivered to the circuit element at t = 0. (c) Find the total energy delivered to the circuit element. Find the total energy delivered to the circuit element in Fig.
(d) Find the total energy delivered to the circuit element. (c) the power absorbed and delivered. For the following circuit. (b) I2 . 11.160 BIOINSTRUMENTATION (c) Find the energy delivered to the circuit at t = 1 × 10−4 s. ﬁnd: (a) I1 .5 is ⎧ ⎪ 0V ⎪ ⎪ ⎨t V v= ⎪ ⎪2 − t V ⎪ ⎩ 0V If ⎧ ⎪0 W ⎪ ⎪ ⎨t 2 W p= 2 ⎪t − 4t + 4 W ⎪ ⎪ ⎩ 0W t<0 0≤t≤1 1<t≤2 t>2 t<0 0≤t≤1 1<t≤2 t>2 how much charge enters the terminal between t = 0 and t = 2 s? 12. 2A 3A + 2V − + V3 − 2V 3V I1 V2 4V 13. The voltage at the terminals in Fig. 4V I2 4V 2V1 + V1 − 5A 2V . V2 and V3 . (b) the power absorbed and delivered. For the following circuit ﬁnd (a) V1 . 3.
ﬁnd (a) I1 and I2 . 2A + 5V − + V1 − 2 V1 3V 2V 3A I1 6V 15. (b) the power absorbed and delivered.EXERCISES 161 14. ﬁnd the power in each circuit element. 2Ω I1 I2 2Ω 14 V 6Ω 2Ω 2Ω 2Ω . For the following circuit. 3A 5V 2A 3V 10 V 4A 4V 16. (b) power dissipated in each resistor. For the following circuit ﬁnd (a) V1 . For the following circuit. (c) show that the power dissipated equals the power generated.
162 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 17. (b) Show that the power dissipated equals the power generated. Find VR in the following circuit. 8V I 4Ω 12 V 2Ω 5Ω 3I . (a) Find the power dissipated in each resistor. Find I in the following circuit. 1Ω 2V 4Ω 5V 5V 3Ω 18. 2Ω 2 VR + 10 V VR 3Ω − 5Ω 3V 19.
4Ω a 4Ω 3Ω 4Ω 2Ω b . Find ib for the following circuit. I2 I1 1 Ω 3 1 Ω 8 1 Ω 4 3A 3 I1 22. Find the equivalent resistance Rab for the following circuit. + ib 5A 3Ω 6Ω Va 2Va 8Ω 2Ω − 23.EXERCISES 163 20. IR 4A 2Ω 2A 1Ω 3 IR 21. Find I2 in the following circuit. Find I R in the following circuit.
Find the equivalent resistance Rab for the following circuit. Find the equivalent resistance Rab for the following circuit. 6Ω 2Ω 9Ω 4Ω a 2Ω b 4Ω 6Ω . 8Ω a 8Ω 2Ω 2Ω 6Ω 6Ω 4Ω 3Ω b 26. 7Ω a 8Ω 4Ω 2Ω 4Ω 1Ω 3Ω 3Ω 2Ω b 3Ω 25.164 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 24. Find the equivalent resistance Rab for the following circuit.
EXERCISES 165 27. I1 3Ω 5A 2Ω 4Ω 2Ω 30. Find I1 for the following circuit. a 17 Ω b 10 Ω 20 Ω 20 Ω 7Ω 15 Ω 8Ω 5Ω 29. 2Ω I1 5Ω 20 A 16 Ω 80 Ω 3Ω + V1 − 12 Ω . Find the equivalent resistance Rab for the following circuit. 12 Ω 1Ω 12 Ω 4Ω 3Ω 6Ω a 5Ω b 1Ω 4Ω 28. Find I1 and V1 for the following circuit. Find the equivalent resistance Rab for the following circuit.
Find I1 and V1 for the following circuit. 3Ω 6Ω I1 18 V 6Ω 9Ω 4. 5Ω + 2Ω + 10 Ω 35 V v1 3Ω v2 3Ω 50 V − − 34.166 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 31. + 2Ω + 2A v1 16 Ω v2 10 Ω 5A − − . Use the nodevoltage method to determine v1 and v2 . Find I1 . Use the nodevoltage method to determine v1 and v2 . V1 and V2 for the following circuit. I1 5Ω 10 A 15 Ω 20 Ω + V1 − 60 Ω 32.5 Ω 9Ω + + V1 − V2 − 33.
Use the nodevoltage method to determine v1 and v2 .EXERCISES 167 35. 2Ω + 3Ω 15 V v1 4Ω − + 5Ω 5A − v2 1Ω 36. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v1 and v2 . Use the nodevoltage method to determine v1 and v2 . + Va 3Ω 2A − + + 3A v1 2Ω v2 5Ω 1Ω 2Va − − . i1 + 2Ω + 2A v1 16 Ω v2 10 Ω 2 i1 − − 37.
4Ω 3Ω + 5V + 2Ω 10 V v1 5Ω v2 2Ω 3v1 4V − − . Use the nodevoltage method to determine v1 and v2 . 8Ω 4Ω + 8Ω + 4V 5V v1 5Ω v2 3Ω 10 Ω 6Ω 4A − − 40. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v1 and v2 . 5Ω 2A + 3Ω + ia Vb 3Ω − + 2Ω 10 Ω 10 V v1 2 Vb − 6Ω v2 5Ω 3 ia − 39.168 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 38. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v1 and v2 .
Use the nodevoltage method to determine v1 and v2 . Use the nodevoltage method to determine v1 and v2 . 5Ω ia 3Ω + 3ia + 15 V v1 2Ω v2 5Ω 5A − 2Ω 1Ω − . 5Ω ia 3Ω + 5Ω 2v1 5Ω 4Ω 4ia + 3V v1 6Ω v2 8Ω 2A − − 43. Use the nodevoltage method to determine v1 and v2 .EXERCISES 169 41. 3 ia ia + 3Ω + 5Ω 40 Ω 5A v1 2Ω v2 2A 20 Ω 10 V − − 42.
Use the meshcurrent method to determine i1 and i2 . Use the meshcurrent method to determine i1 and i2 . Use the meshcurrent method to determine i1 and i2 . Use the meshcurrent method to determine i1 and i2 . i1 5Ω i2 3Ω 5V 3i2 2Ω 10 Ω 5Ω 47. 5Ω 3Ω 10 V i2 20 Ω i1 10 Ω 4Ω 46. i1 2Ω i2 20 Ω 4Ω 3V 5V 2 i2 2V 5Ω 3Ω 6Ω .170 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 44. i1 10 Ω i2 20 Ω 5V 15 Ω 2V 10 Ω 5Ω 45.
Use the meshcurrent method to determine i1 and i2 . 5Ω i1 3Ω 2Ω 10 V 3i 1 20 V i2 5Ω 10 Ω 4Ω 15 Ω 49. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i1 and i2 . 10Ω i1 4Ω + 20 V i2 10 Ω 10 V va 4Ω 6Ω 2va − 2Ω 5Ω 3Ω 50. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i1 and i2 .EXERCISES 171 48. 3A i2 8Ω i1 4Ω 2V 3Ω 4V 2Ω 5Ω .
Use the meshcurrent method to determine i1 and i2 . 2va + 1Ω i2 5Ω 3Ω 4Ω va 2Ω − i1 10 Ω 2V 4Ω 2i1 2A 5V 5Ω 6Ω . Use the meshcurrent method to determine i1 and i2 . Use the meshcurrent method to determine i1 and i2 .172 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 51. + va 2Ω − i1 5Ω i2 3Ω 3Ω 5V 5A 3va 3Ω 2Ω 52. 3Ω 4Ω 5Ω 3i1 6Ω i1 5Ω 2Ω 6V 2A 3Ω 2Ω i2 10 V 4Ω 53.
Use a series of source transformations and resistor combinations to ﬁnd vo . i1 2Ω 3Ω i2 5Ω 2V 5Ω 3A 10 V 5Ω 6Ω − 3Ω 8Ω 3 va 5V 2Ω va 5V + 6Ω 4Ω 55. Use the meshcurrent method to determine i1 and i2 . 3Ω 6Ω 2V + 2A 5Ω 4A 3Ω 5Ω vo − 56.EXERCISES 173 54. Use a series of source transformations and resistor combinations to ﬁnd vo . 2Ω 4Ω 5Ω + 10 V 2Ω 5A 10 Ω 10 Ω 15 Ω vo − 4Ω .
174 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 57. Use the superposition method to ﬁnd vo . Use the superposition method to ﬁnd vo . 4Ω + 3Ω 5V v0 2Ω 10 V 2Ω − 59. Use the superposition method to ﬁnd vo .5 Ω 2Ω 3Ω + 5Ω 3A 2Ω 4V ia 2ia 3V 4Ω vo − . 3A 4Ω 2Ω 5V 5Ω 3Ω 2Ω 2A 6Ω 10 Ω 2V − 10 Ω vo + 58. 0. 3Ω 0. Use a series of source transformations and resistor combinations to ﬁnd vo .5 Ω 3Ω 2V + 4V 3Ω 3Ω vo 10 A 2Ω − 60.
Find the Th´ venin equivalent with respect to terminals a and b. Use the superposition method to ﬁnd vo . e 5Ω 2Ω a 35 V 3Ω b 50 V 10 Ω 64. + va − 2Ω 5Ω 3Ω + vo − 2Ω 5V 5A 3va 3Ω 62.EXERCISES 175 61. Find the Th´ venin equivalent with respect to terminals a and b. e a b 2Ω 3Ω 15 V 4Ω 5Ω 5A 1Ω . e 3Ω a 5A 2Ω 5Ω b 63. Find the Th´ venin equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
Find the Th´ venin equivalent with respect to terminals a and b. 8Ω 6Ω a 5V 8Ω 10 Ω b . e i1 2Ω a 2A 16 Ω 10 Ω 2i1 b 66. e + va − 3Ω 5A a 3A 2Ω 5Ω b 2va 67. Find the Th´ venin equivalent with respect to terminals a and b. e 3ia ia 3Ω 5Ω a 40 Ω 5A 2Ω 2A b 10 V 68. Find the Norton equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.176 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 65. Find the Th´ venin equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
EXERCISES
177
69. Find the Norton equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
8Ω a 5A 2Ω b 3Ω 5A 2Ω
70. Find the Norton equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
a b
2Ω
4Ω
2A
3Ω
8Ω
2V
6Ω
71. Find the Norton equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
3Ω 3ia 6Ω a
5V
ia
2Ω
2Ω
b
72. Find the Norton equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
+
va 8Ω
−
ia 5Ω
5ia 5Ω a
2V 3Ω
2va
6Ω
4Ω
3Ω
b
178
BIOINSTRUMENTATION
73. Find the Norton equivalent with respect to terminals a and b.
5i 1 a 2Ω 10 V i1 6Ω 3V b
3Ω
5Ω
74. A current pulse given by i(t) = (2 + 10e −2t )u(t) is applied through a 10 mH inductor. (a) Find the voltage across the inductor. (b) Sketch the current and voltage. (c) Find the power as a function of time. 75. A current pulse given by i(t) = (5 + 3 sin(2t))u(t) is applied through a 2 mH inductor. Determine the voltage across the inductor. 76. The current pulse shown in the following ﬁgure is applied through a 5 mH inductor. Find the voltage, power and energy.
i(t) (A) 1
0
1
2
3
4
t (s)
−1
77. The voltage across an L = 2.5 mH inductor is v(t) = 10 cos(1000t) mV, with i(0) = 1 mA. (a) Find i(t) for t ≥ 0. (b) Find the power and energy.
EXERCISES
179
78. The voltage across an inductor is given by the following ﬁgure. If L = 30 mH and i(0) = 0 A, ﬁnd i(t) for t ≥ 0.
v
(mv) 4
0
1
2
3
t
(s)
79. The voltage across an inductor is given by the following ﬁgure. If L = 50 mH and i(0) = 0 A, ﬁnd i(t) for t ≥ 0.
v
(mv) 1
0
1
2
t
(s)
80. The voltage across a 4 μF capacitor is v(t) = (200,000t − 50,000)e −2000t u(t) V. Find (a) current through the capacitor, (b) power as a function of time, (c) energy. 81. The voltage across a 0.5 μF capacitor is v(t) = (3 + 5e −2t )u(t) V. Find the current and power. 82. The voltage across a 1 μF capacitor is v(t) = (5t + 3 sin(2t))e −3t u(t) V. Find the current and power. 83. The current through a 5 μF capacitor is ⎧ ⎪0 mA t < 0 ms ⎪ ⎪ 2 ⎨5t mA 0 ≤ t < 1 ms √ i(t) = ⎪5 2 − t 2 mA 1 <t ≤ 2 ms ⎪ √ ⎪ ⎩ 0 mA t > 2 ms Find the voltage across the capacitor.
180
BIOINSTRUMENTATION
84. The current through a 10 μF capacitor is given by the following ﬁgure. If v(1) = 0 V, ﬁnd v(t) for t > 1 s.
(mA) 1
i
0
1
2
3
t
(ms)
85. The current through a 100 μF capacitor is given by the following ﬁgure. If v(0) is 0 V, ﬁnd v(t) for t ≥ 0 s.
i(t)
(mA) 2
0
1
2
t
(ms)
86. Find equivalent inductance between terminals a and b for the circuit in the following ﬁgure.
3H a 3H 4H 2H 2H
b
EXERCISES 181 87. Find equivalent inductance between terminals a and b for the circuit in the following ﬁgure. 7H a 4H 1H 8H 4H 2H 3H 3H 2H b 3H 88. 4F a 6F 1 F 2 6F b 4F 3F . Find the equivalent capacitance between terminals a and b for the following circuit. 8H a 8H 6H 6H 4H 2H 2H b 89. Find equivalent inductance between terminals a and b for the circuit in the following ﬁgure.
Find the equivalent capacitance between terminals a and b for the following circuit. 7F 5F 9F 4F a 5F 8F b 16 F 92. 4H a 10 F 4H 6H 1 H 2 8F 6H 1H 3H b 2F . Reduce the following circuit to a single capacitor and inductor. 3F 8F a 5F 6F 4F 4F 4F b 6F 91.182 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 90. Find the equivalent capacitance between terminals a and b for the following circuit.
For the following circuit. (a) Find v(t) for t ≥ 0. IS = 5 sin 2t A and i(0) = Find i(t) for t ≥ 0. (b) Find i(t) for t ≥ 0. Reduce the following circuit to a single capacitor and inductor.EXERCISES 183 93. IS = 2(1 − e −5t )u(t) A and i(0) = 2 A. (b) IS 20 H 5H 4H . For the following circuit. a 4F 3H 5F 4H 6H 18 F 1H 1H 6F b 94. (a) Find v(t) for t ≥ 0. i + v − 1 2 A. i 2 (1 − e−5t ) u(t ) A 20 H + v − 5H 95.
IS = 5(1 − e −3t ) u(t) A.184 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 96. (d) i1 (t). VS = 3(1 − e −5t ) u(t) V and v(0) = 2 V. i1 (0) = 1 A. (b) v(t). i0 + v0 − 1H i1 IS 20 H + v1 − i2 5H 97. Find the following for t ≥ 0: (a)vo (t). Find the following for t ≥ 0: (a) i(t). (c) io (t). (b) v(t). i 6F VS 3F + v − 98. For the following circuit. VS = 5 cos 3t V and v(0) = 1 V. (b)v1 (t). and i2 (0) = 2 A. (e) i2 (t). For the following circuit. For the following circuit. i 20 F VS 5F + v − . Find the following fort ≥ 0: (a)i(t).
(d) i2 (t). v1 (0) = 3 V and v2 (0) = 2 V. 3Ω a t=0 iL + v1 − b 6V 10 Ω 2H 101. At t = 0. For the following circuit. (c) v2 (t). the switch instantaneously moves to position b. (b) v1 (t). the switch instantaneously moves to position b. Find i L and v1 for t > 0. Find the following for t ≥ 0: (a) i1 (t). At t = 0. Find i L and v1 for t > 0.EXERCISES −3t 185 99. + v 1− i1 5F VS 18 F + v2 − i2 2F 100. a 4Ω t=0 6Ω + v1 − iL b 8A 5Ω 4H 10 Ω . VS = 2(1 − e ) u(t) V. The switch has been in position a for a long time. The switch has been in position a for a long time.
At t = 0. a 2Ω t=0 iL + b 5A 2Ω 4 v1 − 2H 5Ω 20 Ω . Find i L and v1 for t > 0. Find i L and v1 for t > 0. At t = 0. The switch has been in position a for a long time. iL t= 0 a 8Ω + b 10 V 6Ω 3Ω v1 6Ω 5H − 104. Find i L and v1 for t > 0. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. The switch has been in position a for a long time. iL + a 2Ω t= 0 b 5V 12 Ω 4Ω v1 6Ω 5H − 103. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. At t = 0.186 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 102. The switch has been in position a for a long time.
a 2Ω t=0 iL + b 20 V 3Ω 20 H 5H v1 − 16 Ω . Find i L and v1 for t > 0. a 2Ω 3Ω t=0 iL + b 10 V 4Ω 4H v1 − 16 Ω 106. The switch has been in position a for a long time. The switch has been in position a for a long time. Find i L and v1 for t > 0. Find i L and v1 for t > 0. At t = 0.EXERCISES 187 105. a 8Ω t=0 12 Ω + v1 iL b 10 V 8Ω − 5Ω 2H 107. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. At t = 0. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. At t = 0. The switch has been in position a for a long time. the switch instantaneously moves to position b.
i1 and v1 for t > 0. At t = 0. 2i1 a 20 Ω t=0 i1 iL + v1 b 6A 5Ω 4Ω 40 Ω 6H − 10 Ω 110. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. Find vc and i1 for t > 0. a 5Ω t=0 i1 + b 10 V 10 Ω vC − 2F . a 2Ω t=0 iL + v1 i1 b 10 V 4Ω 5i1 − 3H 12 Ω 109. The switch has been in position a for a long time.188 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 108. Find i L . i1 and v1 for t > 0. Find i L . The switch has been in position a for a long time. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. At t = 0.
At t = 0. At t = 0. At t = 0. The switch has been in position a for a long time.EXERCISES 189 111. Find vc and i1 for t > 0. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. The switch has been in position a for a long time. Find vc and i1 for t > 0. The switch has been in position a for a long time. Find vc and i1 for t > 0. a 4Ω t=0 i1 8Ω 6Ω + b 5V 3Ω vC − 3F 113. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. a 2Ω 10 Ω t=0 i1 + b 10 V 8A 10 Ω 40 Ω vC − 10 F 112. a t=0 i1 12 Ω 10 Ω + b 8A 40 Ω 40 Ω vC − 10 F .
the switch instantaneously moves to position b. At t = 0. a 2Ω t=0 i1 + vC b 10 V 12 Ω 12 Ω 4Ω − 5F 115. At t = 0.190 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 114. The switch has been in position a for a long time. a 5Ω t=0 i1 + vC − b 20 V 4Ω 2i1 3F 12 Ω . The switch has been in position a for a long time. Find vc and i1 for t > 0. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. At t = 0. Find vc and i1 for t > 0. a 8Ω t=0 i1 + vC − b 20 V 40 Ω 4F 4F 10 Ω 117. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. a t=0 12 Ω i1 + vC − b 5A 153 Ω 8 8Ω 5Ω 4F 116. The switch has been in position a for a long time. Find vc and i1 for t > 0. The switch has been in position a for a long time. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. At t = 0. Find vc and i1 for t > 0.
The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0. Find i L and v1 for t > 0. At t = 0. the switch instantaneously moves to position b.EXERCISES 191 118. Find vc and i1 for t > 0. Find i L and v1 for t > 0. + v1 − t=0 a 5Ω 20 Ω iL b 10 V 3A 3H 120. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. a 12 Ω t=0 8Ω 4Ω + v1 − iL b 5V 10 V 3H . The switch has been in position a for a long time. The switch has been in position a for a very long time. the switch moves to position b. At t = 0. 5i1 a 6Ω 20 Ω t=0 i1 + vC b 15 V 5Ω 12 Ω 8Ω 3Ω − 3F 119.
The switch has been in position a for a long time. a 2Ω t=0 i1 + v1 b 10 V 4Ω 3i1 − 3H 12 Ω 5V . iL t=0 a 2Ω + b 5V 12 Ω 10 V 4Ω v1 6Ω 5H − 123. The switch has been in position a for a long time. At t = 0.192 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 121. At t = 0. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. Find i1 and v1 for t > 0. Find i L and v1 for t > 0. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. a 2Ω 10 Ω t=0 iL + v1 10 H − b 5V 10 A 5A 40 Ω 122. The switch has been in position a for a long time. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. Find i L and v1 for t > 0. At t = 0.
EXERCISES 193 124. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. The switch has been in position a for a long time. The switch has been position a for a very long time. At t = 0. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. Find vC and i1 for t > 0. a 2Ω t=0 i1 + vC − b 3A 20 Ω 6Ω 3Ω 3F 10 V . At t = 0. i1 and v1 for t > 0. t=0 5Ω 20 Ω i1 5V 3A + vC − 2F 5Ω 126. the switch closes. At t = 0. Find vc and i1 for t > 0. 2i1 a 20 Ω t=0 i1 iL + v1 b 6A 5Ω 4Ω 40 Ω 3H − 10 Ω 4V 125. Find i L . The switch has been in position a for a long time.
The switch has been in position a for a long time. The switch has been in position a for a long time.194 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 127. Find vc and i1 for t > 0. The switch has been in position a for a long time. a 5Ω t=0 b 10 Ω 10 V + i1 8F 5V 2F vC − 129. At t = 0. i1 t=0 a 40 Ω b 120 V 5A 10 Ω + vC − 12 Ω 10 F 128. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. At t = 0. the switch instantaneously moves to position b. a 6Ω t=0 b 6F 5Ω 10 V 4Ω + vC − i1 6V 3F . the switch instantaneously moves to position b. At t = 0. Find vc and i1 for t > 0. Find vc and i1 for t > 0.
Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) is = 3u(t) A. The switches have been in positions a and c for a long time.06s c d 20 F + vC − 4Ω b 5A 2Ω 3A 5Ω 5F i1 5V 131. switch cd instantaneously moves to position d . The switches have been in positions a and c for a long time. At t = 0.15. iL + vC − is 5Ω 4H 3F . At t = 0.EXERCISES 195 130. switch cd instantaneously moves to position d . At t = 0. a t=0 2Ω t = 0.06. Find i1 and vc for t > 0. Find i1 and vc for t > 0. (b) is = 1 + 3u(t) A. switch ab instantaneously moves to position b. a t=0 10 Ω t = 0. At t = 0. switch ab instantaneously moves to position b.15 d b 4Ω c 3A 4V 6V 6Ω + vC − i1 3F 132.
(b) vs = 4 + 20u(t) V. 5Ω iL vs 20 Ω 3H + vC − 6F 134. iL + vC − is 5Ω 200 H 2F . iL is 10 Ω 2H + vC − 15 F 135. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) is = 3u(t) A. (b) is = −1 + 10u(t) A. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) vs = 20u(t) V. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) is = 10u(t) A. 4Ω iL vs 4Ω 16 H + vC − 1F 136. (b) is = −1 + 3u(t) A.196 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 133. (b) vs = 2 + 5u(t) V. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) vs = 5u(t) V.
(b) is = 5 + 5u(t) A. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) is = 10u(t) A. (b) vs = 2 + 3u(t) V. 4Ω iL + vC − vs 4Ω 20 H 1F 140.EXERCISES 197 137. (b) is = −1 + 10u(t) A. (b) vs = 12 + 5u(t) V. iL + vC − is 1Ω 25 H 5F . iL is 5Ω 350 H + vC − 3F 139. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) is = 5u(t) A. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) vs = 5u(t) V. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) vs = 3u(t) V. 6Ω iL vs 6Ω 360 H + vC − 10 F 138.
+ vC − 2Ω 1. i1 and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) vs = 5u(t) V.198 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 141. (b) is = 3u(t) − 1 A.5 F iL vs 4H 142. + vC − 1F is 4Ω iL 10 H 143. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) vs = 5u(t) V. (b) vs = 5u(t) + 3 V. + vC − 8 12 vs 4Ω i1 12 F 5i1 iL 12 H . Find i L . (b) is = 10u(t) + 5 A. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) is = 10u(t) A. + vC − 1Ω 4F iL is 2Ω 20 H 144. (b) vs = 5u(t) + 2 V. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) is = 3u(t) A.
+ vC − 16 F is 4Ω iL 64 H 146. + vC − 5Ω 4F iL vs 25 H 147. + vC − 6Ω 3F iL vs 5H . (b) vs = 4u(t) − 2 V.EXERCISES 199 145. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) is = 6u(t) A. (b) vc = 2u(t) + 2 V. (b) is = 3u(t) + 1 A. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) vs = 2u(t) V. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) vs = 4u(t) V.
+ vC − 2F is 9Ω iL 20 H 149. vc 2 (0) = −3 V and is = 2e −2t u(t) A. (c) Use the nodevoltage method to ﬁnd vb for t > 0. (b) is = 2u(t) − 1 A. i L2 (0) = 5 A. For the following circuit we are given that i L1 (0) = 2 A. + vC − 1Ω 10 F iL vs 2H 150. (b) Write the meshcurrent equations necessary to solve this circuit. + vC 1 − 1Ω + 2F iL1 + iL2 2F 2H 3H is 3Ω vb vC2 − 1Ω − . (d) Use the meshcurrent method to ﬁnd vb for t > 0.200 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 148. vc 1 (0) = 2 V. (b) vs = 5u(t) − 2 V. (a) Write the nodevoltage equations necessary to solve this circuit. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) vs = 5u(t) V. Find i L and vc for t > 0 for the following circuit if: (a) is = 2u(t) A.
3H 4F 2Ω vs 6Ω 3Ω + vC1 − 3F 152. (b) using the meshcurrent method if vs = 3e −5t u(t) V. (f ) using the meshcurrent method if vs = 3u(t) − 1 V. (c) using the nodevoltage method if vs = 3 sin(5t) u(t) V. (d) using the meshcurrent method if vs = 3 cos(2t) u(t) V. (e) using the nodevoltage method if vs = 3u(t) − 1 V. iL1 2H 2Ω 1 H 2 4Ω is 3F 153. (d) using the meshcurrent method if is = 3 cos(2t) u(t) A. (f ) using the meshcurrent method if is = 2u(t) + 2 A. Find vc 1 for t > 0 for the following circuit: (a) using the nodevoltage method if vs = 2e −3t u(t) V. (c) using the nodevoltage method if is = 3 cos(2t) u(t) A. Find i L1 for t > 0 for the following circuit: (a) using the nodevoltage method if is = 2e −3t u(t) A.EXERCISES 201 151. Find vc for t > 0 for the following circuit: (a) using the nodevoltage method if vs = 3e −5t u(t) V. (b) using the meshcurrent method if vs = 2e −3t u(t) V. (d) using the meshcurrent method if . (e) using the nodevoltage method if is = 2u(t) + 2 A. (c) using the nodevoltage method if vs = 3 cos(2t) u(t) V. (b) using the meshcurrent method if is = 2e −3t u(t) A.
(e) using the nodevoltage method if vs = 5u(t) − 2 V. Find vc for t > 0. At t = 0. (b) using the meshcurrent method if is = 5e −3t u(t) A. (f ) using the meshcurrent method if vs = 5u(t) − 2 V. 5Ω + vC1 − 3H 2H vs 1 F 2 4F 2F 154.202 BIOINSTRUMENTATION vs = 3 sin(5t) u(t) V. (e) using the nodevoltage method if is = 2u(t) + 3 A. Find i L for t > 0 for the following circuit: (a) using the nodevoltage method if is = 5e −3t u(t) A. the switch moves back to position a. (f ) using the meshcurrent method if is = 2u(t) + 3 A. (d) using the meshcurrent method if is = 2 sin(3t) u(t) A. The switch has been in position a for a long time. the switch moves to position b. (c) using the nodevoltage method if is = 2 sin(3t) u(t) A. 12 Ω a t= 0s 10 Ω t= 4s 3H b 4Ω + vC − 5V 2F 3Ω 10 V . then at t = 4. iL 3H 5H is 5Ω 2F 4F 2Ω 155.
Find i L for t > 0. 20 Ω 2i1 a t=0 i1 iL t=2s b 5Ω 4Ω 40 Ω 6A 3H 5F 4V . The switch has been in position a for a long time. and then back to position a at t = 2 s. At t = 0. 5Ω 3Ω t=0 4Ω 3F + vC − t = 1s 10 V 3A 10 Ω 2H 157. Find vc for t > 0. the switch moves to position b. The switches operate as indicated in the following circuit. Find vc for t > 0. The switches operate as indicated in the following circuit. 2Ω a t=0s t=2s i1 2Ω b 4Ω 12 Ω + vC − 10 V 5i1 3H 3F 5V 158.EXERCISES 203 156.
The operational ampliﬁer shown in the following ﬁgure is ideal. Find vo and io . The operational ampliﬁer shown in the following ﬁgure is ideal. 100 kΩ +12 V i0 + 25 kΩ 5 kΩ 2V 3V −12 V 20 kΩ v0 − 160. Find vo and io . Find vo and io . 120 kΩ +10 V i0 + −10 V 2V 5 kΩ v0 30 kΩ − 161. The operational ampliﬁer shown in the following ﬁgure is ideal.204 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 159. 200 kΩ +12 V i0 + −12 V 5V 6V 25 kΩ v0 50 kΩ − .
Find the overall gain for the following circuit if the operational ampliﬁer is ideal. Find vo . 90 kΩ 100 kΩ +12 V + 5 kΩ 10 V 5V −12 V 20 kΩ v0 80 kΩ 20 kΩ − 163. Find vo in the following circuit if the operational ampliﬁer is ideal. +12 V + −12 V VS 10 kΩ v0 5 kΩ − 20 kΩ 164. The operational ampliﬁer shown in the following ﬁgure is ideal. Draw a graph of vo versus Vs if Vs varies between 0 and 10 V. 5 kΩ 2 kΩ +9 V 10 kΩ 3 5V 4V 9V 3 kΩ + 6 kΩ −9 V v0 − .EXERCISES 205 162.
10 kΩ +12 V 20 kΩ +12 V 3 kΩ i0 5 kΩ 2 kΩ 4 kΩ 5V 3V −12 V − 12 V 5V 4V 167. 1 kΩ 3 kΩ +12 V 6 kΩ 10 V 3V 5V −12 V v0 + − 166. Find vo in the following circuit if the operational ampliﬁer is ideal.206 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 165. 20 kΩ 1 kΩ 5 kΩ +12 V 3 kΩ 3 kΩ 8V 5V −12 V 1V +12 V + −12 V 3 kΩ v0 − . Find vo in the following circuit if the operational ampliﬁers are ideal. Find io in the following circuit if the operational ampliﬁers are ideal.
Suppose the input Vs is given in the following ﬁgure. Vs 10 (V) 0 1 2 3 4 t (s) −10 .EXERCISES 207 168. 1 Ω 2 2F +12 V + −12 V VS v0 − Vs (V) 1 0 1 2 3 4 t (s) −1 169. If there is no stored energy in the following circuit with an ideal operational ampliﬁer. Suppose the input Vs is given as a triangular waveform as shown in the following ﬁgure. ﬁnd vo . ﬁnd vo . If there is no stored energy in the following circuit with an ideal operational ampliﬁer.
Suppose the input Vs is given in the following ﬁgure. If there is no stored energy in the following circuit with an ideal operational ampliﬁer.6μ F +12 V + −12 V VS v0 − 170. ﬁnd vo . Vs (V) 2 0 1 2 t (s) 2 1μF 250 kΩ +12 V + −12 V VS v0 − .208 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 1 MΩ 0.
2 0.25μ F 50 kΩ +12 V + −12 V VS v0 − 172. ﬁnd vo .2 0.EXERCISES 209 171. The following circuit is operating in the sinusoidal steady state. Vs (V) 0. iL + vC − is 5Ω 4H 3F .5 0. If there is no stored energy in the following circuit with an ideal operational ampliﬁer.75 1 t (s) 0. Find the steadystate expression for i L if is = 30 cos 20t A.25 −0. Suppose the input Vs is given in the following ﬁgure.
4Ω iL + vC − vs 4Ω 16 H 1F 176. Design a lowpass ﬁlter with a magnitude of 10 and a cutoff frequency of 250 rad/s. Find the steadystate expression for i L if is = 5 cos 500t A.210 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 173. The following circuit is operating in the sinusoidal steady state. . 5Ω iL + vC − vs 20 Ω 3H 6F 174. iL + vC − is 10 Ω 2H 15 F 175. 177. The following circuit is operating in the sinusoidal steady state. Design a highpass ﬁlter with a magnitude of 20 and a cutoff frequency of 300 rad/s. Find the steadystate expression for vc if vs = 10 sin 1000t V. The following circuit is operating in the sinusoidal steady state. Find the steadystate expression for vc if is = 25 cos 4000t V.
179. Suppose the operational ampliﬁer in the following circuit is ideal. (The circuit is a lowpass ﬁrstorder Butterworth ﬁlter. Design a bandpass ﬁlter a gain of 15 and pass through frequencies from 50 to 200 rad/s. R + VS C v0 − 183. C1 R1 R2 + VS C2 v0 − . With an ideal operational ampliﬁer.EXERCISES 211 178. 181. Design a lowpass ﬁlter with a magnitude of 5 and a cutoff frequency of 200 rad/s.) Find the magnitude of the output vo as a function of frequency. the following circuit is a secondorder Butterworth lowpass ﬁlter. Find the magnitude of the output vo as a function of frequency. 182. 180. Design a bandpass ﬁlter a gain of 10 and pass through frequencies from 20 to 100 rad/s. Design a highpass ﬁlter with a magnitude of 10 and a cutoff frequency of 500 rad/s.
212 BIOINSTRUMENTATION 184. Find the magnitude of the output vo as a function of frequency. C2 R2 R1 R3 + VS C1 C3 v0 − . A thirdorder Butterworth lowpass ﬁlter is shown in the following circuit with an ideal operational ampliﬁer.
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
Bioinstrumentation  John D. Enderle_1st ed will be available on